Você está na página 1de 759

GBSS

V900R013C00
Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13
Date 2012-09-17
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.






Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
Purpose
This document provides guidelines for enabling or disabling a feature after initial configuration.
Based on the activation, verification, and deactivation of a feature in the feature list, the
guidelines aim to ensure that the feature is available on the network.
This document describes how to activate a license and configure a feature in GBSS.
NOTE
The BSC6900 is used as an example to describe the network controller in this document.
Product Version
The following table lists the product version related to this document.
Product Name Product Version
BSC6900 V900R013C00
BTS3900/BTS3900A/DBS3900 BTS3900V100R013C00 and later versions
BTS3012/BTS3012AE/BTS3012II/
BTS3006C/BTS3002E
BTS3000V200R0013C00 and later versions
BTS3900B/BTS3900E BTS3000V600R0013C00 and later versions
BTS30/BTS312/BTS3012A V302R007 and later versions

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l Technical support engineers
l Maintenance engineers
l Field engineers
l Network optimization engineers
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
Organization
1 Changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide
This chapter describes the changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide.
2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
GBSSFeatures are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not license-
controlled and therefore do not require license activation before use. Some optional features are
license-controlled and therefore require license activation before use. If the Configuration
Method column for a basic feature in the RAN basic feature list is None, enabling this feature
does not involve any configurations. If the Configuration Method column for an optional feature
in the RAN optional feature list is None, this feature is enabled once it is activated.
3 Activating the GSM License
This describes how to activate the GSM license.
4 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-114401
Multi-band Sharing One BSC.
5 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110202
Emergency Call Service (TS12).
6 Configuring IMSI Detach
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110302
IMSI Detach.
7 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110601
HUAWEI I Handover.
8 Configuring Directed Retry
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110607
Directed Retry.
9 Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110502
Assignment and Immediate Assignment.
10 Configuring Call Reestablishment
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110503
Call Reestablishment.
11 Configuring TCH Re-assignment
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-112501
TCH Re-assignment.
12 Configuring Radio Link Management
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the link error indication procedure
of the basic feature GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management. Other procedures of the feature do
not need to be configured.
13 Configuring BTS Software Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the integrity check function
introduced in the basic feature MRFD-210402 BTS Software Management. Other functions
involved in the feature do not need to be configured.
14 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic features GBFD-111501
BTS Combined Cabinet and GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group.
15 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-118621
Connection Inter BSC over IP.
16 Configuring Link aggregation
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210103
Link aggregation.
17 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-117804
Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure.
18 Configuring Call-Based Flow Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-511003
Call-Based Flow Control.
19 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110802
Pre-Processing of Measurement Report.
20 Configuring System Information Sending
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111101
System Information Sending.
21 Configuring Daylight Saving Time
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature Daylight Saving
Time (DST).
22 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113001
SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment.
23 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-112401
Cell Frequency Scan.
24 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP)
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111806
Signaling Transport Point (STP).
25 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111802
14-Digit Signaling Point Code.
26 Configuring Discontinuous Reception (DRX)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-114802
Discontinuous Reception (DRX).
27 Configuring BTS Power Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111601
BTS Power Management.
28 Configuring Enhanced Power Control Algorithm
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110703
Enhanced Power Control Algorithm.
29 Configuring DTMF Downlink Message Filter
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113525
DTMF Downlink Message Filter.
30 Configuring High Speed Signaling
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-115201
High Speed Signaling.
31 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110521
Guaranteed Emergency Call.
32 Configuring License Control for Urgency
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-511001
License Control for Urgency.
33 Configuring the satellite transmission on the Pb interface
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113904
Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface.
34 Configuring Connection with TMA
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210601
Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier).
35 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210602
Remote Electrical Tilt.
36 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210604
2-Antenna Receive Diversity.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
37 Configuring BTS Clock
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210501
BTS Clock.
38 Configuring Voice Fault Detection
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-119301
Voice Fault Detection.
39 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210001
Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS).
40 Configuring PBT
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115901
Power Boost Technology (PBT).
41 Configuring Transmit Diversity
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115902
Transmit Diversity (TD).
42 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115903
4-Way Receiver Diversity. The 4-way receive diversity combines 4-way receive signals to
optimize the quality of uplink signals.
43 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118101
Dynamic Transmit Diversity.
44 Configuring Dynamic PBT
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118102
Dynamic PBT.
45 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118104
Enhanced EDGE Coverage.
46 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118106
Dynamic Power Sharing.
47 Configuring Extended Cell
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114001
Extended Cell.
48 Configuring Concentric Cell
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113201
Concentric Cell.
49 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114501
Co-BCCH Cell.
50 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114402
Enhanced Dual-Band Network.
51 Configuring Flex MAIO
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117001
Flex Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO).
52 Configuring ICC
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115801
ICC.
53 Configuring EICC
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115821
EICC.
54 Configuring VAMOS
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115830
VAMOS.
55 Configuring Mute SAIC MS Identification
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115831
Mute SAIC MS Identification.
56 Configuring VAMOS Call Drop Solution
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115832
VAMOS Call Drop Solution.
57 Configuring Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping)
This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-113701 Frequency
Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping).
58 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113702
BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping.
59 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113703
Antenna Frequency Hopping.
60 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118001
BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing.
61 Configuring IBCA
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117002
Interference Based Channel Allocation (IBCA).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
62 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118201
Soft-Synchronized Network.
63 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization
This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-510401 BTS GPS
Synchronization.
64 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118202
Synchronous Ethernet.
65 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117601
HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.
66 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114801
Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink.
67 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114803
Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink.
68 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111602
TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown.
69 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111603
TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level.
70 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111604
Intelligent Combiner Bypass.
71 Configuring Active Backup Power Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111605
Active Backup Power Control.
72 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111606
Power Optimization Based on Channel Type.
73 Configuring PSU Smart Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111608
PSU Smart Control.
74 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111609
Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization.
75 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111610
Dynamic Cell Power Off.
76 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111611
TRX Working Voltage Adjustment.
77 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment
This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier
Intelligent Voltage Adjustment.
78 Configuring Flex Abis
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117301
Flex Abis.
79 Configuring BTS Local Switch
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117702
BTS Local Switch.
80 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118401
Abis Transmission Optimization.
81 Configuring Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-112013
Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution.
82 Configuring Flex Ater
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116901
Flex Ater.
83 Configuring BSC Local Switch
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117701
BSC Local Switch.
84 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116902
Ater Compression Transmission.
85 Configuring Ring Topology
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117801
Ring Topology.
86 Configuring TRX Cooperation
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113801
TRX Cooperation.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
87 Configuring MSC Pool
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117401
MSC Pool.
88 Configuring the SGSN Pool
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701
SGSN Pool.
89 Configuring Abis Bypass
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116601
Abis Bypass.
90 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113721
Robust Air Interface Signalling.
91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117803
Abis Transmission Backup.
92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113725
BSC Node Redundancy.
93 Configuring TC Pool
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726
TC Pool. The A interface boards of the BSC that supports the TC Pool feature can use only TDM
transmission. The Ater interface boards can use TDM transmission or IP transmission.
94 Configuring OML Backup
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113728
OML Backup. When the operation and maintenance link (OML) backup function of the BTS is
enabled, the BTS automatically switches to anther port to set up an OML if the established OML
is disconnected, thereby reducing service interruption duration.
95 Configuring Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113729
Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking.
96 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510101
Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC).
97 Configuring Fast Move Handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510102
Fast Move Handover.
98 Configuring Chain Cell Handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510103
Chain Cell Handover.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
x
99 Configuring Multi-Site Cell
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510104
Multi-Site Cell.
100 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113901
Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface.
101 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113902
Satellite Transmission over A Interface.
102 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113903
Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface.
103 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113905
Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface.
104 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115301
Local Multiple Signaling Points.
105 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114701
Semi-Permanent Connection.
106 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116401
End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing.
107 Configuring Active Power Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117602
Active Power Control.
108 Configuring Ciphering
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-113501
A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm and GBFD-113503 A5/3 Ciphering Algorithm.
109 Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization
This section describes how to activate, verify, deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113521
A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization.
110 Configuring Enhanced Full Rate (EFR)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-113301
Enhanced Full Rate (EFR).
111 Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR)
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-113401 Half
Rate Speech (HR).
112 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113402
Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR.
113 Configuring the Cell Broadcast
Through the cell broadcast service, the mobile operator can broadcast specified short messages
in the cells controlled by one or more BTSs in the mobile network. All the MSs in the cells can
receive the short messages.
114 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115601
Automatic Level Control (ALC).
115 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115602
Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC).
116 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115603
Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR).
117 Configuring TFO
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115701
TFO.
118 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115703
Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC).
119 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115704
Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC).
120 Configuring EVAD
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-115711
EVAD, namely enhanced voice activity detection.
121 Configuring Voice Quality Index (VQI)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116801
Voice Quality Index (VQI).
122 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117501
Enhanced Measurement Report.
123 Configuring BTS power lift for handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117101
BTS power lift for handover.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xii
124 Configuring Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115522
Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation.
125 Configuring Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115708
Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing.
126 Configuring AMR
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-115501
AMR FR and GBFD-115502 AMR HR.
127 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115506
AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment.
128 Configuring WB AMR
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115507
WB AMR.
129 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119901
Streaming QoS(GBR).
130 Configuring QoS ARP&THP
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119902
QoS ARP&THP.
131 Configuring PS Active Package Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119904
PS Active Package Management.
132 Configuring PoC QoS
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119905
PoC QoS.
133 Configuring NC2
This section describes how to configure, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
GBFD-116201 Network Control Mode 2 (NC2).
134 Configuring Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116301
Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) and GBFD-119801 Packet SI Status(PSI).
135 Configuring GPRS
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114101
GPRS.
136 Configuring Network Operation Mode I
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiii
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510001
Network Operation Mode I.
137 Configuring CS-3/CS-4
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118901
CS-3/CS-4.
138 Configuring EGPRS
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114201
EGPRS.
139 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119201
11-Bit EGPRS Access, GBFD-119203 Extended Uplink TBF and the basic feature
GBFD-119202 Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS.
140 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119204
Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding.
141 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119302
Packet Channel Dispatching.
142 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119305
BSS Paging Coordination.
143 Configuring PS Handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119502
PS Handover.
144 Configuring Early TBF Establishment
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119503
Early TBF Establishment.
145 Configuring PS Power Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119504
PS Power Control.
146 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119505
PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds.
147 Configuring Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119506
Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User.
148 Configuring EDA
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119401
Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiv
149 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119402
MS High Multislot Classes.
150 Configuring DTM
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114151
DTM.
151 Configuring Class11 DTM
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119403
Class11 DTM.
152 Configuring HMC DTM
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119404
HMC DTM.
153 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data
This chapter describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature 14.4 kbit/s
Circuit Switched Data.
154 Configuring High Speed Circuit Switched Data
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119406
High Speed Circuit Switched Data.
155 Configuring Resource Reservation
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116001
Resource Reservation.
156 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115001
Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP).
157 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115002
Flow Control Based on Cell Priority.
158 Configuring Flow Control Based on User Priority
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115003
Flow Control Based on User Priority.
159 Configuring PS Service in Priority
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119907
PS Service in Priority.
160 Configuring Network Support SAIC
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118103
Network Support SAIC.
161 Configuring NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xv
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115401
NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA).
162 Configuring BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115402
BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA).
163 Configuring Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115403
Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA).
164 Configuring Lb Interface
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115404
Lb Interface.
165 Configuring Abis over IP
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118601
Abis over IP.
166 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118611
Abis IP over E1/T1.
167 Configuring Abis MUX
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118604
Abis MUX.
168 Configuring Abis IPHC
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118612
Abis IPHC.
169 Configuring A over IP
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118602
A over IP.
170 Configuring A IP over E1/T1
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118622
A IP over E1/T1.
171 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118610
UDP MUX for A Transmission.
172 Configuring TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118623
TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface.
173 Configuring Gb over IP
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118603
Gb over IP.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xvi
174 Configuring IP Performance Monitor
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118607
IP Performance Monitor.
175 Configuring Ethernet OAM
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118630
Ethernet OAM.
176 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-510601
PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning and GBFD-510701 Compact BTS Automatic
Configuration and Planning.
177 Configuring PICO Synchronization
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510602
PICO Synchronization.
178 Configuring PICO Dual-band Auto-planning
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510603
PICO Dual-band Auto-planning.
179 Configuring PICO USB Encryption
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510604
PICO USB Encryption.
180 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510606
PICO Sleeping Mode.
181 Configuring PICO Automatic Optimization
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510607
PICO Automatic Optimization.
182 Configuring PICO Transceiver Redundancy
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510608
PICO Transceiver Redundancy.
183 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510702
Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning.
184 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510704
Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization.
185 Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power Off
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510705
Compact BTS Timing Power Off.
186 Configuring Local User Management
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xvii
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510706
Local User Management.
187 Configuring VGCS and VBS
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate Voice Group Call Service (VGCS)
and Voice Broadcast Service (VBS).
188 Configuring GSM-T Relay
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510310
GSM-T Relay.
189 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510501
HUAWEI II Handover.
190 Configuring Handover Re-establishment
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510502
Handover Re-establishment.
191 Configuring BSS Sharing
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118701
BSS Sharing.
192 Configuring MOCN Shared Cell
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118702
MOCN Shared Cell.
193 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118703
IMSI-Based Handover.
194 Configuring Abis Independent Transmission
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118704
Abis Independent Transmission.
195 Configuring MSRD
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD 510801
Mobile Station Receive Diversity (MSRD).
196 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510802
Dual Carriers in Downlink (DLDC).
197 Configuring the EGPRS2-A
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510803
Uplink EGPRS2-A and GBFD-510804 Downlink EGPRS2-A.
198 Configuring Latency Reduction
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510805
Latency Reduction.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xviii
199 Configuring Access Control Class
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511002
Access Control Class (ACC).
200 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Interoperability
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114301
GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.
201 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114321
Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover.
202 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114322
GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover.
203 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114323
2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State.
204 Configuring the Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS Call Release
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-114325
Fast WCDMA Cell Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.
205 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511101
Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g.
206 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based
on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511102
NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA.
207 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511103
GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g.
208 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511104
GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g.
209 Configuring Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511301
Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE.
210 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511302
PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage.
211 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xix
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511303
PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality.
212 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511304
PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load.
213 Configuring GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511306
GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover.
214 Configuring eNC2 Between GSM and LTE
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511307
eNC2 Between GSM and LTE. Here, eNC2 is short for Network Control Mode 2.
215 Configuring eNACC Between GSM and LTE
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511308
eNACC Between GSM and LTE. Here, eNACC is short for External Network Assisted Cell
Change.
216 Configuring SRVCC
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511309
Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC).
217 Configuring Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511310
Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover.
218 Configuring Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511312
Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.
219 Configuring CSFB
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511313
CSFB.
220 Configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114302
GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability.
221 Configuring Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511401
Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA.
222 Configuring Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based
on Iur-g
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511402
Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g.
223 Configuring Extended BCCH
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xx
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-511403
Extended BCCH.
224 Configuring Multiple CCCHs
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511501
Multiple CCCHs.
225 Configuring Layered Paging
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511502
Layered Paging.
226 Configuring 2G/3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511201
2G/3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching.
227 Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511701
Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation.
228 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211801
Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM).
229 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211802
GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM). This feature enables the spectrum
resources to be dynamically shared between the GSM and UMTS networks based on their traffic
load, improving frequency utilization.
230 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211501
IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS).
231 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side
(GBTS)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211504
TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side(GBTS).
232 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211601
Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS).
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxi
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in
boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.
Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxii
Convention Description
{ x | y | ... }
*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles
are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Format Description
Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means
the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Action Description
Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving
the pointer.
Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and
quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxiii
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide.....................................................................1
2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide.....................................................................................7
3 Activating the GSM License......................................................................................................40
4 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC...........................................................................41
5 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)..........................................................................43
6 Configuring IMSI Detach..........................................................................................................45
7 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover..........................................................................................47
8 Configuring Directed Retry.......................................................................................................56
9 Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment........................................................58
10 Configuring Call Reestablishment........................................................................................60
11 Configuring TCH Re-assignment..........................................................................................64
12 Configuring Radio Link Management..................................................................................66
13 Configuring BTS Software Management.............................................................................68
14 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs.....................................70
15 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP.........................................................................75
16 Configuring Link aggregation................................................................................................78
17 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure......................................81
18 Configuring Call-Based Flow Control...................................................................................83
19 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report........................................................85
20 Configuring System Information Sending...........................................................................87
21 Configuring Daylight Saving Time.......................................................................................89
22 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment........................................................................91
23 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan..........................................................................................93
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide Contents
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxiv
24 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP).....................................................................95
25 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code......................................................................100
26 Configuring Discontinuous Reception (DRX)...................................................................102
27 Configuring BTS Power Management................................................................................104
28 Configuring Enhanced Power Control Algorithm............................................................106
29 Configuring DTMF Downlink Message Filter..................................................................111
30 Configuring High Speed Signaling ....................................................................................113
31 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call..........................................................................116
32 Configuring License Control for Urgency..........................................................................119
33 Configuring the satellite transmission on the Pb interface............................................121
34 Configuring Connection with TMA....................................................................................123
35 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt......................................................................................126
36 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity.........................................................................129
37 Configuring BTS Clock..........................................................................................................131
38 Configuring Voice Fault Detection......................................................................................133
39 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS).....................................137
40 Configuring PBT......................................................................................................................139
41 Configuring Transmit Diversity...........................................................................................142
42 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity...............................................................................144
43 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity.........................................................................146
44 Configuring Dynamic PBT....................................................................................................149
45 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage.............................................................................151
46 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing.................................................................................154
47 Configuring Extended Cell....................................................................................................157
48 Configuring Concentric Cell.................................................................................................159
49 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell...................................................................................................162
50 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network.....................................................................166
51 Configuring Flex MAIO.........................................................................................................170
52 Configuring ICC......................................................................................................................172
53 Configuring EICC....................................................................................................................174
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide Contents
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxv
54 Configuring VAMOS.............................................................................................................176
55 Configuring Mute SAIC MS Identification.......................................................................186
56 Configuring VAMOS Call Drop Solution..........................................................................189
57 Configuring Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping)...........................193
58 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping..............................................................196
59 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping........................................................................199
60 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing........................................................201
61 Configuring IBCA...................................................................................................................203
62 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network..........................................................................207
63 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization.............................................................................211
64 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet.....................................................................................213
65 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.......................................................215
66 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink........................................220
67 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink..............................................222
68 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown.............................................224
69 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level...........228
70 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass.........................................................................230
71 Configuring Active Backup Power Control.......................................................................232
72 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type............................................235
73 Configuring PSU Smart Control...........................................................................................238
74 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization..............................240
75 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off................................................................................243
76 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment..............................................................246
77 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment..........................................248
78 Configuring Flex Abis............................................................................................................250
79 Configuring BTS Local Switch.............................................................................................258
80 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization.................................................................262
81 Configuring Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution.................................................265
82 Configuring Flex Ater.............................................................................................................268
83 Configuring BSC Local Switch.............................................................................................270
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide Contents
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxvi
84 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission..................................................................273
85 Configuring Ring Topology..................................................................................................277
86 Configuring TRX Cooperation..............................................................................................280
87 Configuring MSC Pool...........................................................................................................283
88 Configuring the SGSN Pool..................................................................................................286
88.1 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over IP)..........................................................................................................287
88.2 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over FR).........................................................................................................288
89 Configuring Abis Bypass.......................................................................................................291
90 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling....................................................................296
91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup............................................................................298
91.1 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup (Ring Topology)..........................................................................299
91.2 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup (Dual-Logical BTS).....................................................................301
92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy..................................................................................306
93 Configuring TC Pool...............................................................................................................315
93.1 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over TDM).......................................................................................................316
93.2 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over IP).............................................................................................................320
94 Configuring OML Backup.....................................................................................................327
95 Configuring Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking........................................................330
96 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)......................................................333
97 Configuring Fast Move Handover.......................................................................................335
98 Configuring Chain Cell Handover.......................................................................................337
99 Configuring Multi-Site Cell..................................................................................................339
100 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface...............................................342
101 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface....................................................345
102 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface...............................................348
103 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface.................................................350
104 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points.................................................................352
105 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection.......................................................................355
106 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing.............................................................358
107 Configuring Active Power Control....................................................................................360
108 Configuring Ciphering.........................................................................................................362
109 Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization..........................................................364
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide Contents
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxvii
110 Configuring Enhanced Full Rate (EFR).............................................................................367
111 Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR)..................................................................................369
112 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR..............................................371
113 Configuring the Cell Broadcast..........................................................................................374
113.1 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)......................................................................375
113.2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast......................................................................................................377
114 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)..................................................................379
115 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)..............................................................382
116 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)..............................................................384
117 Configuring TFO...................................................................................................................386
118 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)....................................................389
119 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC).....................................391
120 Configuring EVAD...............................................................................................................393
121 Configuring Voice Quality Index (VQI)...........................................................................395
122 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report..................................................................398
123 Configuring BTS power lift for handover........................................................................400
124 Configuring Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation........................................................................402
125 Configuring Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing......................................................405
126 Configuring AMR.................................................................................................................407
127 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment.............................410
128 Configuring WB AMR..........................................................................................................413
129 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR)....................................................................................415
130 Configuring QoS ARP&THP..............................................................................................418
131 Configuring PS Active Package Management.................................................................421
132 Configuring PoC QoS...........................................................................................................423
133 Configuring NC2...................................................................................................................425
134 Configuring Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)...................................................427
135 Configuring GPRS................................................................................................................430
136 Configuring Network Operation Mode I.........................................................................433
137 Configuring CS-3/CS-4.........................................................................................................435
138 Configuring EGPRS..............................................................................................................437
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide Contents
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxviii
139 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access.....................................................................................440
140 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding...................................444
141 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching.......................................................................446
141.1 Configuring EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS Service.................................................448
141.2 Configuring EGPRS Preferred Channel.....................................................................................................449
141.3 Configuring Channel Multiplexing in the E Down G Up Scenario...........................................................450
142 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination.............................................................................452
143 Configuring PS Handover...................................................................................................454
144 Configuring Early TBF Establishment..............................................................................458
145 Configuring PS Power Control...........................................................................................460
146 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds...............................462
147 Configuring Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User........................465
148 Configuring EDA...................................................................................................................467
149 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes..........................................................................470
150 Configuring DTM.................................................................................................................472
151 Configuring Class11 DTM...................................................................................................474
152 Configuring HMC DTM......................................................................................................476
153 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data................................................................478
154 Configuring High Speed Circuit Switched Data............................................................480
155 Configuring Resource Reservation....................................................................................483
156 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP)..............485
157 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority..........................................................488
158 Configuring Flow Control Based on User Priority.........................................................490
159 Configuring PS Service in Priority....................................................................................492
160 Configuring Network Support SAIC................................................................................494
161 Configuring NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)....................................................................496
162 Configuring BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA).....................................................................498
163 Configuring Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA)...............................................................500
164 Configuring Lb Interface.....................................................................................................502
165 Configuring Abis over IP.....................................................................................................509
166 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1.........................................................................................512
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide Contents
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxix
167 Configuring Abis MUX........................................................................................................515
168 Configuring Abis IPHC........................................................................................................517
169 Configuring A over IP..........................................................................................................520
170 Configuring A IP over E1/T1...............................................................................................523
171 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission...................................................................526
172 Configuring TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface..........................................528
173 Configuring Gb over IP........................................................................................................532
174 Configuring IP Performance Monitor...............................................................................535
175 Configuring Ethernet OAM................................................................................................537
176 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning..............542
177 Configuring PICO Synchronization..................................................................................545
178 Configuring PICO Dual-band Auto-planning................................................................547
179 Configuring PICO USB Encryption...................................................................................550
180 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode....................................................................................552
181 Configuring PICO Automatic Optimization...................................................................554
182 Configuring PICO Transceiver Redundancy...................................................................556
183 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning............................................560
184 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization
..........................................................................................................................................................562
185 Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power Off................................................................565
186 Configuring Local User Management...............................................................................567
187 Configuring VGCS and VBS...............................................................................................569
188 Configuring GSM-T Relay..................................................................................................572
189 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover...................................................................................575
190 Configuring Handover Re-establishment........................................................................584
191 Configuring BSS Sharing....................................................................................................586
192 Configuring MOCN Shared Cell.......................................................................................590
193 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover..................................................................................594
194 Configuring Abis Independent Transmission................................................................597
195 Configuring MSRD...............................................................................................................601
196 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink..........................................................................603
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide Contents
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxx
197 Configuring the EGPRS2-A.................................................................................................605
198 Configuring Latency Reduction.........................................................................................607
199 Configuring Access Control Class.....................................................................................609
200 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.................................................................611
201 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover..................................................614
202 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover......................................................616
203 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State..............................................618
204 Configuring the Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS Call Release............................620
205 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g..........................................622
206 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based
on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA......................................................................................626
207 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g..............................629
208 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g..............................633
209 Configuring Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE..................................................636
210 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage....................639
211 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality.......................643
212 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load...................647
213 Configuring GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover......................................................650
214 Configuring eNC2 Between GSM and LTE.....................................................................653
215 Configuring eNACC Between GSM and LTE.................................................................655
216 Configuring SRVCC.............................................................................................................657
217 Configuring Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover..............................659
218 Configuring Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.............................................662
219 Configuring CSFB.................................................................................................................664
220 Configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability...........................................................666
221 Configuring Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA......................................669
222 Configuring Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based
on Iur-g...........................................................................................................................................672
223 Configuring Extended BCCH..............................................................................................674
224 Configuring Multiple CCCHs............................................................................................676
225 Configuring Layered Paging...............................................................................................678
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide Contents
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxxi
226 Configuring 2G/3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching...........................................680
227 Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation................................682
228 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM)..........................................687
229 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM)............................690
230 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS).................694
230.1 Configuring IP-Based GSM and UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station Side......................................695
230.2 Configuring IP-Based GSM and LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.........................................701
231 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side
(GBTS)............................................................................................................................................706
232 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS)...............................712
232.1 Configuring GSM and UMTS Common Reference Clock........................................................................713
232.2 Configuring GSM and LTE Common Reference Clock............................................................................720
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide Contents
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxxii
1 Changes in the GBSS Feature Activation
Guide
This chapter describes the changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide.
13 (2012-09-17)
This is the thirteenth commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 12 (2012-06-25), this issue includes the following new topics:
l 123 Configuring BTS power lift for handover
Compared with issue 12 (2012-06-25), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content Description
193 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover The example is changed.
117 Configuring TFO The background information is changed.
175 Configuring Ethernet OAM The activation procedure is changed.
201 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service
Based Handover
The prerequisite is changed.

Compared with issue 12 (2012-06-25), this issue does not exclude any topics.
12 (2012-06-25)
This is the twelfth commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 11 (2012-03-30), this issue includes the following new topics:
l 28 Configuring Enhanced Power Control Algorithm
Compared with issue 11 (2012-03-30), this issue incorporates the following changes:
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 1 Changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
Content Description
80 Configuring Abis Transmission
Optimization
The example is changed.
43 Configuring Dynamic Transmit
Diversity
The feature deactivation procedure is added.
The verification procedure is changed.
134 Configuring Network Assisted Cell
Change (NACC)
The descriptions about the operations that
affect services are added.
87 Configuring MSC Pool The activation procedure is changed.
109 Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow
Optimization
The activation procedure is changed.
The description that this feature and VAMOS
are mutually exclusive is added.
169 Configuring A over IP The dependencies on other features is
changed.
91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup The descriptions about the dual-logical BTS
solution are added.
62 Configuring Soft-Synchronized
Network
The descriptions about IP over E1 are
changed.
61 Configuring IBCA The dependencies on hardware is changed.
91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup The activation procedure is changed.
48 Configuring Concentric Cell The activation procedure is changed.
89 Configuring Abis Bypass The background information is changed.
168 Configuring Abis IPHC The constraints for the sequence of deploying
IPHC on the routers and BTSs are added.
133 Configuring NC2 The dependencies on other features is
changed.
48 Configuring Concentric Cell The verification procedure is changed.
196 Configuring Dual Carriers in
Downlink
The verification procedure is changed.
91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup The dependencies on other features is
changed.
175 Configuring Ethernet OAM The dependencies on hardware is changed.
46 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing The dependencies on hardware is changed.
51 Configuring Flex MAIO The dependencies on other features is
changed.
99 Configuring Multi-Site Cell The dependencies on hardware is changed.

GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 1 Changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
Compared with issue 11 (2012-03-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.
11 (2012-03-30)
This is the eleventh commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 10 (2012-02-27), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue 10 (2012-02-27), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content Description
159 Configuring PS Service in Priority The verification procedure is changed.

Compared with issue 08 (2012-01-05), this issue does not exclude any topics.
10 (2012-02-27)
This is the tenth commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 08 (2012-01-05), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue 08 (2012-01-05), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content Description
54 Configuring VAMOS The dependencies on other features is
changed.

Compared with issue 08 (2012-01-05), this issue does not exclude any topics.
08 (2012-01-05)
This is the eighth commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 07 (2011-11-30), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue 07 (2011-11-30), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content Description
89 Configuring Abis Bypass The description that feature cannot be used
together with the feature GBFD-118611 Abis
IP over E1/T1 is deleted.

Compared with issue 07 (2011-11-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.
07 (2011-11-30)
This is the seventh commercial release of V900R013C00.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 1 Changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
Compared with issue 06 (2011-10-10), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue 06 (2011-10-10), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content Description
227 Configuring Radio Measurement Data
Interface for Navigation
The activation procedure is changed.

Compared with issue 06 (2011-10-10), this issue does not exclude any topics.
06 (2011-10-10)
This is the sixth commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 05 (2011-08-31), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue 05 (2011-08-31), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content Description
92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy The context and the activation procedure are
optimized.

Compared with issue 05 (2011-08-31), this issue does not exclude any topics.
05 (2011-08-31)
This is the fifth commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 04 (2011-07-11), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue 04 (2011-07-11), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content Description
153 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit
Switched Data
The dependencies on other features is
changed.
87 Configuring MSC Pool The context is updated.
92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy The context and the activation procedure are
optimized.
227 Configuring Radio Measurement Data
Interface for Navigation
The activation procedure is updated. A note
is added when the VNP is the huawei device.

Compared with issue 04 (2011-07-11), this issue does not exclude any topics.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 1 Changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
04 (2011-07-11)
This is the fourth commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 03 (2011-05-30), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue 03 (2011-05-30), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content Description
104 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling
Points
The activation procedure is updated.

Compared with issue 03 (2011-05-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.
03 (2011-05-30)
This is the third commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-25), this issue includes the following new topics:
l 144 Configuring Early TBF Establishment
Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-25), this issue does not incorporate any changes.
Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-25), this issue does not exclude any topics.
02 (2011-04-25)
This is the second commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), this issue includes the following new topics:
l 168 Configuring Abis IPHC
Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), this issue does not incorporate any changes.
Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), this issue excludes the following topics.
l Configuring IM Service Channel Compression
01 (2011-03-30)
This is the first commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue Draft B (2011-03-21), editorial changes are applied.
Draft B (2011-03-21)
This is the Draft B release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue includes the following new topics:
l Configuring IM Service Channel Compression
Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue does not incorporate any changes.
Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue excludes the following topics.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 1 Changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
l Configuring PS handover between GSM and WCDMA
l Configuring NC2 between GSM and WCDMA
l Configuring PS Handover between GSM and TD-SCDMA
l Configuring NC2 between GSM and TD-SCDMA
l Configuring GSM and TD-SCDMA Service Based Handover
l Configuring GSM and TD-SCDMA Load Based Handover
Draft A (2011-01-31)
This is the Draft A release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 06 (2010-11-30) of V900R012C01, this issue includes the following new
topics:
l 18 Configuring Call-Based Flow Control
l 46 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing
l 54 Configuring VAMOS
l 55 Configuring Mute SAIC MS Identification
l 56 Configuring VAMOS Call Drop Solution
l 95 Configuring Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking
l 120 Configuring EVAD
l 125 Configuring Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing
l 147 Configuring Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User
l 158 Configuring Flow Control Based on User Priority
l 182 Configuring PICO Transceiver Redundancy
l 194 Configuring Abis Independent Transmission
l Configuring PS handover between GSM and WCDMA
l Configuring NC2 between GSM and WCDMA
l 217 Configuring Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover
l 218 Configuring Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release
l 219 Configuring CSFB
l 223 Configuring Extended BCCH
l Configuring PS Handover between GSM and TD-SCDMA
l Configuring NC2 between GSM and TD-SCDMA
l Configuring GSM and TD-SCDMA Service Based Handover
l Configuring GSM and TD-SCDMA Load Based Handover
l 225 Configuring Layered Paging
l 227 Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation
l 229 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM)
Compared with issue 06 (2010-11-30) of V900R012C01, this issue does not incorporate any
changes.
Compared with issue 06 (2010-11-30) of V900R012C01, this issue does not exclude any topics.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 1 Changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
GBSSFeatures are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not license-
controlled and therefore do not require license activation before use. Some optional features are
license-controlled and therefore require license activation before use. If the Configuration
Method column for a basic feature in the RAN basic feature list is None, enabling this feature
does not involve any configurations. If the Configuration Method column for an optional feature
in the RAN optional feature list is None, this feature is enabled once it is activated.
Table 2-1 lists the GBSS basic features. Table 2-2 lists the GBSS optional features.
Table 2-1 GBSS Basic Feature List
Feature ID Feature Name Configuration Method
GBFD-110000 GBSS9.0 System
Improvement
None
GBFD-110001 GBSS12.0 System
Improvement
None
GBFD-110030 3GPP Protocol Compliance None
GBFD-110002 GBSS13.0 System
Improvement
None
GBFD-110101 Frequency Band None
GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One
BSC
4 Configuring Multi-band
Sharing One BSC
GBFD-114901 Support for E-GSM and R-
GSM Frequency Band
None
GBFD-110201 Telephone Service (TS11) None
GBFD-110202 Emergency Call Service
(TS12)
5 Configuring Emergency
Call Service (TS12)
GBFD-110203 Point To Point Short
Message Service (TS21,
TS22)
None
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
Feature ID Feature Name Configuration Method
GBFD-110204 G3 Fax (TS61, TS62) None
GBFD-110205 Bearer Service None
GBFD-110301 Location Updating None
GBFD-110302 IMSI Detach 6 Configuring IMSI Detach
GBFD-110303 CS Paging None
GBFD-110304 Authentication None
GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover 7 Configuring HUAWEI I
Handover
GBFD-110607 Direct Retry 8 Configuring Directed
Retry
GBFD-110608 SDCCH Handover None
GBFD-110401 Basic Cell Selection None
GBFD-110402 Basic Cell Re-selection None
GBFD-110501 Call Control None
GBFD-110502 Assignment and Immediate
Assignment
9 Configuring Assignment
and Immediate Assignment
GBFD-110503 Call Reestablishment 10 Configuring Call
Reestablishment
GBFD-112501 TCH Re-assignment 11 Configuring TCH Re-
assignment
GBFD-111001 TRX Management None
GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management 12 Configuring Radio Link
Management
GBFD-111003 Radio Common Channel
Management
None
GBFD-111004 Radio Dedicated Channel
Management
None
GBFD-111005 Enhanced Channel
Assignment Algorithm
None
MRFD-210301 Configuration Management None
MRFD-210302 Performance Management None
MRFD-210303 Inventory Management None
MRFD-210304 Faulty Management None
MRFD-210305 Security Management None
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
Feature ID Feature Name Configuration Method
MRFD-210309 DBS Topology Maintenance None
MRFD-210310 BTS/NodeB Software USB
Download
None
GBFD-111202 O&M of BTS None
GBFD-111203 O&M of BSC None
GBFD-111207 BTS Test Function None
GBFD-111210 Integrated Network
Management Interface
None
GBFD-116501 Man Machine Language
(MML)
None
GBFD-116402 Maintenance Mode Alarm None
GBFD-113523 NAT Beside OM None
MRFD-210401 BSC/RNC Software
Management
None
MRFD-210402 BTS/NodeB Software
Management
13 Configuring BTS
Software Management
GBFD-111213 Remote Upgrade of the
BSC&BTS Software
None
MRFD-210403 License Management None
GBFD-114601 Multi-Cell Function None
GBFD-111501 BTS Combined Cabinet 14 Configuring Combined
Cabinets and Cabinet
Groups of BTSs
GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group 14 Configuring Combined
Cabinets and Cabinet
Groups of BTSs
GBFD-118801 BSC Cabinet/Subrack
Sharing
None
MRFD-210204 Star Topology None
MRFD-210205 Chain Topology None
MRFD-210206 Tree Topology None
GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over
IP
15 Configuring Connection
Inter BSC over IP
GBFD-111701 Board Switchover None
GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control None
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
Feature ID Feature Name Configuration Method
GBFD-112301 Remote EAC Maintenance None
GBFD-111214 Operation & Maintenance
System One-Key Recovery
None
GBFD-111211 Reporting the Temperature
List of the BTS Equipment
Room
None
MRFD-210101 System Redundancy None
MRFD-210102 Operate System Security
Management
None
MRFD-210103 Link aggregation 16 Configuring Link
aggregation
MRFD-210104 BSC/RNC Resource Sharing None
GBFD-117804 Intelligent Shutdown of TRX
Due to PSU Failure
17 Configuring Intelligent
Shutdown of TRX Due to
PSU Failure
GBFD-511003 Call-Based Flow Control 18 Configuring Call-Based
Flow Control
GBFD-110901 Adjustment of Adaptive
Timing Advance
None
GBFD-110801 Processing of Measurement
Report
None
GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of
Measurement Report
19 Configuring Pre-
Processing of Measurement
Report
GBFD-111101 System Information Sending 20 Configuring System
Information Sending
GBFD-111102 Forced System Information
Sending by OMC
None
GBFD-111901 Supporting Three-Digit
MNC
None
GBFD-116101 Support of Daylight Saving
Time
21 Configuring Daylight
Saving Time
GBFD-113001 SDCCH Dynamic
Adjustment
22 Configuring SDCCH
Dynamic Adjustment
GBFD-112401 Cell Frequency Scan 23 Configuring Cell
Frequency Scan
GBFD-111806 STP (Signaling Transport
Point)
24 Configuring Signaling
Transport Point (STP)
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
Feature ID Feature Name Configuration Method
GBFD-111802 14-Digit Signaling Point
Code
25 Configuring 14-Digit
Signaling Point Code
MRFD-210801 Interface Message Tracing None
MRFD-210802 User Signaling Tracing None
GBFD-112203 Cell Tracing None
GBFD-111301 LAPD Multiplexing at Abis
Interface
78 Configuring Flex Abis
GBFD-114802 Discontinuous Reception
(DRX)
26 Configuring
Discontinuous Reception
(DRX)
GBFD-111601 BTS Power Management 27 Configuring BTS Power
Management
GBFD-110703 Enhanced Power Control
Algorithm
28 Configuring Enhanced
Power Control Algorithm
GBFD-113525 DTMF Downlink Message
Filter
29 Configuring DTMF
Downlink Message Filter
GBFD-115201 High Speed Signaling 30 Configuring High Speed
Signaling
GBFD-110521 Guaranteed Emergency Call 31 Configuring
Guaranteed Emergency
Call
GBFD-511001 License Control for Urgency 32 Configuring License
Control for Urgency
GBFD-111801 Ater Interface 4:1
Multiplexing
None
GBFD-119001 Gb Interface Function None
GBFD-111803 A Interface Circuit
Management
None
GBFD-111804 A Interface Protocol Process None
GBFD-111805 A Interface Occupation Rate
Monitoring
None
GBFD-113904 Satellite Transmission over
Pb Interface
33 Configuring the satellite
transmission on the Pb
interface
GBFD-119101 Packet Channel Combination
Type
None
GBFD-119102 Packet System Information None
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
Feature ID Feature Name Configuration Method
GBFD-119103 MS Types None
GBFD-119104 MAC Mode None
GBFD-119105 RLC Mode None
GBFD-119106 Coding Scheme None
GBFD-119107 Networking Control Mode None
GBFD-119108 Network Operation Mode
Support
None
GBFD-119109 QoS(Best Effort) None
GBFD-119110 Access None
GBFD-119111 Assignment None
GBFD-119112 PS Paging None
GBFD-119113 Timing Advance Update None
GBFD-119115 Power Control None
GBFD-119116 Packet Uplink Flow Control None
GBFD-119117 Flow Control on Gb Interface None
MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA
(Tower Mounted Amplifier)
34 Configuring Connection
with TMA
MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt 35 Configuring Remote
Electrical Tilt
MRFD-210604 2-Antenna Receive Diversity 36 Configuring 2-Antenna
Receive Diversity
MRFD-210501 BTS/NodeB Clock 37 Configuring BTS Clock
MRFD-210502 BSC/RNC Clock None
GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis 38 Configuring Voice Fault
Detection
GBFD-119306 Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis None
GBFD-119307 Spectrum Scan None
GBFD-119308 Intermodulation Testing None
MRFD-210701 Documentation None
MRFD-210001 Multi-mode BS Common
CPRI Interface(GBTS)
39 Configuring Multi-
mode BS Common CPRI
Interface (GBTS)
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
Feature ID Feature Name Configuration Method
MRFD-210002 Multi-mode BS RRU/RFU
star-connection with separate
CPRI interface(GBTS)
None

Table 2-2 GBSS Optional Feature List
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-115901 PBT(Power
Boost
Technology)
Multi-
transceivers
supporting PBT
transmit
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 40 Configuring
PBT
GBFD-115902 Transmit
Diversity
Multi-
transceivers
supporting
diversity
transmit
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 41 Configuring
Transmit
Diversity
GBFD-115903 4-Way Receiver
Diversity
Multi-
transceivers
supporting 4-
way receive
diversity
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 42 Configuring
4-Way
Receiver
Diversity
GBFD-118101 Dynamic
Transmit
Diversity
Dynamic PBT
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 43 Configuring
Dynamic
Transmit
Diversity
GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT
(Power Boost
Technology)
Dynamic PBT
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 44 Configuring
Dynamic PBT
GBFD-118104 Enhanced
EDGE
Coverage
Enhanced
EDGE
Coverage(per
TRX)
BSC6900 45 Configuring
Enhanced
EDGE
Coverage
GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power
Sharing
Dynamic Power
Sharing (per
TRX)
BSC6900 46 Configuring
Dynamic
Power Sharing
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-114001 Extended Cell Extended cell
Resource (per
Cell)
BSC6900 47 Configuring
Extended Cell
GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell Concentric Cell
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 48 Configuring
Concentric
Cell
GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell Co-BCCH Cell
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 49 Configuring
Co-BCCH Cell
GBFD-114402 Enhanced Dual-
Band Network
Enhanced Dual-
Band Network
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 50 Configuring
Enhanced
Dual-Band
Network
GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO Flex MAIO
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 51 Configuring
Flex MAIO
GBFD-115801 ICC ICC(Inference
Counteract
Combine)
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 52 Configuring
ICC
GBFD-115821 EICC the EICC
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 53 Configuring
EICC
GBFD-115830 VAMOS VAMOS (per
TRX)
BSC6900 54 Configuring
VAMOS
GBFD-115831 Mute SAIC MS
Identification
Mute SAIC MS
Identification
(per TRX)
BSC6900 55 Configuring
Mute SAIC MS
Identification
GBFD-115832 VAMOS Call
Drop Solution
VAMOS Call
Drop Solution
(per TRX)
BSC6900 56 Configuring
VAMOS Call
Drop Solution
GBFD-113701 Frequency
Hopping (RF
hopping,
baseband
hopping)
Frequency
Hopping
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 57 Configuring
Frequency
Hopping (RF
hopping,
baseband
hopping)
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-113702 BCCH Carrier
Frequency
Hopping
BCCH Carrier
Frequency
Hopping
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 58 Configuring
BCCH Carrier
Frequency
Hopping
GBFD-113703 Antenna
Frequency
Hopping
Antenna
Frequency
Hopping
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 59 Configuring
Antenna
Frequency
Hopping
GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense
Frequency
Multiplexing
BCCH Dense
Frequency
Multiplexing
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 60 Configuring
BCCH Dense
Frequency
Multiplexing
GBFD-117002 IBCA
(Interference
Based Channel
Allocation)
IBCA Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 61 Configuring
IBCA
GBFD-118201 Soft-
Synchronized
Network
Soft
Synchronizatio
n Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 62 Configuring
Soft-
Synchronized
Network
GBFD-510401 BTS GPS
Synchronizatio
n
BTS GPS
Synchronizatio
n Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 63 Configuring
BTS GPS
Synchronizatio
n
GBFD-118606 Clock over IP Clock over IP
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-118620 Clock over IP
support 1588v2
Clock over IP
support 1588V2
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-118202 Synchronous
Ethernet
Synchronous
Ethernet(per
TRX)
BSC6900 64 Configuring
Synchronous
Ethernet
GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III
Power Control
Algorithm
Huawei III
Power Control
Algorithm(per
TRX)
BSC6900 65 Configuring
HUAWEI III
Power Control
Algorithm
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-114801 Discontinuous
Transmission
(DTX)-
Downlink
Discontinuous
Transmission
(DTX)
Downlink
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 66 Configuring
Discontinuous
Transmission
(DTX)-
Downlink
GBFD-114803 Discontinuous
Transmission
(DTX)-Uplink
Discontinuous
Transmission
(DTX) Uplink
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 67 Configuring
Discontinuous
Transmission
(DTX)-Uplink
GBFD-111602 TRX Power
Amplifier
Intelligent
Shutdown
Dynamic
Shutdown Trx
PA Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 68 Configuring
TRX Power
Amplifier
Intelligent
Shutdown
GBFD-111603 TRX Power
Amplifier
Intelligent
Shutdown on
Timeslot Level
Time slot
Intelligent
Power
Optimization
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 69 Configuring
TRX Power
Amplifier
Intelligent
Shutdown on
Timeslot Level
GBFD-111604 Intelligent
Combiner
Bypass
Intelligent
Combiner
Bypass
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 70 Configuring
Intelligent
Combiner
Bypass
GBFD-111605 Active Backup
Power Control
Active Backup
Power Control
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 71 Configuring
Active Backup
Power Control
GBFD-111606 Power
Optimization
Based on
Channel Type
Power
Optimization
Based on
Channel Type
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 72 Configuring
Power
Optimization
Based on
Channel Type
GBFD-111608 PSU Smart
Control
PSU Smart
Control
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 73 Configuring
PSU Smart
Control
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-111609 Enhanced
BCCH Power
Consumption
Optimization
Enhanced
BCCH Power
Consumption
Optimization
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 74 Configuring
Enhanced
BCCH Power
Consumption
Optimization
GBFD-111610 Dynamic Cell
Power Off
Dynamic Cell
Power Off
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 75 Configuring
Dynamic Cell
Power Off
GBFD-111611 TRX Working
Voltage
Adjustment
TRX Working
Voltage
Adjustment
Function(per
TRX)
BSC6900 76 Configuring
TRX Working
Voltage
Adjustment
GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier
Intelligent
Voltage
Regulation
Multi-Carrier
Intelligent
Voltage
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 77 Configuring
Multi-Carrier
Intelligent
Voltage
Adjustment
GBFD-111613 Weather
Adaptive Power
Management
Weather
Adaptive Power
Management
(per TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and
OML on A-bis
Interface
16K LAPD
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-117301 Flex Abis Flex Abis
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 78 Configuring
Flex Abis
GBFD-117702 BTS Local
Switch
BTS local
switching
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 79 Configuring
BTS Local
Switch
GBFD-118401 Abis
Transmission
Optimization
Transmission
optimization on
the Abis
interface
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 80 Configuring
Abis
Transmission
Optimization
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-112013 Abis
Congestion
Trigger HR
Distribution
Abis
Congestion
Trigger HR
Distribution
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 81 Configuring
Abis
Congestion
Trigger HR
Distribution
GBFD-116901 Flex Ater Flex Ater
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 82 Configuring
Flex Ater
GBFD-117701 BSC Local
Switch
BSC Local
Switching
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 83 Configuring
BSC Local
Switch
GBFD-116902 Ater
Compression
Transmission
Ater
Compression
Transmission
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 84 Configuring
Ater
Compression
Transmission
GBFD-115702 TrFO TrFO Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-117801 Ring Topology Ring topology
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 85 Configuring
Ring Topology
GBFD-113801 TRX
Cooperation
TRX
Cooperation
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 86 Configuring
TRX
Cooperation
GBFD-117401 MSC Pool MSC POOL
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 87 Configuring
MSC Pool
GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool Gb Flex
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 88 Configuring
the SGSN Pool
GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass Abis Bypass
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 89 Configuring
Abis Bypass
GBFD-113721 Robust Air
Interface
Signalling
Robust Air
Interface
Signalling
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 90 Configuring
Robust Air
Interface
Signalling
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-117803 Abis
Transmission
Backup
Abis
Transmission
Backup
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 91 Configuring
Abis
Transmission
Backup
GBFD-113725 BSC Node
Redundancy
BSC Node
Redundancy
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 92 Configuring
BSC Node
Redundancy
GBFD-113726 TC Pool TC Pool
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 93 Configuring
TC Pool
GBFD-113728 OML Backup OML Backup
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 94 Configuring
OML Backup
GBFD-113729 Adaptive
Transmission
Link Blocking
Adaptive
Transmission
Link Blocking
(per TRX)
BSC6900 95 Configuring
Adaptive
Transmission
Link Blocking
GBFD-510101 Automatic
Frequency
Correction
(AFC)
AFC Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 96 Configuring
Automatic
Frequency
Correction
(AFC)
GBFD-510102 Fast Move
Handover
High Speed
PBGT Switch
BSC6900 97 Configuring
Fast Move
Handover
GBFD-510103 Chain Cell
Handover
Chain Cell
Handover
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 98 Configuring
Chain Cell
Handover
GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell Multi-site Cell
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 99 Configuring
Multi-Site Cell
GBFD-113901 Satellite
Transmission
over Abis
Interface
Site Supporting
Satellite
Transmission
Resource (per
Site)
BSC6900 100
Configuring
Satellite
Transmission
over Abis
Interface
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-113902 Satellite
Transmission
over A Interface
Satellite
Transmission
over A Interface
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 101
Configuring
Satellite
Transmission
over A
Interface
GBFD-113903 Satellite
Transmission
over Ater
Interface
Satellite
Transmission
over Ater
Interface
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 102
Configuring
Satellite
Transmission
over Ater
Interface
GBFD-113905 Satellite
Transmission
over Gb
Interface
Satellite
Transmission
over Gb
Interface
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 103
Configuring
Satellite
Transmission
over Gb
Interface
GBFD-115301 Local Multiple
Signaling Points
Local Multiple
Signaling Points
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 104
Configuring
Local Multiple
Signaling
Points
GBFD-114701 Semi-
Permanent
Connection
Semipermanent
Connection
Resource (per
LINK)
BSC6900 105
Configuring
Semi-
Permanent
Connection
GBFD-116401 End-to-End MS
Signaling
Tracing
End-to-End MS
Signaling
Tracing
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 106
Configuring
End-to-End
MS Signaling
Tracing
GBFD-117602 Active Power
Control
Active Power
Control
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 107
Configuring
Active Power
Control
GBFD-113501 A5/1 and A5/2
Ciphering
Algorithm
Encryption
(A5/1,A5/2)
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 108
Configuring
Ciphering
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-113503 A5/3 Ciphering
Algorithm
Encryption
(A5/3) Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 108
Configuring
Ciphering
GBFD-113521 A5/1
Encryption
Flow
Optimization
Enhanced
Encryption
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 109
Configuring
A5/1
Encryption
Flow
Optimization
GBFD-113522 Encrypted
Network
Management
Encrypted
Network
Management
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-113301 Enhanced Full
Rate
Enhanced Full
Rate Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 110
Configuring
Enhanced Full
Rate (EFR)
GBFD-113401 Half Rate
Speech
Half Rate
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 111
Configuring
Half Rate
Speech (HR)
GBFD-113402 Dynamic
Adjustment
Between FR and
HR
Dynamic
Adjustment
Between FR and
HR Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 112
Configuring
Dynamic
Adjustment
Between FR
and HR
GBFD-113601 Short Message
Service Cell
Broadcast
(TS23)
Short Message
Service Cell
Broadcast
(TS23)
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 113.1
Configuring
Short Message
Service Cell
Broadcast
(TS23)
GBFD-113602 Simplified Cell
Broadcast
Simplified Cell
Broadcast
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 113.2
Configuring
Simplified Cell
Broadcast
GBFD-115601 Automatic
Level Control
(ALC)
Automatic
Level Control
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 114
Configuring
Automatic
Level Control
(ALC)
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo
Cancellation
(AEC)
Acoustic Echo
Cancellation
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 115
Configuring
Acoustic Echo
Cancellation
(AEC)
GBFD-115603 Automatic
Noise Restraint
(ANR)
Automatic
Noise Restraint
(ANR) Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 116
Configuring
Automatic
Noise Restraint
(ANR)
GBFD-115701 TFO TFO Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 117
Configuring
TFO
GBFD-115703 Automatic
Noise
Compensation
(ANC)
Automatic
Noise
Compensation
(ANC) Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 118
Configuring
Automatic
Noise
Compensation
(ANC)
GBFD-115704 Enhancement
Packet Loss
Concealment
(EPLC)
Enhancement
Packet Loss
Concealment
(EPLC)
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 119
Configuring
Enhancement
Packet Loss
Concealment
(EPLC)
GBFD-115711 EVAD EVAD (per
TRX)
BSC6900 120
Configuring
EVAD
GBFD-116801 Voice Quality
Index (VQI)
Voice Quality
Index (VQI)
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 121
Configuring
Voice Quality
Index (VQI)
GBFD-117501 Enhanced
Measurement
Report(EMR)
Enhanced
Measurement
Report(EMR)
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 122
Configuring
Enhanced
Measurement
Report
GBFD-117101 BTS power lift
for handover
BTS power lift
for handover
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 123
Configuring
BTS power lift
for handover
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-115522 Dynamic HR/
FR Adaptation
Dynamic HR/
FR Adaptation
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 124
Configuring
Dynamic HR/
FR Adaptation
GBFD-115708 Um Interface
Speech Frame
Repairing
Um Interface
Speech Frame
Repairing (per
TRX)
BSC6900 125
Configuring
Um Interface
Speech Frame
Repairing
GBFD-115501 AMR FR AMR Resource
(per TRX)
BSC6900 126
Configuring
AMR
GBFD-115502 AMR HR AMR HR
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 126
Configuring
AMR
GBFD-115503 AMR Power
Control
AMR Power
Control
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 126
Configuring
AMR
GBFD-115504 AMR FR/HR
Dynamic
Adjustment
AMR FR/HR
Dynamic
Adjustment
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 189
Configuring
HUAWEI II
Handover
GBFD-115505 AMR Radio
Link Timer
AMR Wireless
Link Timer
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 126
Configuring
AMR
GBFD-115506 AMR Coding
Rate Threshold
Adaptive
Adjustment
AMR Coding
Rate Threshold
Adaptive
Adjustment
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 127
Configuring
AMR Coding
Rate
Threshold
Adaptive
Adjustment
GBFD-115507 WB AMR WB AMR
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 128
Configuring
WB AMR
GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS
(GBR)
GBR Qos
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 129
Configuring
Streaming QoS
(GBR)
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-119902 QoS
ARP&THP
QoS Function
(per 64Kbps)
BSC6900 130
Configuring
QoS
ARP&THP
GBFD-119904 PS Active
Package
Management
PS Active
Queue
Management
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 131
Configuring
PS Active
Package
Management
GBFD-119905 PoC QoS PoC QoS
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 132
Configuring
PoC QoS
GBFD-119906 Conversational
QoS
Conversational
Qos Function
(per 64Kbps)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-116201 Network-
Controlled Cell
Reselection
(NC2)
NC2 Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 133
Configuring
NC2
GBFD-116301 Network
Assisted Cell
Change
(NACC)
NACC Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 134
Configuring
Network
Assisted Cell
Change
(NACC)
GBFD-119801 Packet SI Status
(PSI)
Packet SI Status
(PSI) Function
(per 64Kbps)
BSC6900 134
Configuring
Network
Assisted Cell
Change
(NACC)
GBFD-114101 GPRS GPRS Software
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 135
Configuring
GPRS
GBFD-510001 Network
Operation Mode
I
Network
operation mode
I Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 136
Configuring
Network
Operation
Mode I
GBFD-118901 CS-3/CS-4 CS3/CS4
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 137
Configuring
CS-3/CS-4
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-114201 EGPRS EDGE
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 138
Configuring
EGPRS
GBFD-113101 PDCH Dynamic
Adjustment
Dynamic
Allocation of
PDCH Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-510002 Gb Over FR GB Over FR
Resource (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-119201 11-Bit EGPRS
Access
11-Bit EGPRS
Access
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 139
Configuring
11-Bit EGPRS
Access
GBFD-119202 Packet
Assignment
Taken Over by
the BTS
Packet
Assignment
Taken Over by
the BTS
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 139
Configuring
11-Bit EGPRS
Access
GBFD-119203 Extended
Uplink TBF
Extended
Uplink TBF
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 139
Configuring
11-Bit EGPRS
Access
GBFD-119204 Dynamically
Adjusting the
Uplink MCS
Coding
Dynamically
Adjusting the
Uplink MCS
Coding
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 140
Configuring
Dynamically
Adjusting the
Uplink MCS
Coding
GBFD-119205 Dynamically
Adjusting the
RRBP
Frequency
Dynamically
Adjusting the
RRBP
Frequency
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-119302 Packet Channel
Dispatching
Packet Channel
Dispatching
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 141
Configuring
Packet
Channel
Dispatching
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-119303 Load Sharing Load Sharing
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-119501 Adaptive
Adjustment of
Uplink and
Downlink
Channels
Adaptive
Adjustment of
Uplink and
Downlink
Channels
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-119305 BSS Paging
Coordination
BSS Paging
Coordination
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 142
Configuring
BSS Paging
Coordination
GBFD-119502 PS Handover PS Handover
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 143
Configuring
PS Handover
GBFD-119503 Early TBF
Establishment
Early TBF
Establishment
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 144
Configuring
Early TBF
Establishment
GBFD-119504 PS Power
Control
PS Power
Control (Per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 145
Configuring
PS Power
Control
GBFD-119505 PDCH Dynamic
Adjustment
with Two
Thresholds
Two Thresholds
PDCH Dynamic
Adjustment (Per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 146
Configuring
PDCH
Dynamic
Adjustment
with Two
Thresholds
GBFD-119506 GPRS/EGPRS
Time slot
multiplexing
priority
GPRS/EGPRS
Time slot
multiplexing
priority (per
TRX)
BSC6900 147
Configuring
Timeslot
Multiplexing
Priority for
GPRS/EGPRS
User
GBFD-119401 Extended
Dynamic
Allocation
(EDA)
EDA Function
(per 64Kbps)
BSC6900 148
Configuring
EDA
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-119402 MS High
Multislot
Classes
Terminal
multislot classes
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 149
Configuring
MS High
Multislot
Classes
GBFD-114151 DTM DTM Function
(per 64Kbps)
BSC6900 150
Configuring
DTM
GBFD-119403 Class11 DTM DTM High
Multi-slot class
11 Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 151
Configuring
Class11 DTM
GBFD-119404 HMC DTM HMC DTM
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 152
Configuring
HMC DTM
GBFD-119405 14.4kbit/s
Circuit
Switched Data
14.4Kbps
Circuit
Switched Data
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 153
Configuring
14.4 kbit/s
Circuit
Switched Data
GBFD-119406 High Speed
Circuit
Switched Data
High Speed
Circuit
Switched Data
(per TRX)
BSC6900 154
Configuring
High Speed
Circuit
Switched Data
GBFD-116001 Resource
Reservation
Channel
Reserved
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 155
Configuring
Resource
Reservation
GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi
Level
Precedence and
Preemption
(EMLPP)
eMLPP
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 156
Configuring
Enhanced
Multi Level
Precedence
and
Preemption
(eMLPP)
GBFD-115002 Flow Control
Based on Cell
Priority
Flow Control
Based on Cell
Priority
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 157
Configuring
Flow Control
Based on Cell
Priority
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-115003 Flow control
based on User
priority
Flow control
based on User
priority (per
TRX)
BSC6900 158
Configuring
Flow Control
Based on User
Priority
GBFD-119907 PS Service in
Priority
PS Service in
Priority (Per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 159
Configuring
PS Service in
Priority
GBFD-118103 Network
Support SAIC
SAIC Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 160
Configuring
Network
Support SAIC
GBFD-115401 NSS-Based
LCS (Cell ID +
TA)
NSS-based LCS
(Cell ID + TA)
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 161
Configuring
NSS-based
LCS (cell ID +
TA)
GBFD-115402 BSS-Based
LCS (Cell ID +
TA)
LCS(CELL ID
+TA) Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 162
Configuring
BSS-based
LCS (cell ID +
TA)
GBFD-115403 Simple Mode
LCS(Cell ID +
TA)
Simple Mode
LCS (Cell ID +
TA) Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 163
Configuring
Simple Mode
LCS (Cell ID +
TA)
GBFD-115404 Lb Interface Lb Interface BSC6900 164
Configuring
Lb Interface
GBFD-118601 Abis over IP Abis Over IP
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 165
Configuring
Abis over IP
GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/
T1
Abis IP Over
E1/T1 Resource
(per TRX)
BSC6900 166
Configuring
Abis IP over
E1/T1
GBFD-118604 Abis MUX Abis MUX
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 167
Configuring
Abis MUX
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-118612 Abis IPHC Abis IPHC (per
TRX)
BSC6900 168
Configuring
Abis IPHC
GBFD-118602 A over IP A Over IP
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 169
Configuring A
over IP
GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1 A IP over E1
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 170
Configuring A
IP over E1/T1
GBFD-118610 UDP MUX for
A Transmission
UDP MUX for
A Transmission
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 171
Configuring
UDP MUX for
A
Transmission
GBFD-118623 TDM/IP Dual
Transmission
over A Interface
TDM/IP Dual
Transmission
over A Interface
(per TRX)
BSC6900 172
Configuring
TDM/IP Dual
Transmission
over A
Interface
GBFD-118603 Gb over IP GB Over IP
Resource (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 173
Configuring
Gb over IP
GBFD-118605 IP QOS IP QoS Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-118607 IP Performance
Monitor
IP Performance
Monitor
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 174
Configuring IP
Performance
Monitor
GBFD-118630 Ethernet OAM Ethernet OAM
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 175
Configuring
Ethernet OAM
GBFD-510601 PICO
Automatic
Configuration
and Planning
PICO Solution
Packet Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 176
Configuring
PICO/
Compact BTS
Automatic
Configuration
and Planning
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-510602 PICO
Synchronizatio
n
PICO Solution
Packet Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 177
Configuring
PICO
Synchronizatio
n
GBFD-510603 PICO Dual-
band Auto-
planning
PICO Dual-
band Auto-
planning(per
TRX)
BSC6900 178
Configuring
PICO Dual-
band Auto-
planning
GBFD-510604 PICO USB
Encryption
PICO USB
Encryption(per
TRX)
BSC6900 179
Configuring
PICO USB
Encryption
GBFD-510605 PICO Access
Control List
(ACL)
PICO Access
Control List
(ACL)(per
TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-510606 PICO Sleeping
Mode
PICO Sleeping
Mode(per TRX)
BSC6900 180
Configuring
PICO Sleeping
Mode
GBFD-510607 PICO
Automatic
Optimization
PICO
Automatic
Optimization
(per TRX)
BSC6900 181
Configuring
PICO
Automatic
Optimization
GBFD-510608 PICO
Tranceiver
redundancy
PICO
Tranceiver
Redundancy
(per TRX)
BSC6900 182
Configuring
PICO
Transceiver
Redundancy
GBFD-510701 Compact BTS
Automatic
Configuration
and Planning
Easy GSM
Solution Packet
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 176
Configuring
PICO/
Compact BTS
Automatic
Configuration
and Planning
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-510702 Compact BTS
Automatic
Capacity
Planning
Easy GSM
Solution Packet
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 183
Configuring
Compact BTS
Automatic
Capacity
Planning
GBFD-510704 Compact BTS
Automatic
Neighbor Cell
Planning and
Optimization
Automatic
Neighbor Cell
Planning and
Optimization
(per TRX)
BSC6900 184
Configuring
Compact BTS
Automatic
Neighbor Cell
Planning and
Optimization
GBFD-510705 Compact BTS
Timing Power
Off
Compact BTS
Timing Power
Off(per TRX)
BSC6900 185
Configuring
Compact BTS
Timing Power
Off
GBFD-510706 Local User
Management
Local User
Management
(per TRX)
BSC6900 186
Configuring
Local User
Management
GBFD-510301 Public Voice
Group Call
Service
Basic Voice
Group Call
Service(VGCS)
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 187
Configuring
VGCS and
VBS
GBFD-510303 Late Group
Channel
Assignment
Late Group Call
Channel
Assignment
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 187
Configuring
VGCS and
VBS
GBFD-510305 Single Channel
Group Call
Originating
Single Channel
Group Call
Originating
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 187
Configuring
VGCS and
VBS
GBFD-510306 Talker
Identification
Talker
Identification
function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 187
Configuring
VGCS and
VBS
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-510307 Group Call
EMLPP
Group Call
EMLPP
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 187
Configuring
VGCS and
VBS
GBFD-510308 Fast Group Call
Setup
Fast Group Call
Setup Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 187
Configuring
VGCS and
VBS
GBFD-510309 Group Call
Reliability
Enhancing
Group Call
Reliability
Enhancing
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 187
Configuring
VGCS and
VBS
GBFD-510302 Public Voice
Broadcast
Service
Basic Voice
Broadcast
Service(VBS)
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 187
Configuring
VGCS and
VBS
GBFD-510304 Late Broadcast
Channel
Assignment
Late Broadcast
Channel
Assignment
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 187
Configuring
VGCS and
VBS
GBFD-510310 GSM-T Relay GSM-T Relay
(per TRX)
BSC6900 188
Configuring
GSM-T Relay
GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II
Handover
HUAWEI II
Handover
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 189
Configuring
HUAWEI II
Handover
GBFD-510502 Handover Re-
establishment
Handover Re-
establishment
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 190
Configuring
Handover Re-
establishment
GBFD-118701 BSS Sharing RAN Sharing
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 191
Configuring
BSS Sharing
GBFD-118702 MOCN Shared
Cell
MOCN
Common Cell
(per TRX)
BSC6900 192
Configuring
MOCN Shared
Cell
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-118703 IMSI-Based
Handover
IMSI Based
Handover(per
TRX)
BSC6900 193
Configuring
IMSI-Based
Handover
GBFD-118704 Abis
Independent
Transmission
Abis
Independent
Transmission
(per TRX)
BSC6900 194
Configuring
Abis
Independent
Transmission
GBFD-510801 MSRD MSRD
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 195
Configuring
MSRD
GBFD-510802 Dual Carriers in
Downlink
Dual Carriers in
Downlink
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 196
Configuring
Dual Carriers
in Downlink
GBFD-510803 Uplink
EGPRS2-A
Uplink
EGPRS2-A
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 197
Configuring
the EGPRS2-A
GBFD-510804 Downlink
EGPRS2-A
Downlink
EGPRS2-A
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 197
Configuring
the EGPRS2-A
GBFD-510805 Latency
Reduction
Latency
Reduction
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 198
Configuring
Latency
Reduction
GBFD-510901 2G/3G
Neighboring
Cell Automatic
Optimization
2G/3G
Neighboring
Cell Automatic
Optimization
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-511002 Access Control
Class(ACC)
Access Control
Class(per TRX)
BSC6900 199
Configuring
Access Control
Class
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA
Interoperability
Intersystem
Handover &
Reselection
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 200
Configuring
GSM/
WCDMA
Interoperabilit
y
GBFD-114321 GSM/WCDMA
Service Based
Handover
Intersystem
Handover due to
Service
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 201
Configuring
GSM/
WCDMA
Service Based
Handover
GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA
Load Based
Handover
Intersystem
Handover due to
Load Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 202
Configuring
GSM/
WCDMA Load
Based
Handover
GBFD-114323 2G/3G Cell
Reselection
Based on MS
State
2G/3G Cell
Reselection
Based on MS
State Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 203
Configuring
2G/3G Cell
Reselection
Based on MS
State
GBFD-114325 Fast WCDMA
Reselection at
2G CS Call
Release
Fast 3G
Reselection at
2G Cs Call
Release
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 204
Configuring
the Fast
WCDMA
Reselection at
2G CS Call
Release
GBFD-511101 Load Based
Handover
Enhancement
on Iur-g
Handover
Based on Load
on Iur-g
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 205
Configuring
Load Based
Handover
Enhancement
on Iur-g
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-511102 NACC
Procedure
Optimization
Based on Iur-g
between GSM
and WCDMA
NACC
Procedure
Optimization
Based on Iur-g
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 206
Configuring
NACC
(Network
Assisted Cell
Change)
Procedure
Optimization
Based on Iur-g
between GSM
and WCDMA
GBFD-511103 GSM and
WCDMA Load
Balancing
Based on Iur-g
BSC Load
Balancing
Based on Iur-g
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 207
Configuring
GSM and
WCDMA Load
Balancing
Based on Iur-g
GBFD-511104 GSM and
WCDMA
Traffic Steering
Based on Iur-g
BSC Service
Distribution
Based on Iur-g
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 208
Configuring
GSM and
WCDMA
Traffic
Steering Based
on Iur-g
GBFD-511301 Cell Reselection
Between GSM
and LTE
Cell Reselection
Between GSM
and LTE(per
TRX)
BSC6900 209
Configuring
Cell
Reselection
Between GSM
and LTE
GBFD-511302 PS Handover
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Coverage
PS Handover
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Coverage
(per TRX)
BSC6900 210
Configuring
PS Handover
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Coverage
GBFD-511303 PS Handover
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Quality
PS Handover
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Quality(per
TRX)
BSC6900 211
Configuring
PS Handover
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Quality
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-511304 PS Handover
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Cell Load
PS Handover
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Cell Load
(per TRX)
BSC6900 212
Configuring
PS Handover
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Cell Load
GBFD-511305 PS Handover
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Mode
Priority
PS Handover
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Mode
Priority (per
TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-511306 GSM/LTE
Service Based
PS Handover
GSM/LTE
Service Based
PS Handover
(per TRX)
BSC6900 213
Configuring
GSM/LTE
Service Based
PS Handover
GBFD-511307 eNC2 Between
GSM and LTE
eNC2 Between
GSM and LTE
(per TRX)
BSC6900 214
Configuring
eNC2 Between
GSM and LTE
GBFD-511308 eNACC
Between GSM
and LTE
eNACC
Between GSM
and LTE (per
TRX)
BSC6900 215
Configuring
eNACC
Between GSM
and LTE
GBFD-511309 SRVCC SRVCC (per
TRX)
BSC6900 216
Configuring
SRVCC
GBFD-511310 Multi
Technology
Neighbour Cell
Based
Handover
Multi
Technology
Neighbour Cell
Based
Handover (per
TRX)
BSC6900 217
Configuring
Multi
Technology
Neighbour Cell
Based
Handover
GBFD-511312 Fast LTE
Reselection at
2G CS Call
Release
Fast LTE
Reselection at
GSM CS Call
Release (per
TRX)
BSC6900 218
Configuring
Fast LTE
Reselection at
2G CS Call
Release
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-511313 CSFB CSFB (per
TRX)
BSC6900 219
Configuring
CSFB
GBFD-114302 GSM/TD-
SCDMA
Interoperability
Intersystem
Handover &
Reselection
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 220
Configuring
GSM/TD-
SCDMA
Interoperabilit
y
GBFD-511401 Iur-g Interface
Between GSM
and TD-
SCDMA
Iur-g Interface
Between GSM
and TD-
SCDMA(per
TRX)
BSC6900 221
Configuring
Iur-g Interface
Between GSM
and TD-
SCDMA
GBFD-511402 Radio Resource
Reserved
Handover
Between GSM/
TD-SCDMA
Based on Iur-g
Radio Resource
Reserved
Handover
Between GSM/
TD-SCDMA
Based on Iur-g
(per TRX)
BSC6900 222
Configuring
Radio
Resource
Reserved
Handover
Between GSM/
TD-SCDMA
Based on Iur-g
GBFD-511403 Extended
BCCH
Extended
BCCH (per
TRX)
BSC6900 223
Configuring
Extended
BCCH
GBFD-511501 Multiple
CCCHs
Multiple CCCH
(per TRX)
BSC6900 224
Configuring
Multiple
CCCHs
GBFD-511502 Layered Paging Layered Paging
(per TRX)
BSC6900 225
Configuring
Layered
Paging
GBFD-511201 2G/3G Co-
Transmission
by TDM
Switching
2G/3G Co-
Transmission
by TDM
Switching
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 226
Configuring
2G/3G Co-
Transmission
by TDM
Switching
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-511701 Radio
Measurement
Data Interface
for Navigation
Radio
Measurement
Data Interface
for Navigation
(per TRX)
BSC6900 227
Configuring
Radio
Measurement
Data Interface
for Navigation
MRFD-211801 Multi-mode
Dynamic Power
Sharing(GSM)
GSM and
UMTS
Dynamic Power
Sharing
BSC6900 228
Configuring
Multi-mode
Dynamic
Power Sharing
(GSM)
MRFD-211802 GSM and
UMTS
Dynamic
Spectrum
Sharing(GSM)
GSM and
UMTS
Dynamic
Spectrum
Sharing(Per
Site)
BSC6900 229
Configuring
GSM and
UMTS
Dynamic
Spectrum
Sharing(GSM)
MRFD-211501 IP-Based Multi-
mode Co-
Transmission
on BS side
(GBTS)
None None 230
Configuring
IP-Based
Multi-mode
Co-
Transmission
on BS side
(GBTS)
MRFD-211504 TDM-Based
Multi-mode Co-
Transmission
via Backplane
on BS side
(GBTS)
None None 231
Configuring
TDM-Based
Multi-mode
Co-
Transmission
via Backplane
on BS side
(GBTS)
MRFD-211505 Bandwidth
sharing of
MBTS Multi-
mode Co-
Transmission
(GBTS)
Bandwidth
sharing of
MBTS Multi-
mode Co-
Transmission
(per Site)
BSC6900 None
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
MRFD-211601 Multi-mode BS
Common
Reference
Clock(GBTS)
None None 232
Configuring
Multi-Mode
BS Common
Reference
Clock (GBTS)
MRFD-211703 2.0MHz Central
Frequency point
separation
between GSM
and UMTS
mode(GSM)
2.0MHz Central
Frequency point
separation
between GSM
and UMTS
mode(Per Site)
BSC6900 None

GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
3 Activating the GSM License
This describes how to activate the GSM license.
Prerequisites
l The BSC6900 is in service.
l The LMT is started and you are logged in to the BSC6900.
l The valid BSC6900 license is obtained and stored in the OMU active workspace \FTP
\License
Procedure
Step 1 Run LST LICENSE and enter the name of the license file to be activated to query the file
information.
If... Then...
The file information comply with the information of the
file that you apply for,
Go to Step 2.
The file information does not comply with the
information of the file that you apply for,
Exit the task and contact Huawei.
Step 2 Run the LST CFGMODE command to query the subrack configuration status. If the subrack
is offline, run the SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE command to switch it to online.
Step 3 Run the ACT LICENSE command to active the License.
----End
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 3 Activating the GSM License
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
4 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-114401
Multi-band Sharing One BSC.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
l Other Prerequisites
The TRXs configured for the BTS supports the corresponding frequency bands.
Context
l Huawei GSM BSS supports the following types of multiband networks:
GSM850 band + GSM900 band + DCS1800 band
GSM850 band + GSM900 band + PCS1900 band
l The most common combination is GSM900 with DCS1800 and GSM850 with PCS1900.
l Huawei GSM BSS does not support the co-existence of a GSM900/DCS1800 co-BCCH
cell and a GSM850/PCS1900 co-BCCH cell.
l Huawei GSM BSS supports GSM900 band, DCS1800 band, PCS1900 band, and GSM850
band. Huawei GSM BSS does not support GSM450 band or GSM480 band.
The dual-band network configured on the GSM900 and DCS1800 bands of a BTS is used as an
example.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add a GSM cell. In this step, set
Freq. Band to GSM900.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 4 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
3. Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to set Freq. Band to DCS1800.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handover
parameters of the GSM900 and DCS1800 cells based on the network plan.
2. Use an MS supporting the GSM900 band to camp on a 900 MHz cell. Perform the
dialing test. The call is normal.
3. Use an MS supporting the DCS1800 band to camp on a 1800 MHz cell. Perform the
dialing test. The call is normal.
4. Use an MS supporting the GSM900 and DCS1800 bands to camp on a 900 MHz cell.
Perform the dialing test. After the call is set up, move the MS towards the center of
the 1800 MHz cell. Then, check the channel status in the monitoring window. The
MS is handed over to the 1800 MHz cell, and the call is kept alive.
NOTE
l On the LMT, click Device Maintenance. In the Device Navigation Tree, right-click a specified
cell, and then choose Monitor Channel Status.
l When a call is handed over to the 1800 MHz cell, the color of a channel in the Monitor Channel
Status window is displayed as green. This indicates that the channel is occupied by the call
handed to the 1800 MHz cell.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL. In this step, set Freq. Band to
GSM900.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELL to query the value Active status.
Expected result: The value of Active status is DEACTIVATED.
3. Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to deactivate the cell whose Freq. Band is DCS1800.
----End
Example
//Activating Multi-band Sharing One BSC
//Adding a GSM cell
ADD GCELL: CELLID=0, CELLNAME="Cell0", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="460", MNC="10",
LAC=10, CI=11, NCC=0, BCC=0, IUOTP=Normal_cell, FLEXMAIO=OFF;
//Activating the GSM cell
ACT GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;
//Adding a DCS cell
ADD GCELL: CELLID=1, CELLNAME="Cell1", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="10",
LAC=11, CI=12, NCC=0, BCC=0, IUOTP=Normal_cell, FLEXMAIO=OFF;
//Activating the DCS cell
ACT GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1;
//Verifying Multi-band Sharing One BSC
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2;
//Deactivating NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)
DEA GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 4 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
5 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110202
Emergency Call Service (TS12).
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
Context
The emergency call service takes precedence over other services during network access even if
the MS requesting the service is suspended or the telephone charge is overdue.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC to enable the emergency
call service. In this step, set Emergent Call Disable to NO(No).
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCBASIC to query whether the
emergency call service is enabled.
Expected result: The value of Emergent Call Disable is No.
2. Tracing Messages on the A Interface. On the Basic tab page, set DPC(HEX) to the
DPC of the cell and select the BSSAP check box. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell
ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the cell. Click Submit.
3. Use the MS to make an emergency call. After the call is put through, you can hear a
voice prompt.
4. Check the BSSAP messages traced on the A interface.
Expected result: An EMERGENCY_SETUP message is traced on the A interface.
This indicates that the emergency call service is enabled.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 5 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC to disable the emergency
call service. In this step, set Emergent Call Disable to YES(Yes).
----End
Example
//Activating Emergency Call Service (TS12)
SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ERGCALLDIS=NO;
//Deactivating Emergency Call Service (TS12)
SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ERGCALLDIS=YES;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 5 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
6 Configuring IMSI Detach
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110302
IMSI Detach.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
Context
After the IMSI is detached, the MS is marked as an invalid MS by the network. The network
does not send any paging message to this MS.
The network informs the MS whether the IMSI attach or detach is allowed by sending the system
information type 3 message.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLIDLEBASIC. In this step, set
Attach-detach Allowed to YES(Yes).
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLIDLEBASIC to query the value of
Attach-detach Allowed.
Expected result: The value of Attach-detach Allowed is YES(Yes).
2. On the BSC6900 LMT, initiate A interface message tracing by referring to Tracing
Messages on the A Interface. On the Basic tab page, set DPC(HEX) to the DPC of
the cell and select the BSSAP check box. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID
(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the cell. Click Submit.
3. After the A interface message tracing window is displayed, power off the MS.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 6 Configuring IMSI Detach
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
Expected result: The IMSI DETACH INDICATION message is traced on the A
interface.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLIDLEBASIC. In this step, set
Attach-detach Allowed to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating IMSI Detach
SET GCELLIDLEBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ATT=YES;
//Deactivating IMSI Detach
SET GCELLIDLEBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ATT=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 6 Configuring IMSI Detach
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
7 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110601
HUAWEI I Handover.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not depend on the hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
l Other Prerequisites
Neighboring 2G cells have been configured. For details, see Configuring the Neighboring
Cell Relations.
Context
Handover is used to keep the call continuity of the UE during its movement. It also helps optimize
the network performance by balancing the traffic between cells.
Huawei I handover is classified into high-speed railway quick handover, emergency handover,
enhanced dual-band network handover, load handover, and normal handover. The emergency
handover is classified into TA handover, bad quality (UL/DL) handover, quick level drop
handover, interference handover, and no downlink measurement report handover. The normal
handover is classified into edge handover, hierarchical handover, PBGT handover, concentric
cell handover, AMR handover, and better 3G cell handover.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 7 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
CAUTION
l After quick handover, bad quality handover, and TA handover are successful, penalty is
applied on the old cell during the penalty time to prevent an immediate handover back to the
old cell.
l During TA handover, if the TA Threshold of a co-site neighboring cell is lower than or equal
to the TA Threshold of the serving cell, a handover to the cell is prohibited.
l Intra-cell handover is allowed for the interference handover. However, when intra-cell
handover is triggered several times continuously, it will be forbidden within a specified
duration.
l On the enhanced dual-band network, the MS should not be handed over to a cell in the same
underlaid/overlaid cell group when the load handovers between the overlaid cell and the
underlaid cell (specified by Load HO From UL Subcell to OL Subcell Allowed and Load
HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell Enabled) are allowed. This is to prevent a load handover
of a normal cell from colliding with a load handover between the overlaid cell and the
underlaid cell on the network.
l PBGT handover toward a cell of the same group is not allowed once it is triggered between
the enhanced dual-band network cells.
l After the fast-moving micro cell handover is successful, penalty is applied on all the
neighboring micro cells.
l SDCCH handover supports the quick handover, TA handover, bad quality handover, quick
level drop handover, interference handover, no downlink measurement report handover, edge
handover, and fast-moving micro cell handover. It does not support the enhanced dual-band
network handover, load handover, hierarchical handover, PBGT handover, AMR handover,
better 3G cell handover, concentric cell handover, and tight BCCH handover.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Current HO
Control Algorithm set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG with Current HO
Control Algorithm set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN with Current HO
Control Algorithm set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO with Current HO Control
Algorithm set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD after setting MAX
Consecutive HO Times as required.
6. Optional: To improve the effect of handover and power control when the BCCH
participates in baseband frequency hopping, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GCELLCCCH with PWRC set to YES(Yes) and run the BSC6900 MML command
SET GCELLOTHEXT with Power Control and Handover CMP CON Sw set to
YES(Yes).
7. Activating the quick handover algorithm
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 7 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set
Neighboring Cell Type as required, set Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes), and
then set Chain Neighbour Cell Type as required.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Quick
Handover Enable set to YES(Yes).
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFAST. In this step, set
Handover Direction Forecast Enable to YES(Yes), and then set Quick Move
Speed Threshold, Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, Quick Handover
Down Trigger Level, Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish
Time, Quick Handover Punish Value, Serving Cell Filter Length MR
Number, Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number, Ignore Measurement
Report Number, EN Quick PBGT HO ALG When MS Leaves BTS,
Handover Direction Forecast Statistic Times, Frequency Shift Handover
Statistic Time, and Frequency Shift Handover Duration to appropriate values.
NOTE
If a neighboring cell is an external neighboring cell, you need to run the BSC6900 MML
command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover
Punish Time, and Quick Handover Punish Value.
d. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT after
setting UL Frequency Adjust Switch, DL Frequency Adjust Switch, and UL
Frequency Adjust Value according to the frequency offset information reported
by the base station.
8. Activating the TA handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with TA HO
Allowed set to YES(Yes).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG after setting TA
Threshold as required.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN after setting
Penalty Time after TA HO and Penalty Level after TA HO as required.
9. Activating the bad quality handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with BQ HO
Allowed set to YES(Yes).
b. Optional: For non-AMR calls, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GCELLHOEMG after setting UL Qual. Threshold and DL Qual.
Threshold as required.
c. Optional: For AMR FR calls or AMR HR calls, run the BSC6900 MML
command SET GCELLAMRQUL after setting UL Qual. Limit for AMR
FR, DL Qual. Limit for AMR FR, UL Qual. Limit for AMR HR, and DL
Qual. Limit for AMR HR as required.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN after setting
Penalty Time after BQ HO and Penalty Level after BQ HO as required.
10. Activating rapid level drop handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with
Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed set to YES(Yes) and Edge HO UL RX_LEV
Threshold set to an appropriate value.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG after setting Filter
Parameter A1, Filter Parameter A2, Filter Parameter A3, Filter Parameter
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 7 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
A4, Filter Parameter A5, Filter Parameter A6, Filter Parameter A7, Filter
Parameter A8, and Filter Parameter B as required.
11. Activating the interference handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Interference
HO Allowed set to YES(Yes) and Intracell HO Allowed and Inter-layer HO
Threshold to appropriate values.
NOTE
If this cell is configured with external neighboring cells, you need to run the BSC6900
MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL with Inter-layer HO Threshold set to an
appropriate value.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD after setting
Forbidden time after MAX Times as required.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL after setting Adjacent
Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis as required.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLAMRQUL after setting
Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 1 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh
2 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 3 for Non-AMR FR,
Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 4 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh
5 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 6 for Non-AMR FR,
Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 7 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh
8 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 9 for Non-AMR FR,
Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 10 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh
11 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 12 for Non-AMR FR, and
Interfere HO Qual. Thresh Offset for AMR FR as required.
12. Activating the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG with No Dl Mr.HO
Allowed set to YES(Yes) and No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit, Cons.No Dl
Mr.HO Allowed Limit, No Dl Mr. HO Statistic Time, and No Dl Mr. HO
Last Time set to appropriate values.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN after setting
Filter Length for TCH Qual and Filter Length for SDCCH Qual as required.
13. Activating the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Cell IUO
Type to EDB_cell(Enhanced Double Frequency Cell), set Cell Inner/Extra
Property and Same Group Cell Index Type to appropriate values, and set Same
Group Cell Name or Same Group Cell Index based on the value of Same
Group Cell Index Type.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA after setting
Load HO Allowed, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold, Inner Cell
Serious OverLoad Thred, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level,
Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH, UL Subcell Serious Overload
Threshold, UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Periods, MOD Step LEN of
UL Load HO Period, Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO, UL Subcell
Lower Load Threshold, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level, Outgoing
OL Subcell HO Level TH, OL Subcell Load Diversity HO Period, Step
Length of OL Subcell Load HO, Distance Between Boundaries of Subcells,
and Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries as required.
14. Activating the load handover algorithm
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 7 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Load
Handover Support set to YES(Yes) and Inter-layer HO Threshold and Edge
HO DL RX_LEV Threshold set to appropriate values.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD after setting System
Flux Threshold for Load HO, Load HO Threshold, Load handover Load
Accept Threshold, Load HO Bandwidth, Load HO Step Period, and Load
HO Step Level as required.
NOTE
If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, you need to run the
BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL after setting Load handover Load
Accept Threshold as required. If this cell is configured with external 3G neighboring
cells, you need to run the MML command MOD GEXT3GCELL after setting Load
handover Load Accept Threshold.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL after setting Adjacent
Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis as required.
15. Activating the edge handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Edge HO
Allowed set to YES(Yes) and Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO
UL RX_LEV Threshold, Handover Algorithm I Edge HO Watch Time, and
Handover Algorithm I Edge HO Valid Time set to appropriate values.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL after setting Adjacent
Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis as required.
16. Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA after setting
Layer of The Cell as required.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with MS Fast
Moving HO Allowed set to YES(Yes) and Inter-layer HO Threshold set to an
appropriate value.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD after setting MS Fast-
moving Time Threshold, MS Fast-moving Watch Cells, MS Fast-moving
Valid Cells, Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO, and Penalty on MS Fast
Moving HO as required.
NOTE
If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, you need to run the
BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Layer of The Cell, Inter-layer
HO Threshold, Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO, and Penalty on MS Fast Moving
HO.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL after setting Adjacent
Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis as required.
17. Activating the inter-layer handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Level HO
Allowed set to YES(Yes) and Inter-layer HO Threshold set to an appropriate
value.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA after setting
Layer of The Cell and Cell Priority.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 7 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
NOTE
If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, you need to run the
BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Layer of The Cell and Cell
Priority as required.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL after setting Layer HO
Watch Time, Layer HO Valid Time, and Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO
Hysteresis.
18. Activating the PBGT handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with PBGT HO
Allowed set to YES(Yes).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA after setting
Layer of The Cell and Cell Priority as required.
NOTE
If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, you need to run the
BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL after setting Layer of The Cell and
Cell Priority.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set
Neighboring Cell Type, set Current HO CTRL Algorithm in Source Cell to
HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I), and then set PBGT Watch
Time, PBGT Valid Time, and PBGT HO Threshold as required.
19. Activating the AMR handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set
Intracell F-H HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set F2H HO Threshold, H2F
HO Threshold, Intracell F-H HO Stat Time, and Intracell F-H HO Last
Time as required.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV with TCH Rate Adjust
Allow set to YES(Yes).
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS with Speech
Version set to at least FULL_RATE_VER3 and HALF_RATE_VER3.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC with A Interface Tag set
to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.
e. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD after setting AMR
TCH/H Prior Allowed and AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold as
required.
20. Activating the SDCCH handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set
SDCCH HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set F2H HO Threshold, H2F HO
Threshold, Intracell F-H HO Stat Time, and Intracell F-H HO Last Time as
required.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL after setting Inter-
BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed as required.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to query the setting of
Current HO Control Algorithm.
Expected result: The value of Current HO Control Algorithm is
HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 7 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
2. Start the BSSAP message tracing task by referring to Tracing Messages on the A
Interface.
Expected result: The BSC sends the MSC a Handover Performed message with the
handover cause value of better-cell, distance, uplink-quality, downlink-quality,
traffic, uplink-strength, or downlink-strength.
In the case of the quick handover, the handover cause value is better-cell.
In the case of the TA handover, the handover cause value is distance.
In the case of the BQ handover, the handover cause value is uplink-quality or
downlink-quality.
In the case of the rapid level drop handover algorithm, the handover cause value
is uplink-strength.
In the case of the interference handover, the handover cause value is uplink-
quality or downlink-quality.
In the case of the no downlink measurement report handover, the handover cause
value is uplink-quality.
In the case of the enhanced dual-band network handover, the handover cause value
is better-cell or traffic.
In the case of the load handover, the handover cause value is traffic.
In the case of the edge handover, the handover cause value is uplink-strength or
downlink-strength.
In the case of the fast-moving micro cell handover, the handover cause value is
better-cell.
In the case of the inter-layer handover, the handover cause value is better-cell.
In the case of the PBGT handover, the handover cause value is better-cell.
In the case of the AMR handover, the handover cause value is downlink-
quality.
In the case of the SDCCH handover, the handover cause value is better-cell,
distance, uplink-quality, downlink-quality, traffic, uplink-strength, or
downlink-strength.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activating HUAWEI I handover algorithm
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;
SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;
SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;
SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOTRYCNT=3;
//Activating the quick handover algorithm
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ISCHAINNCELL=YES,
CHAINNCELLTYPE=QUICK_HO_NCELL_TYPE_A;
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
QUICKHOEN=YES;
SET GCELLHOFAST: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOUPTRIGE=50, HODOWNTRIGE=50,
MOVESPEEDTHRES=35, SCELLFILTER=4, NCELLFILTER=4, IGNOREMRNUM=1,
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 7 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
TIMEPUNISH=10, HOPUNISHVALUE=63, HOOFFSET=68, MSLEVSTRQPBGT=NO,
HODIRFORECASTEN=YES, HODIRSTATIME=3, HODIRLASTTIME=2, AFCHOSTATTIME=4,
AFCHOLASTTIME=3;
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=YES, DLFREQADJ=YES,
FREQADJVALUE=36671;
//Activating the TA handover algorithm
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
TAHOEN=YES;
SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
TALIMIT=125;
SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
SSTAPUNISH=40, TIMETAPUNISH=10;
//Activating the bad quality handover algorithm
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
BQHOEN=YES;
SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
DLQUALIMIT=55, ULQUALIMIT=60;
SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
SSBQPUNISH=63, TIMEBQPUNISH=10;
//Activating rapid level drop handover algorithm
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
RXQCKFALLHOEN=YES, ULEDGETHRES=10;
SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
FLTPARAA1=10, FLTPARAA2=10, FLTPARAA3=10, FLTPARAA4=10, FLTPARAA5=10,
FLTPARAA6=10, FLTPARAA7=10, FLTPARAA8=10, FLTPARAB=0;
//Activating the interference handover algorithm
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
INTRACELLHOEN=YES, INTERFHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=2;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BANTIME=20;
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;
SET GCELLAMRQUL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0 ,RXQUAL1=35;
//Activating the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm
SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
NODLMRHOEN=YES, NODLMRHOQUALLIMIT=50, NODLMRHOALLOWLIMIT=8,
NODLMRHOSTATTIME=1, NODLMRHOLASTTIME=1;
SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
DATAQUAFLTLEN=4, SIGQUAFLTLEN=2;
//Activating the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithm
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IUOTP=EDB_cell, CELLINEXTP=Inner,
DBLFREQADJIDTYPE=BYID, DBLFREQADJCID=1;
SET GCELLHOEDBPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OUTASSOPTEN=YES;
//Activating the load handover algorithm
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, LoadHoEn=YES,
DLEDGETHRES=20, HOTHRES=25;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SYSFLOWLEV=10, TRIGTHRES=90,
LoadAccThres=80, LOADOFFSET=25, LOADHOPERIOD=10, LOADHOSTEP=5;
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;
//Activating the edge handover algorithm
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
FRINGEHOEN=YES, ULEDGETHRES=10, DLEDGETHRES=20, EDGESTAT1=6, EDGELAST1=4;
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;
//Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3;
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
QCKMVHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=25;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QCKSTATCNT=3, QCKTRUECNT=2,
QCKTIMETH=15, SPEEDPUNISH=30, SPEEDPUNISHT=4;
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 7 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
//Activating the inter-layer handover algorithm
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
LEVHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=25;
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3, PRIOR=PRIOR-3;
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67, LEVSTAT=6, LEVLAST=4;
//Activating the PBGT handover algorithm
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
PBGTHOEN=YES;
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3, PRIOR=PRIOR-3;
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67, PBGTSTAT=6, PBGTLAST=4;
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, PBGTMARGIN=68,
PBGTSTAT=6, PBGTLAST=4;
//Activating the AMR handover algorithm
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
INTRACELLFHHOEN=YES, INFHHOSTAT=10, INFHHOLAST=8, INHOF2HTH=25,
INHOH2FTH=12;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=YES;
SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-0&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-1&HALF_RATE_VER
1-1&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-1&FULL_RATE_VER5-0;
SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2;
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=ON,
AMRTCHHPRIORLOAD=55;
//Activating the SDCCH handover algorithm
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
INTRACELLFHHOEN=YES, INFHHOSTAT=10, INFHHOLAST=8, INHOF2HTH=25,
INHOH2FTH=12;
SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INRBSCSDHOEN=YES;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 7 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
8 Configuring Directed Retry
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110607
Directed Retry.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
Context
Directed retry is a special type of handover. That is, during the assignment procedure, the BSC
initiates the directed retry procedure to switch the MS to a neighboring cell if no TCH is available
or the traffic load is heavy in the serving cell.
This feature helps reduce call access failures due to TCH congestion in the serving cell, thereby
increasing the access success rate. It can also balance the traffic load between different cells.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set
Directed Retry to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLCCBASIC. Set Directed Retry
Load Access Threshold based on the actual load of candidate neighboring cells.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Current
HO CTRL Algorithm in Source Cell to an appropriate value. Run the BSC6900
MML commandSET GCELLHOCTRL if Current HO CTRL Algorithm in
Source Cell is set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I). In this step, set
Min Power Level For Directed Retry based on the actual receive level of
neighboring cells. Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD G2GNCELL if Current
HO CTRL Algorithm in Source Cellis set to HOALGORITHM2(Handover
algorithm II). In this step, set cells 0 and 1 to neighboring cells, and set Inter-cell
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 8 Configuring Directed Retry
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
HO Hysteresis and Directed Retry Handover Level Range for cell 1 to appropriate
values.
4. Optional: Set the number of cells for directed retry and the priorities of these cells.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT with DRD HO
Target Cell Selection Optimized set to YES(Yes).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD with Max. Num. of
HO Attempts set to an appropriate value.
l Verification Procedure
1. Block the TCHs in cell 0. Meanwhile, ensure that the SDCCHs in cell 0 are available
for use.
2. Trace the BSSAP messages on the A interface and the RSL messages on the Abis
interface in cells 0 and 1 by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface and
Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface.
3. Make a call in cell 0.
4. View the BSSAP messages traced on the A interface and RSL messages traced on the
Abis interface in cells 0 and 1.
Expected result: Calls are established successfully and the speech quality is good. The
Handover Detection message is traced on the Abis interface in cell 1. The Assignment
Complete message is traced on the A interface in cell 1.
5. Open the Single User CS Trace page. You can see that the value of the ucHoCause
information element (IE) in the Handover Triggered Indication message is directed-
retry.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA with Directed
Retry set to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating directed retry
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DIRECTRYEN=YES;
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DRTAGCELLSEL=YES;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOTRYCNT=3;
//Deactivating directed retry
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DIRECTRYEN=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 8 Configuring Directed Retry
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
9 Configuring Assignment and Immediate
Assignment
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110502
Assignment and Immediate Assignment.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
Context
Assignment and immediate assignment are two important procedures during call setup. Normal
immediate and immediate assignment procedures do not require setting of any parameter.
Parameter setting is required only in the immediate assignment of TCHs. The following section
describes how to configure the function of immediate TCH assignment.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TCH
Immediate Assignment to YES(Yes).
l Verification Procedure
1. When an MS camps on a cell and no MS is processing services in the cell, block the
SDCCHs and disable the SDCCH dynamic adjustment function.
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block an
SDCCH. In this step, set Channel No. to the number of the SDCCH and
Administrative State to Lock(Lock). To block more SDCCHs, run the SET
GTRXCHANADMSTAT command for each SDCCH you want to block.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 9 Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA to disable
SDCCH dynamic adjustment. In this step, set SDCCH Dynamic Allocation
Allowed to NO(No).
2. Use the MS to initiate a call.
3. Check the messages traced over the Abis interface.
On the Abis interface message tracing window, the CHANNEL ACTIVATION
message is traced. The field Channel Mode and Type indicates that a TCH, instead of
an SDCCH, is assigned during immediate assignment. During assignment, the
messages Mode Modify Request and Mode Modify Acknowledge are traced.
4. After the verification, unblock the SDCCH and enable SDCCH dynamic adjustment
immediately.
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to unblock
an SDCCH. In this step, set Channel No. to the number of the SDCCH and
Administrative State to Unlock(Unlock). To unblock more SDCCHs, run the
SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT command for each SDCCH you want to unblock.
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA to enable
SDCCH dynamic adjustment. In this step, set SDCCH Dynamic Allocation
Allowed to YES(Yes).
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TCH
Immediate Assignment to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating Assignment and Immediate Assignment
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IMMASSEN=YES;
//Deactivating Assignment and Immediate Assignment
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IMMASSEN=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 9 Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
10 Configuring Call Reestablishment
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110503
Call Reestablishment.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
l Other Prerequisites
The MSC supports this feature.
Context
When an MS encounters a radio link failure during the call, the call reestablishment procedure
can be performed to reestablish the radio link connection so that the original call can proceed.
This mechanism shortens call interruption and improves user experience.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Call
Reestablishment Forbidden to NO(No).
2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLTMR. In this step, set
TREESTABLISH to an appropriate value. If this parameter is set to a great value,
the radio resources assigned previously are reserved for a long time, which results in
network congestion.
l Verification Procedure
1. Select a cell for test. The test cell must have two TRXs, where, TRX1 is the BCCH
TRX and TRX2 is the non-BCCH TRX. TRX2 requires an independent variable
attenuator or a device that can dynamically adjust the uplink and downlink signals of
TRX2.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 10 Configuring Call Reestablishment
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
2. Use an MS to make a call on the test cell. Block all the TCHs on TRX1 so that the
MS uses a TCH on TRX2. Then, unblock all the TCHs on TRX1. For details about
how to block and unblock TCHs, see SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT
3. Attenuate the signals of TRX2 sharply by using the variable attenuator or other
devices, check the signaling traced on the A and Abis interfaces, and monitor the
channel status of the test cell.
Expected result:
As displayed in the channel status monitoring window, the MS reestablishes a call
on TRX1 of the test cell.
The signaling messages shown in Figure 10-1 are traced.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 10 Configuring Call Reestablishment
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
Figure 10-1 Signaling messages

l Deactivation Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 10 Configuring Call Reestablishment
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Call
Reestablishment Forbidden to YES(Yes).
----End
Example
//Activating Call Reestablishment
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CALLRESTABDIS=NO;
SET GCELLTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MSIPFAILINDDELAY=10000;
//Deactivating Call Reestablishment
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CALLRESTABDIS=YES;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 10 Configuring Call Reestablishment
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
11 Configuring TCH Re-assignment
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-112501
TCH Re-assignment.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
Context
TCH re-assignment is a procedure in which the BSC re-assigns a TCH to the MS after the MS
returns to the SDCCH because a TCH fails to be assigned to the MS.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set Allow
Reassign to YES(Yes).
l Verification Procedure
1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set
Frequency Band of Reassign to Same_Band(Same Band).
NOTE
This parameter indicates the frequency band to be assigned during TCH re-assignment. If the
parameter is set to Same_Band(Same Band), then a channel of the same frequency band as
the originally assigned TCH is assigned preferentially.
2. Reserve an idle TCH on the BCCH TRX and block other TCHs on the BCCH TRX.
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block a TCH.
In this step, set Channel No. to the number of the TCH to be blocked and
Administrative State to Lock(Lock).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 11 Configuring TCH Re-assignment
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
3. Reserve an idle TCH on the non-BCCH TRX and block other TCHs on the non-BCCH
TRX. In addition, degrade the uplink signal transmitted on the TRX, for example,
remove the uplink antenna for the non-BCCH TRX.
Expected result: Initiate a call in the cell. In the first assignment, a TCH on the non-
BCCH TRX is assigned. The call is re-assigned onto the TCH of the BCCH TRX,
because the assignment over the Um interface fails for this TRX.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set Allow
Reassign to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating TCH Re-assignment
SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, REASSEN=YES;
//Verifying TCH Re-assignment
SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, REASSFREQBAND=Same_Band;
//Deactivating TCH Re-assignment
SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, REASSEN=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 11 Configuring TCH Re-assignment
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
12 Configuring Radio Link Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the link error indication procedure
of the basic feature GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management. Other procedures of the feature do
not need to be configured.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
Context
The procedures involved in radio link management are as follows:
l Link establishment indication
l Link establishment request
l Link release indication
l Link release request
l Transmission of a transparent L3-Message in acknowledged mode
l Reception of a transparent L3-Message in acknowledged mode
l Transmission of a transparent L3-Message in unacknowledged mode
l Reception of a transparent L3-Message in unacknowledged mode
l Link error indication
The link error indication procedure enables the BTS to notify the BSC of exceptions that occur
on the radio link layer.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR to set parameters for a
specified cell. In this step, set T200 SDCCH, T200 FACCH/Full Rate, T200
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 12 Configuring Radio Link Management
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
FACCH/Half Rate, T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0, T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3, T200
SACCH SDCCH, T200 SDCCH SAPI3, Use LAPDm N200, N200 of Establish,
N200 of Release, N200 of SACCH, N200 of SDCCH, N200 of FACCH/Half
Rate, and N200 of FACCH/Full Rate to appropriate values.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCTMR to query call control timer
parameters for the corresponding cell.
Expected result: The parameter values queried by running the preceding command
are the same as the values set in the activation procedure.
2. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace and display the Abis Interface CS Trace dialog
box. On the Basic tab page, select RSL under Trace Type. On the RSL tab page,
select RLM under Message Type, select TRX from the Filter Flag drop-down list,
and then specify the TRX ID.
3. Use an MS to make a call and query the channel occupied by the call. Remove the
battery of the MS during the call.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO to initiate a forced handover for the
MS. Set Handover Scope to FREE(Free).
5. Check messages traced in step 2. Then, check whether the interval between the DATA
REQ message and the ERROR INDication message is consistent with the values of
N200 and T200 set in the activation procedure. The DATA REQ message contains
the Handover command message, which is transmitted over the Um interface.
Expected result: The interval of the messages for the full-rate channel is basically the
same as the product of values of N200 of FACCH/Full Rate and T200 FACCH/Full
Rate. The interval of the messages for the half-rate channel is basically the same as
the product of values of N200 of FACCH/Half Rate and T200 FACCH/Half Rate.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activating the link error indication procedure of Radio Link Management
SET GCELLCCTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, T200SDCCH=1, T200FACCHF=1,
T200FACCHH=1, T200SACCT0=1, T200SACCH3=1, T200SACCHS=1, T200SDCCH3=1;
//Verifying the link error indication procedure of Radio Link Management
LST GCELLCCTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;
SET FHO: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOMOD=FREE;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 12 Configuring Radio Link Management
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
13 Configuring BTS Software Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the integrity check function
introduced in the basic feature MRFD-210402 BTS Software Management. Other functions
involved in the feature do not need to be configured.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
Only 3900 series base stations support this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
l Other Prerequisites
The M2000 supports this feature.
Context
When software and a configuration file are transmitted between the M2000 and the BSC, the
software and file may be damaged because of unstable transmission links or malicious attacks.
The integrity check function can check the correctness and integrity of software and
configuration files.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSDIGSIGN to turn on the BTS software
integrity protection switch. In this step, set Software Digital Signature Verification
Switch to ON(On).
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSDIGSIGN to check whether the BTS
software integrity protection switch has been turned on.
Expected result: Software Digital Signature Verification Switch is set to ON
(On).
l Deactivation Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 13 Configuring BTS Software Management
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSDIGSIGN to turn off the BTS software
integrity protection switch. In this step, set Software Digital Signature Verification
Switch to OFF(Off).
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
SET BTSDIGSIGN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, DIGSIGNSW=ON;
//Verification procedure
DSP BTSDIGSIGN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;
//Deactivation procedure
SET BTSDIGSIGN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, DIGSIGNSW=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 13 Configuring BTS Software Management
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
14 Configuring Combined Cabinets and
Cabinet Groups of BTSs
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic features GBFD-111501
BTS Combined Cabinet and GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The cabinets and cables of the BTSs in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode are
installed.
The DIP switches of the BTSs in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode are set.
NOTE
For details about how to install cabinets, connect cables, and set DIP switches, see the relevant
Product Description and Installation Guide contained in customer documents.
The BTS3012, BTS3006C, BTS3002E, and BTS3900E support the combined-cabinet
installation mode.
The BTS3012, BTS3012II, BTS3012III, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C, BTS3002E, and
BTS3900E support the cabinet-group installation mode.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
Context
l Combined cabinets
Multiple BTS cabinets of the same type are connected together to serve as one BTS. In
this case, the DTRU subrack is enlarged.
The cabinet configured with the DTMU is the main cabinet, whereas the cabinet not
configured with the DTMU is the extension cabinet. The extension cabinet shares the
DTMU with the main cabinet.
Figure 14-1 shows the connections of the BTS3012 combined cabinets.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide
14 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of
BTSs
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
Figure 14-1 Connections of the BTS3012 combined cabinets

l Cabinet groups
Multiple groups of compatible combined cabinets are connected together to serve as
one BTS. In this case, the service capacity of each site is increased. The first cabinet of
each cabinet group is the main cabinet.
A cabinet group can be one main cabinet or two combined cabinets. The cabinet group
that provides synchronization clock signals is called main cabinet group. Other cabinet
groups are called extension cabinet groups. The main cabinet of each cabinet group
can be configured with one or two DTMUs.
Figure 14-2 shows the connections of the BTS3012 cabinets groups.
Figure 14-2 Connections of BTS3012 cabinet groups

l The BTS3012 supports a maximum of two combined cabinets and three cabinet groups.
Two combined cabinets of the BTS3012 support 24 carriers, and three cabinet groups
support 72 TRXs.
l Combined cabinets and cabinet groups are distinguished in cabinet numbers. In cabinet
group mode, three consecutive combined cabinets form one cabinet group. The main
cabinet group is comprised of cabinets 0 to 2, extension cabinet group 1 is comprised of
cabinets 3 to 5, and extension cabinet group 2 is comprised of cabinets 6 to 8. The BTS3012
supports a maximum of two combined cabinets and three cabinet groups. The
corresponding cabinet numbers are as follows:
Main cabinet group: 0 and 1
Extension cabinet group 1: 3 and 4
Extension cabinet group 2: 6 and 7
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide
14 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of
BTSs
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
Procedure
l Activation procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add a BTS.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCABINET to add a cabinet.
NOTE
In combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode, the principles for adding Cabinet No. are as
follows:
l If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, Cabinet No. is 0 and 1.
l If the BTS3012 is in cabinet-group mode, Cabinet No. is 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, and 7.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTRXBRD to add TRX boards.
NOTE
If the BTS3012 does not support the separated mode, the QTRU cannot be configured.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add GSM cells.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLFREQ to add cell frequencies.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLOSPMAP to add cell signaling
point relation.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CELLBIND2BTS to bind cells to the BTS.
8. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set the basic
GPRS attributes of 2G cells.
9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GTRX to add TRXs for a cell.
10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD to bind logical
TRXs to the channels on TRX boards
11. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV to set TRX device
attributes.
12. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIDLETS to configure idle
timeslots.
NOTE
During the processing of PS services, perform step 8, step 11, and step 12.
13. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSANTFEEDERBRD to add the antenna
board.
14. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSANTFEEDERCONNECT to
configure the connection relation of antennas of the BTS.
15. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSANTFEEDERBRD to modify the
frequency band attributes of BTS antennas.
16. Repeat Step 2 through Step 15 to add and configure the extension cabinet and
information about the cabinet according to the principles for adding cabinet
numbers in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode.
NOTE
If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, addition of cells for the extension cabinet is not
required. Therefore, you do not need to repeat Step 4 through Step 8.
17. Add the BTS connection according to the type of BTS connection.
If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, go to Step 18.
If the BTS3012 is in cabinet-group mode, go to Step 19.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide
14 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of
BTSs
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
18. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connection links
from the main cabinet to the BSC, and then set Dest Node Type to BSC. In addition,
set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No..
19. Add the connection links from the main cabinet group to the BSC, and add the
connection links from the extension cabinet groups to the main cabinet group or the
BSC.
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connection
links from the main cabinet group to the BSC, and then set Dest Node Type to
BSC. In addition, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No..
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connection
links from the extension cabinet groups to the main cabinet group or the BSC
If the extension cabinet groups connect to the main cabinet group, set Dest
Node Type to BTS. In addition, set the following parameters related to the
BTSs in extension cabinet groups: Dest Parent Index Type, Dest Parent BTS
Index, and Dest Parent BTS Port No..
If the extension cabinet groups connect to the BSC, set Dest Node Type to
BSC. In addition, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No..
20. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate a BTS.
l Verification procedure
1. Click Device Maintenance on the LMT. The Device Maintenance tab page is
displayed.
2. Click the added BTSs in Activation Procedures in Device Navigation Tree. The
corresponding device panels are displayed on BTS Device Panel.
3. Select the main and extension cabinets in the Rack No. drop-down list. Then, check
the board status on BTS Device Panel.
If the board status is Normal, the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet and cabinet-
group mode.
If the board status is Faulty, clear the alarm according to handling suggestions
provided in the BSC6900 Alarm Reference.
l Deactivation procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate a BTS.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTS to delete a BTS.
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
//Add a BTS
ADD BTS: BTSID=9, BTSNAME="BTS3012_TDM", BTSTYPE=BTS3012, BTSDESC="3012",
SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM;
//Add a cabinet
ADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRANMODE=NOT_SUPPORT,
TYPE=BTS3012;
//Add TRX boards
ADD BTSTRXBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, BT=TRU, SRN=1, SN=0;
//Add GSM cells
ADD GCELL: CELLID=0, CELLNAME="cell0", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="460", MNC="10",
LAC=10, CI=11, IUOTP=Normal_cell;
//Add cell frequencies
ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQ1=1, FREQ2=2;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide
14 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of
BTSs
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
//Add cell signaling point relation
ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OPC=153;
//Bind cells to the BTS
ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSID=9;
//Set the basic GPRS attributes of 2G cells
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=NO;
//Add TRXs for a cell
ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TRXID=0, FREQ=1,ISMAINBCCH=YES;
//Bind logical TRXs to the channels on TRX boards
ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=0, TRXTP=TRU, TRXPN=0, SRN=1, SN=0;
//Set TRX device attributes
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=8;
//Add the extension cabinet of the main cabinet group
ADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=1, SRANMODE=NOT_SUPPORT,
TYPE=BTS3012;
//Add the main cabinet of the extension cabinet group
ADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=3, SRANMODE=NOT_SUPPORT,
TYPE=BTS3012;
//Configure idle timeslots
SET BTSIDLETS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CGN=1, TSCOUNT=20;
//Add the antenna board
ADD BTSANTFEEDERBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, SRN=3, SN=4, BT=DDPM_DDPU,
DTRX=1, DTRXSRN=1, DTRXSN=0, DTRXPN=0, AORB=A;
//Configure the connection relation of antennas of the BTS
SET BTSANTFEEDERCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, SRN=3, SN=4, BT=DDPM_DDPU,
DTRX=1, DTRXSRN=1, DTRXSN=0, DTRXPN=1,AORB=B;
//Add the connection links from the main cabinet group to the BSC
ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, INPN=0, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=25,
PN=1;
//Add the connection links from the extension cabinet groups to the main
cabinet group
ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, INPN=8, DESTNODE=BTS,
UPBTSIDTYPE=BYID, UPBTSID=9, FPN=1;
//activate a BTS
ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, ACTTYPE=ACTALL;
//Deactivation procedure
//Deactivate a BTS
DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
//Delete a BTS
RMV BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide
14 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of
BTSs
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
15 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over
IP
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-118621
Connection Inter BSC over IP.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
If the Abis or A interface uses IP transmission, switches can be used to interconnect the
IP interface boards of two BSCs. If the Abis or A interface does not use IP transmission,
a pair of IP interface boards need to be configured for each BSC.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
IP-based inter-BSC interconnection enables operators to use IP networks to interconnect the
BSCs so that the BSCs can communicate with each other directly. Inter-BSC interconnection is
used for exchanging information between BSCs in scenarios such as an inter-BSC soft-
synchronized network or interference-based channel allocation (IBCA). Only signaling can be
exchanged over inter-BSC interconnection.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD at the current BSC to add
a pair of IP interface boards.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP at the current BSC to add a device
IP address.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHIP at the current BSC to add a port IP
address.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 15 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT at the current BSC to add an IP route.
In this step, set Destination IP address to the port IP address of the peer board (that
is, the port IP address of the IP interface board at the peer BSC).
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC at the current BSC to add an OSP.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC at the current BSC to add a DSP.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE at the current BSC to add an M3UA
local entity.
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE at the current BSC to add an M3UA
destination entity.
9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS at the current BSC to add an M3UA
link set.
10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT at the current BSC to add an M3UA
route.
11. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK at the current BSC to add an
SCTP link.
12. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK at the current BSC to add an M3UA
link. After this command is executed, the configuration of links at the current BSC is
complete.
13. Repeat Step 1 through Step 12 to configure the links at the peer BSC.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC, and verify that the value of SCCP
DSP state is Accessible.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP
//(Optional) Adding a pair of IP interface boards
ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=XPU, BRDTYPE=XPUa, LGCAPPTYPE=RGCP, SN=0;
ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=XPU, BRDTYPE=XPUa, LGCAPPTYPE=RGCP, SN=1;
//Adding a device IP address for the current BSC
ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=24, DEVTYPE=LOGIC_IP, IPADDR="10.10.10.216";
//Adding a port IP address for the current BSC
ADD ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=24, PN=1, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="2.2.2.2",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
//Adding an IP route for the current BSC
ADD IPRT: SRN=0, SN=24, DSTIP="10.10.10.217", DSTMASK="255.255.255.255",
NEXTHOP="2.2.2.1", PRIORITY=HIGH, REMARK="IPRT";
//Adding an OSP for the current BSC
ADD OPC: NAME="BSC216", SPX=0, NI=NATB, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF,
SPC=H'A1;
//Adding a DSP for the current BSC
ADD N7DPC: NAME="BSC217", DPX=0, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=H'B1, DPCT=IUR_G,
BEARTYPE=M3UA;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 15 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
//Adding an M3UA local entity
ADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, RTCONTEXT=0, NAME="BSC216";
//Adding an M3UA destination entity
ADD M3DE: DENO=98, LENO=0, DPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, RTCONTEXT=0,
NAME="BSC217";
//Adding an M3UA link set
ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DENO=98, NAME="T0217";
//Adding an M3UA route
ADD M3RT: DENO=98, SIGLKSX=1, PRIORITY=0, NAME="TO217";
//Adding an SCTP link
ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=0, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA, DSCP=48,
LOCPN=60000, LOCIP1="10.10.10.216", PEERIP1="10.10.10.217", PEERPN=2905,
LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;
//Adding an M3UA link
ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=0, PRIORITY=0,
NAME="TO217";
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 15 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
16 Configuring Link aggregation
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210103
Link aggregation.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature is only supported on BSC6900.
This feature applies only to 3900 series base stations excluding the BTS3902E.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
l Requirements for Transmission Networking
In the earlier versions than RAN13.0, trunk group configuration can't support IP PM.
This feature supports IP networking, layer 2 (L2) networking, and layer 3 (L3)
networking.
l Requirements for Other NEs and Transmission Devices from Other Vendors
This feature requires the support from peer transmission devices, such as switches and
base stations.
Context
This feature enables multiple FE or GE ports to be bound to form a logical port. This provides
high bandwidth for end-to-end transmission, achieves load sharing across these FE or GE ports,
and improves the transmission reliability.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
Activate Link Aggregation on the BSC6900.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP address to a
board.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRK to add an Ethernet link
aggregation group. In this step, set the Trunk group work mode to
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 16 Configuring Link aggregation
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
LOAD_SHARING(Load sharing), set the Aggregation Mode to
STATIC_LACP when the peer end supports the LACP protocol or set the
Aggregation Mode to MANUAL_AGGREGATION when the peer end does not
support the LACP protocol, and set the Flow control switch to ON(ON).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRKLNK to add a specified
physical port to an Ethernet link aggregation group.
NOTE
If the Ethernet link aggregation group is configured with multiple physical ports, repeat this step
until all the required physical ports are configured.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRKIP to add an IP address to an
Ethernet link aggregation group. When multiple virtual local area network
(VLAN) gateways are planned, run this command for each IP address you want to
add.
Activate Link Aggregation on the NodeB.
1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP address to an
Ethernet port. In this step, set Port Type to ETHTRK(Ethernet Trunk).
2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ETHTRK to add an Ethernet link
aggregation group.
3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ETHTRKLNK to add a member port to
an Ethernet link aggregation group. When multiple member ports need to be added,
run this command for each port you want to add.
l Verification Procedure
Verify the effect of Link Aggregation on the BSC6900.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHTRK to query whether an Ethernet
link aggregation group is available.
NOTE
Expected result: If the value of Status of ETHTRK is UP in the command output, the Ethernet
link aggregation group is available.
2. Set the IP address of the peer NE to be on the same network segment as the IP
address for the Ethernet link aggregation group. For example, set the IP address
of the peer NE to 16.16.16.2.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP to check the IP communication
between the local and peer ends.
NOTE
Expected result: If this command is executed and the command output indicates that no packet
loss occurs, the Ethernet link aggregation group has been successfully configured.
Verify the effect of Link Aggregation on the NodeB.
1. Run the NodeB MML commandDSP ETHTRK to query whether an Ethernet link
aggregation group is available.
2. Run the NodeB MML commandDSP ETHTRKLNK to query whether a member
port of an Ethernet link aggregation group is available.
l Deactivation Procedure
Deactivate Link Aggregation on the BSC6900.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 16 Configuring Link aggregation
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
1. Run the BSC6900 MML commandRMV ETHTRKIP to remove an IP address
from an Ethernet link aggregation group. If the removal fails, perform operations
as prompted.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML commandRMV ETHTRK to remove an Ethernet link
aggregation group.
Deactivate Link Aggregation on the NodeB.
1. Run the NodeB MML commandRMV DEVIP to remove a device IP address.
2. Run the NodeB MML commandRMV ETHTRK to remove an Ethernet link
aggregation group.
----End
Example
//Activating Link Aggregation on the BSC6900
ADD DEVIP: SRN=2, SN=26, DEVTYPE=LOGIC_IP, IPADDR="10.171.35.123";
ADD ETHTRK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY,
LACPMODE=MANUAL_AGGREGATION, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON;
ADD ETHTRKLNK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, TRKLNKSN=26, TRKLNKPN=2,
WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY, PORTPRI=101;
ADD ETHTRKLNK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, TRKLNKSN=27, TRKLNKPN=2,
WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY, PORTPRI=102;
ADD ETHTRKIP: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="126.126.126.1",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/Activating Link Aggregation on the NodeB
//Adding a device IP address to an Ethernet port
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETHTRK, PN=0,
IP="192.168.2.24", MASK="255.255.255.0";
//Adding an Ethernet link aggregation group and adding a member port to
an Ethernet link aggregation group
ADD ETHTRK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0;
ADD ETHTRKLNK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0, PN=0,
PRI=255, FLAG=YES;
//Deactivating Link Aggregation on the BSC6900
//Removing active/standby Ethernet link aggregation groups
RMV ETHTRKIP: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, IPINDEX=0;
RMV ETHTRK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2;
//Deactivating Link Aggregation on the NodeB
//Removing a device IP address from an Ethernet port
RMV DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETHTRK, PN=0,
IP="192.168.2.24";
//Removing an Ethernet link aggregation group
RMV ETHTRK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 16 Configuring Link aggregation
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
17 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of
TRX Due to PSU Failure
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-117804
Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The following types of BTSs support the feature: the DBS3900, BTS3900, and
BTS3900A
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
Context
If a BTS uses an AC power input and the power switch unit (PSU) is faulty, the power amplifiers
of some TRXs are shut down to reduce the power demand of the BTS to ensure the normal
operation of the BTS.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSPSUFP to set the parameters related to
TRX shutdown of the PSU board. In this step.
Set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES).
Set Tran. Cabinet Configured according to actual requirements.
Set Service Priority Policy to GSM_PRIOR.
GSM Multi Carrier BTS Standard does not need to be set.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSPSUFP to query the parameters related
to TRX shutdown when the PSUs are faulty in the corresponding site.
Expected result:
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide
17 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU
Failure
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
The value of Board Parameter Configuration Enabled queried in step 2 is
YES.
The value of Tran. Cabinet Configured queried in step 2 is the same as that set
in step 1.
The value of Service Priority Policy queried in step 2 is GSM_PRIOR.
2. Remove some PSUs of the site. Ensure that the remaining PSUs and the DCDU cannot
supply power to all the TRXs at the site but can supply power to other equipment.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status of
all TRXs at the entire site. In this step, set Object Type to SITE.
Expected result: the status of some TRXs is Enabled and that of some others is
Disabled. The BTS works properly and there is no call drops due to insufficient power
supply.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSPSUFP. In this step, set Board
Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO(NO).
Expected result: Some TRXs do not automatically shut themselves down when PSU
faults occur.
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
SET BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CFGFLAG=YES, ISTRANCABCON=CONFIG,
SRVPRIPOLICY=GSM_PRIOR;
//Verification procedure
LST BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=SITE, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
//Deactivation procedure
SET BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CFGFLAG=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide
17 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU
Failure
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
18 Configuring Call-Based Flow Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-511003
Call-Based Flow Control.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
Context
In cases of emergencies or disasters, a large number of fixed telephones or cell phones from
external networks request to reach the emergency or disaster center. This causes considerable
increase in the mobile terminated services and also causes heavy traffic in the system. This
feature identifies mobile originated call (MOCs) and mobile terminated calls (MTCs) by
different flags and protects either MOCs or MTCs from the effects of flow control. It also allows
telecom operators to decide whether to discard signaling of MOCs or MTCs using flow control,
thereby keeping the system load within a normal level.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA. In this step, set MTC Access
CPU Rate to be greater than SHARE IN CPU RATE but less than MOC Access
CPU Rate.
NOTE
When the value of MOC Access CPU Rate is greater than that of MTC Access CPU Rate,
the call-based flow control is triggered, and flow control is preferentially implemented on
MTCs.
l Verification Procedure
1. Retrieve the counter L3189A: Discarded Channel Requests (MOC) and the counter
L3189B: Discarded Channel Requests (MTC) on the M2000.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 18 Configuring Call-Based Flow Control
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
Expected result: The value of the counter L3189A: Discarded Channel Requests
(MOC) is smaller than that of the counter L3189B: Discarded Channel Requests
(MTC).
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA. In this step, set MOC Access
CPU Rate to a value that is smaller than or equal to the value of MTC Access CPU
Rate.
----End
Example
//Activating Call-Based Flow Control
SET BSCFCPARA: SHAREINCPURATE=50, MOCACCESSCPURATE=51,
MTCACCESSCPURATE=52;
//Deactivating Call-Based Flow Control
SET BSCFCPARA: MOCACCESSCPURATE=52, MTCACCESSCPURATE=51;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 18 Configuring Call-Based Flow Control
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
19 Configuring Pre-Processing of
Measurement Report
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110802
Pre-Processing of Measurement Report.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The BTS must support this function.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
Context
The function of pre-processing of measurement report enables the BTS to interpolate and filter
measurement reports (MRs) and then report the results of the processed MRs to the BSC. In this
manner, the BSC does not need to process the MRs, reducing the load of the BSC. The CPU
load of the board for processing the signaling of the CS services is reduced, and the signaling
on the Abis interface is decreased, therefore minimizing the risks of Abis transmission
congestion.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL command to set
MR.Preprocessing to BTS_Preprocessing and set Transfer Original MR,
Transfer BS/MS Power Class, and Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR as required.
l Verification Procedure
1. Start the tracing of RSL messages on the Abis interface. For details, see Tracing CS
Domain RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC6900 LMT User Guide.
2. Use the MS to call a fixed-line phone in the test cell.
3. Verify that the Preprocessed Measurement Result message is present.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 19 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL command to set
MR.Preprocessing to BSC_Preprocessing.
----End
Example
//Activating Pre-Processing of Measurement Report
SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
BTSMESRPTPREPROC=BTS_Preprocessing, PRIMMESPPT=NO, BSMSPWRLEV=YES,
MRPREPROCFREQ=Once_ps;
//Deactivating Pre-Processing of Measurement Report
SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
BTSMESRPTPREPROC=BSC_Preprocessing;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 19 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
20 Configuring System Information
Sending
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111101
System Information Sending.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
Context
System information involves main radio network parameters on the Um interface, including
network identity parameters, cell selection parameters, system control parameters, and network
function parameters. Based on the received system information, an MS can properly select and
access a radio network. Then, the MS can fully use various services provided by the network
and well cooperate with the network.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support
Sent 2QUATER to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL to configure neighboring 3G
cells based on the network plan.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to enable outgoing inter-
RAT handovers and incoming inter-RAT handovers. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out
BSC Handover Enable and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes).
l Verification Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 20 Configuring System Information Sending
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
1. Initiate Abis interface message tracing by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages
on the Abis Interface. In the Trace Type area, click RSL to trace RSL messages on
the Abis interface.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG to send system
information. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index) and the cell index to an
appropriate value.
3. Check the CS domain messages traced on the Abis interface.
Expected result: The value of si2-quarter-ind in the System Information Type 3
message is 1. This indicates that the feature has been activated.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support
Sent 2QUATER to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating System Information Sending
SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES;
ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=2047, NBR3GNCELLID=5100;
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES,
INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;
//Deactivating System Information Sending
SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 20 Configuring System Information Sending
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
21 Configuring Daylight Saving Time
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature Daylight Saving
Time (DST).
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
Context
With the DST change rules, you can select the date configuration, week configuration, or hybrid
configuration. Date configuration indicates the DST starts from or ends on a certain date in a
certain month. Week configuration indicates that the DST starts from or ends on a certain day
of a certain week in a certain month. Hybrid configuration indicates that the DST starts from or
ends on a certain day after a certain date in a certain month.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the SET TZ command to configure DST. In this step, set DaylightSave to YES
(Yes), set StartType, StartTime, EndType, EndTime, and AdjustMethod as
required.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the LST TZ command to check whether DaylightSave is set to YES.
2. As it was daylight saving time, the time with sign DST in MML, Alarms, and log
reports shows the feature has been active, such as 2011-07-01 15:50:25 DST.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the SET TZ command. In this step, set DaylightSave to NO(No).
----End
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 21 Configuring Daylight Saving Time
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
Example
//Activating Daylight Saving Time
SET TZ: ZONET=GMT-0800, DST=YES, SM=WEEK, SMONTH=MAR, SWSEQ=LAST,
SWEEK=SUN, ST=02&00&00, EM=WEEK, EMONTH=OCT, EWSEQ=LAST, EWEEK=SUN,
ET=03&00&00, TO=60;
//Deactivating Daylight Saving Time
SET TZ: ZONET=GMT-0800, DST=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 21 Configuring Daylight Saving Time
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
22 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic
Adjustment
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113001
SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
l Others
This feature does not need to be configured when PCU is inner.
This feature needs to be configured when PCU is outer.
Context
When the number of users in a cell increases substantially, some users may not be able to access
the network because they cannot obtain SDCCHs. In this case, some TCHs need to be converted
to SDCCHs. When TCHs are not sufficient enough to meet requirements of channel conversion,
dynamic PDCHs are converted to SDCCHs to ensure that all the users can access the network.
When the traffic load decreases, the TCHs and dynamic PDCHs used as SDCCHs are converted
back to TCHs to increase system capacity.
When SDCCHs are insufficient, channels are converted to SDCCHs in the following sequence:
TCHs on the BCCH frequency band, TCHs not on the BCCH frequency band, and dynamic
PDCHs.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 22 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set both
SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed and Dynamic PDCH Conversion to
SDCCH Allowed to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set
Idle SDCCH Threshold N1, Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum, TCH Minimum
Recovery Time, and Num of TSs Convertible to SDCCHs per TRX to appropriate
values.
NOTE
When TCHs on the BCCH frequency band are insufficient, set Dynamically Adjust Inter-
Freq Band SDCCH to YES(Yes) as required.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set Maximum
Rate Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell and Reservation Threshold of Dynamic
Channel Conversion to appropriate values.
l Verification Procedure
NOTE
Monitor Channel Status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status.
As all the channels are occlusive except BCCH.
1. The value of Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 is not smaller than the number of configured
SDCCH channel, and make a CS call in the cell.
Expected result: A TCH is converted to an SDCCH.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set Maximum
Rate Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell to 100 and Reservation Threshold of Dynamic
Channel Conversion to 0.
3. Perform PS services in the cell.
Expected result: All TCHFs are converted to PDCHs.
4. Make another CS call in the cell.
Expected result: A dynamic PDCH is converted to an SDCCH.
5. Enable the cell to remain in the idle state for two minutes. The minimum time of
SDCCHs convert back to TCHs is 120 seconds.
Expected result: The two channels used as SDCCHs are converted back to TCHs.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set both
SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed and Dynamic PDCH Conversion to
SDCCH Allowed to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, SDDYN=YES, PDCH2SDEN=YES;
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, IDLESDTHRES=8, CELLMAXSD=100,
MINRESTIMETCH=60;
SET GCELLPSCHM: MAXPDCHRATE=30, DYNCHTRANRESLEV=2;
//Deactivating SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, SDDYN=NO, PDCH2SDEN=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 22 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
23 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-112401
Cell Frequency Scan.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
Context
CAUTION
Cell frequency scan has the following impacts on other features:
l Cell frequency scan occupies an idle TCH.
l Cell frequency scan cannot be performed when an RF hopping loopback test is performed.
l The cell frequency scan cannot be performed when an idle frame test is performed.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLFREQSCAN command to
configure cell frequency scan.
NOTE
No restriction is imposed on the number of commands in the batch processing file when the
commands are processed in batches. In addition, 50 commands are executed per 30 seconds in
sequence. Therefore, Duration minute cannot be set to a very small value. Otherwise, the execution
of the commands cannot be completed in the specified duration.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 23 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLFREQSCAN command to query
the information of cell frequency scan.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Configure cell frequency scan
SET GCELLFREQSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STRTM=17&06&07, TIME=5,
FREQBAND=E-GSM900, FREQLST_E900=0&975&1023;
//Query the frequency scan information of the cell with index of 0
LST GCELLFREQSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 23 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
24 Configuring Signaling Transport Point
(STP)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111806
Signaling Transport Point (STP).
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The XPUa board is configured.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
l Others
The OPC is configured.
The physical layer and the data link layer on the A interface are configured.
The CN supports this feature.
Context
According to the requirements of the operator, the BSC can be connected to the MSC directly
or through STP.
To use an MGW as an STP, ensure that the MGW supports MTP3/M3UA signaling transfer.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
TDM transmission
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC to add an Originating Signaling
Point (OSP). In this step, set OSP code bits to BIT14(BIT14).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the MGW as the
destination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to the
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 24 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
signaling point code of the MGW, DSP type to STP, DSP bear type to M3UA,
and Adjacent flag to YES(DIRECT_CONNECT).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 link set. In
this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 2.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to add an MTP3 link to the
link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set
index set in 3.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route. In this
step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 2 and Signalling link set index to the
Signalling link set index set in 3.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the MSC as the
destination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to the
signaling point code of the MSC, DSP type to A, DSP bear type to MTP3, and
Adjacent flag to NO(NO_DIRECT_CONNECT).
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route. In this
step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 6 and Signalling link set index to the
Signalling link set index set in 3.
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE to add a CN node. In this
step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 6.
IP transmission
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE to add an M3UA local entity.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the MGW as the
destination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to the
signaling point code of the MGW, DSP type to STP, DSP bear type to M3UA,
and Adjacent flag to YES(DIRECT_CONNECT).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE to add an M3UA destination
entity. In this step, set Local entity No. to the M3UA Local entity No. set in 1,
DSP index to the DSP index set in 3.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS to add an M3UA signaling link
set. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in
4.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK to add an M3UA link. In this
step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 5, and set
Subrack No., Slot No., and SCTP link No. to the Subrack No., Slot No., and
SCTP link No. set in 2.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT to add an M3UA route. In this
step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 4 and Signalling link set index to the
Signalling link set index set in 5.
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the MSC as the
destination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to the
signaling point code of the MSC, DSP type to A, DSP bear type to M3UA, and
Adjacent flag to NO(NO_DIRECT_CONNECT).
9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE to add an M3UA destination
entity. In this step, set Local entity No. to the M3UA Local entity No. set in 1,
DSP index to the DSP index set in 8.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 24 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT to add an M3UA route. In this
step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 9 and Signalling link set index to the
Signalling link set index set in 5.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to check that SCCP DSP state is
set to Accessible.
l Deactivation Procedure
TDM transmission
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCNNODE to remove the CN node.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3RT to remove the MTP3 route.
In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 6 and Signalling link set
index to the Signalling link set index set in 3.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove the DPC of the MSC.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3RT to remove the MTP3 route.
In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 2 and Signalling link set
index to the Signalling link set index set in 3.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LNK to remove the MTP3 link
from the link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link
set index set in 3.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LKS to remove the MTP3 link
set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set
in 3.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove the DPC of the
MGW.
IP transmission
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3RT to remove the M3UA route. In
this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 9 and Signalling link set index
to the Signalling link set index set in 5.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3DE to remove the M3UA destination
entity. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in
9.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove the DPC of the MSC.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3RT to remove the M3UA route. In
this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 4 and Signalling link set index
to the Signalling link set index set in 5.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3LNK to remove the M3UA link from
the link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set
index set in 5.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3LKS to remove the M3UA signaling
link set. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set
in 4.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3DE to remove the M3UA destination
entity. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in
4.
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove the DPC of the
MGW.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 24 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
9. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SCTPLNK to remove the SCTP link.
10. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3LE to remove the M3UA local entity.
----End
Example
//Activating Signaling Transport Point (STP)
//TDM transmission
ADD OPC: NAME="test", SPX=1, NI=NAT, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=260;
ADD N7DPC: NAME="MGW", DPX=1, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=270, DPCT=STP,
BEARTYPE=MTP3, NEIGHBOR=YES;
ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DPX=1, NAME="MGWMTP3LKS";
ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGSLC=1, SRN=1, SN=0, TCMODE=SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL,
ATERIDX=0, ATERMASK=TS16-0, ASRN=3, ASN=18, MTP2LNKN=1, APN=0,
ATSMASK=TS16-0, LKTATE=64K, NAME="MTP3LNKS1_1";
ADD MTP3RT: DPX=1, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MGWRT";
ADD N7DPC: NAME="MSC", DPX=2, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=280, DPCT=A,
BEARTYPE=MTP3, NEIGHBOR=NO;
ADD MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MSCRT";
ADD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=1, DPX=2, DPCGIDX=1, OPNAME="share", CNID=2,
DFDPC=YES, ATransMode=TDM;
//IP transmission
ADD M3LE: LENO=1, SPX=1, ENTITYT= M3UA_IPSP, NAME="LOCALBSC";
ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=1, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=100, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA,
LOCIP1="172.17.15.253", PEERIP1="172.17.12.253", PEERPN=2905,
LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;
ADD N7DPC: NAME="MGW", DPX=1, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=270, DPCT=STP,
BEARTYPE=M3UA, NEIGHBOR=YES;
ADD M3DE: DENO=1, LENO=1, DPX=1, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="MGW";
ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DENO=1, WKMODE=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="MGWLKS";
ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGLNKID=1, SRN=1, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=100,
NAME="MGWLNK";
ADD M3RT: DENO=1, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MGWM3RT";
ADD N7DPC: NAME="MSC", DPX=2, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=280, DPCT=A,
BEARTYPE=M3UA, NEIGHBOR=NO;
ADD M3DE: DENO=2, LENO=1, DPX=2, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="MSCM3DE";
ADD M3RT: DENO=2, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MSCM3RT";
//Verifying Signaling Transport Point (STP)
DSP N7DPC:;
//Deactivating Signaling Transport Point (STP)
//TDM transmission
RMV GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=1;
RMV MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=1;
RMV N7DPC: DPX=2;
RMV MTP3RT: DPX=1, SIGLKSX=1;
RMV MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGSLC=1;
RMV MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=1;
RMV N7DPC: DPX=1;
//IP transmission
RMV M3RT: DENO=2, SIGLKSX=1;
RMV M3DE: DENO=2;
RMV N7DPC: DPX=2;
RMV M3RT: DENO=1, SIGLKSX=1;
RMV M3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGLNKID=1;
RMV M3LKS: SIGLKSX=1;
RMV M3DE: DENO=1;
RMV N7DPC: DPX=1;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 24 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
RMV SCTPLNK: SRN=1, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=100;
RMV M3LE: LENO=1;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 24 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
25 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point
Code
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111802
14-Digit Signaling Point Code.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
l Others
The CN supports this feature.
Context
Huawei GBSS can be connected to the MSC through the No.7 signaling system. The No.7
signaling system adopts the coding scheme in the 14-bit format. The signaling point code consists
of three sub-fields: sub-field for identifying the world geographical zone where the network is
located; sub-field for identifying the geographical area or network within a specific world zone;
sub-field for identifying the signaling point within a specific geographical area or network.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. At a newly deployed site, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC to add an
Originating Signaling Point (OSP). In this step, set OSP code bits to BIT14
(BIT14).
2. If the OSPs in non-14-bit format have been configured, run the BSC6900 MML
command RMV OPC to remove all the OSPs, and then proceed with Step 1.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 25 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
NOTE
A Signaling Point Code (SPC) must be unique in the signaling network and cannot be
0.BSC6900 does not support configuration of OSPs with different number of bits.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST OPC to check that OSPs are in the 14-bit
format.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV OPC to remove all configured OSPs.
----End
Example
//Activating 14-Digit Signaling Point Code
ADD OPC: NAME="test", SPX=1, NI=NAT, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=H'2cc7;
//Verifying 14-Digit Signaling Point Code
LST OPC:;
//Deactivating 14-Digit Signaling Point Code
RMV OPC: SPX=1;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 25 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
26 Configuring Discontinuous Reception
(DRX)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-114802
Discontinuous Reception (DRX).
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not depend on the hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
l Other Prerequisites
The BCCH, SDCCH, and TCHs have been configured in the test cell.
Context
DRX increases the call duration and standby time of an MS.
Each MS is mapped to a paging group, and each paging group is mapped to a paging sub-channel
in the serving cell. In idle mode, the MS detects the paging messages broadcast by the system
only on the mapped paging sub-channel. The MS blocks other paging sub-channels by powering
off certain hardware. This also saves power.
The configuration of a BTS3012 in TDM mode is taken as an example.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLIDLEBASIC. In this step, set
CCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH to 2 and Multi-Frames in a Cycle on the
Paging CH to 2_M_PERIOD(2 Multiframe Period).
l Verification Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 26 Configuring Discontinuous Reception (DRX)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG to forcibly send the
system message to the test cell.
2. Enable an Abis Interface CS Trace task, then select RSL in the test cell.
3. Check the messages with the type of BCCH Information over the Abis interface for
the one whose system-info-type is system-information-3. In the IE control-
channel-description of this message, if bs-ag-blks-res (CCCH Blocks Reserved
for AGCH) is 2 and bs-pa-mfrms (Multi-Frames in a Cycle on the Paging CH) is
0, the system message is correct.
4. Use a MS to make a call to another MS (assume that the IMSI of the called MS is
"M"), and ensure that the call is set up successfully.
5. Check the CS message of the Page Command type over the Abis interface. If the IE
paging-group in this message is M%1000%14%14, the paging group contained in
the paging message is consistent with the settings in the system message. In this case,
the MS can implement DRX by monitoring the paging sub-channel.
NOTE
"%" in M%1000%14%14 indicates the MOD operation, and the group number is in decimal
format.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
SET GCELLIDLEBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, BSAGBLKSRES=2,
BSPAMFRAMS=2_M_PERIOD;
//Verification procedure
SND GCELLSYSMSG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 26 Configuring Discontinuous Reception (DRX)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
27 Configuring BTS Power Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111601
BTS Power Management.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
Context
BTS power management enables the BTS to allocate load dynamically based on the actual power
situation, thereby prolonging the working time of the BTS.
Power management is applicable to the following scenarios:
l No mains supply
Soft shutdown: The BTS automatically blocks all TCH TRXs except the BCCH TRX.
Hard shutdown: When the battery capacity drops to a predefined threshold value, the
BTS automatically shuts down all TRXs.
l Unfavorable operating environment
When the temperature inside a BTS cabinet exceeds a predefined threshold value, the
BTS shuts down PAs for some TRXs.
When critical faults occur on a TRX, for example, the VSWR value far exceeds the
limit, the BTS shuts down the TRX.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP. In this step, set Board
Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES) and power management
parameters to appropriate values.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 27 Configuring BTS Power Management
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAPMUBP to query the value of Board
Parameter Configuration Enabled.
Expected result: Board Parameter Configuration Enabled is set to YES(YES), and
power management parameters are set based on configurations.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP. In this step, set Board
Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO(NO).
----End
Example
//Activating BTS Power Management
SET BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, CN=0, SRN=7, SN=0, CFGFLAG=YES,
PTYPE=APM30, HTSDF=ENABLE;
//Verifying BTS Power Management
LST BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, CN=0, SRN=7, SN=0;
//Deactivating BTS Power Management
SET BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, CN=0, SRN=7, SN=0, CFGFLAG=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 27 Configuring BTS Power Management
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
28 Configuring Enhanced Power Control
Algorithm
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110703
Enhanced Power Control Algorithm.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not depend on the hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
l Other Prerequisites
The BSC to which the test cell belongs is connected to the M2000, and cell-level
counters can be retrieved on the M2000.
Context
Enhanced power control algorithm refers to HUAWEI II power control algorithm.
Power control is a process in which the BSS controls MS or BTS transmit power. Without
affecting the speech quality, power control reduces the interference in the entire network and
decreases power consumption. Power control mainly applies to the network with tight frequency
reuse, high traffic volume, or strong interference. In the GSM network, power control can be
separately performed on the uplink and downlink. It can also be performed on each MS.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set
Power Control Switch to PWR2(Power control II).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR2. In this step, set MR.
Compensation Allowed to YES(Yes), and set AMR MR. Compensation Allowed
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 28 Configuring Enhanced Power Control Algorithm
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
to YES(Yes). In addition, adjust Huawei II power control parameters or set them to
their default values.
3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCCH to improve the
effect of handover and power control when the BCCH participates in baseband
frequency hopping. In this step, set PWRC to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML
command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set Power Control and Handover
CMP CON Sw to YES(Yes).
l Verification Procedure
1. Configure two cells, cell 0 and cell 1, on the BSC6900 and set the frequencies of the
BCCH TRXs of the two cells as non co-channel or adjacent-channel frequencies while
the frequencies of the non-BCCH TRXs as co-channel or adjacent-channel
frequencies.
2. Retrieve the following counters related to cell 0 on the M2000.
Table 28-1 Counters for verifying HUAWEI II power control
Measurement Unit Counter Name
Measurement of Power
Control Messages in MR
per Cell
Average MS Power Level of Non-AMR Call
Average BTS Power Level of Non-AMR Call
Ratio of Maximum Downlink Power Duration (%)
Ratio of Maximum Uplink Power Duration (%)
Mean Strength of Downlink Signals
Mean Strength of Uplink Signals
Mean Quality of Downlink Signals
Mean Quality of Uplink Signals
Interference Band
Measurement per TRX
Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 1
Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 2
Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 3
Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 4
Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 5
Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 1
Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 2
Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 3
Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 4
Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 5
Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 1
Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 2
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 28 Configuring Enhanced Power Control Algorithm
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
Measurement Unit Counter Name
Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 3
Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 4
Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 5
Receive Quality
Measurement per TRX
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 0)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 1)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 2)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 3)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 4)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 5)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 6)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 7)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 0)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 1)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 2)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 3)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 4)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 5)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 6)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 7)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 0)
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 28 Configuring Enhanced Power Control Algorithm
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
Measurement Unit Counter Name
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 1)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 2)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 3)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 4)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 5)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 6)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 7)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 0)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 1)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 2)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 3)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 4)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 5)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 6)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 7)

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set UL
PC Allowed and DL PC Allowed of cell 0 and cell 1 to NO(No).
4. Initiate a large number of calls in cell 0 and cell 1.
5. Check the counters for one hour and save them.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set UL
PC Allowed and DL PC Allowed of cell 0 and cell 1 to YES(Yes).
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set
Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1 to PWR2(Power control II).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 28 Configuring Enhanced Power Control Algorithm
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR2. In this step, set MR.
Compensation Allowed to YES(Yes), and set AMR MR. Compensation Allowed
to YES(Yes) for cell 0 and cell 1.
9. Initiate a large number of calls in cell 0 and cell 1.
10. Check the counters for one hour and save them.
11. Compare the measured counter results obtained from Step 10 and Step 5.
Expected result: For the counters related to power level, the power level obtained in
Step 10 is smaller than that obtained in Step 5. For the counters related to interference
band, the value of a counter with lower quality rank obtained in Step 10 is larger than
that obtained in Step 5. For the counters related to receive quality, the value of a
counter with lower quality rank obtained in Step 10 is larger than that obtained in
Step 5.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activating HUAWEI II Power Control Algorithm
SET GCELLPWRBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRCTRLSW=PWR2;
SET GCELLPWR2: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MRCOMPREG=YES, AMRMRCOMPREG=YES;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 28 Configuring Enhanced Power Control Algorithm
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
29 Configuring DTMF Downlink Message
Filter
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113525
DTMF Downlink Message Filter.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
l Other Prerequisites
A over TDM transmission is used.
Context
CAUTION
After this feature is configured, the processing capability of DSPs is decreased by about 10%.
This feature shields the downlink DTMF messages on the user plane and control plane of the A
interface. In this case, after the call is set up, the called cell phone will not receive DTMF signals.
By shielding downlink DTMF signals, this feature enhances the GBSS network security.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA with Downlink DTMF
Signaling Processing Allowed set to OPEN(Open).
l Verification Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 29 Configuring DTMF Downlink Message Filter
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
1. Use an MS to make a call to another MS. During the call, press a key on either MS.
Expected result: The peer end cannot hear clear DTMF tones but silence.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA with Downlink DTMF
Signaling Processing Allowed set to CLOSE(Close).
3. Repeat Step 1.
Expected result: The peer end hears clear DTMF tones.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA with Downlink DTMF
Signaling Processing Allowed set to CLOSE(Close).
----End
Example
//Activating DTMF downlink message filter
SET OTHSOFTPARA: DLDTMFPRCSW=OPEN;
//Deactivating DTMF downlink message filter
SET OTHSOFTPARA: DLDTMFPRCSW=CLOSE;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 29 Configuring DTMF Downlink Message Filter
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
30 Configuring High Speed Signaling
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-115201
High Speed Signaling.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-118602 A over IP or
GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.
l Dependency on License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other prerequisites
The MSC supports high-speed signaling.
TDM transmission is applied over the A interface.
The EIUa/OIUa board is configured.
The OPC and DPC are configured.
Context
This feature is characterized by:
l High capacity
The BSC is not limited by the capacity of a single signaling point when narrowband
signaling is used. This feature not only meets the requirements for signaling link bandwidth
of large capacity processing capability but also saves operators' signaling resources and
simplifies network topology.
l Flexible bandwidth configuration
The high-speed signaling link bandwidth is N x 64 kbit/s. Where, N ranges from 1 to 31.
Operators can flexibly configure the high-speed signaling link bandwidth based on the
traffic volume to reduce the transmission cost.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 30 Configuring High Speed Signaling
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
l Short delay
High-speed signaling links carry signaling data using multiple timeslots. This reduces the
transmission delay of signaling data over the A interface especially in off-peak hours,
reducing the call setup duration.
Generally, high-speed signaling links are used for terrestrial transmission. Satellite transmission
does not use high-speed signaling links.
WARNING
Reconfiguring the signaling link over the A interface will disrupt the services of the BSC6900.
Therefore, perform the operation when the traffic is light, for example, in the early morning.
The whole process (including board restart) takes about 10 minutes.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 to add an E1/T1 on the A interface.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 signaling link
set.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK. In this step, set Link Bear
Type to MTP2(MTP2) and Link rate type to 2M(2Mbit/s).
NOTE
In BM/TC separated mode where the TCS is configured remotely, you are advised to set Ater
Mask of the MTP3 signaling links on the main TCS to values rather than TS1.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST MTP3LNK to query the information about
the MTP3 signaling link.
Expected result: The value of Link rate type is 2Mbit/s.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LNK. In this step, set Signalling
link set index and Signalling link code.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3RT. In this step, set DSP index and
Signalling link set index.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LKS. In this step, set Signalling link
set index.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV AE1T1 to remove an E1/T1 on the A
interface.
----End
Example
/*Activation procedure*/
//Configuring an E1/T1 over the A Interface
ADD AE1T1: SRN=0, SN=12, PN=1, OPCIDX=0, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC,
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 30 Configuring High Speed Signaling
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
BSCFLAG=MAINBSC, STCIC=0;
//Configuring an MTP3 signaling link set
ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=0, NAME="123";
//Configuring an MTP3 signaling link
ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2,
TCMODE=SEPERATE_BSC_INTERFACE, ATERIDX=1,
ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS1
1-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1
&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1,
MTP2LNKN=1, LKTATE=2M, NAME="123";
//Adding an MTP3 signaling route
ADD MTP3RT: DPX=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="111";
/*Deactivation procedure*/
//Removing an MTP3 signaling link
RMV MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1;
//Removing an MTP3 signaling route
RMV MTP3RT: DPX=0, SIGLKSX=0;
//Removing an MTP3 signaling link set
RMV MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0;
//Removing an E1/T1 over the A interface
RMV AE1T1: SRN=0, SN=12, PN=1;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 30 Configuring High Speed Signaling
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
31 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110521
Guaranteed Emergency Call.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Others Prerequisites
The MSC is enabled with the eMLPP function.
Context
The Guaranteed Emergency Call feature is introduced to increase the setup success rate of
emergency calls to the greatest extent. Therefore, normal communications are ensured in disaster
relief activities.
This feature has the following characteristics:
l Emergency calls are preferentially assigned full-rate TCHs (TCHFs) in the immediate
assignment phase.
l The system reserves TCHFs for the MSs making emergency calls.
l The MSs making emergency calls preempt the channels occupied by low-priority calls.
Without this feature, the TCHs occupied by emergency calls can be preempted by high-priority
calls. After this feature is enabled, emergency calls can preempt the TCHs occupied by other
calls when there is no idle TCH. Emergency calls, however, cannot preempt the TCHs occupied
by other emergency calls.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 31 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to query the value of
Priority of Emergency Call. If the value of Priority of Emergency Call is 15, this
feature is not activated.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Priority of
Emergency Call to an appropriate value, for example, 1.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set
Max Channel Num Reserved for EC to an appropriate value, for example, 2.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Emergency
Call Preemption Permitted to ON(On).
5. (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLTMR. In this step, set
Timer of Reserved TCH for EMC to an appropriate value, for example, 15.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to query the value of
Priority of Emergency Call.
Expected result: The value of Priority of Emergency Call is 1.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCHMGBASIC to query the value
of Max Channel Num Reserved for EC.
Expected result: The value of Max Channel Num Reserved for EC is 2.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to query the value of
Emergency Call Preemption Permitted.
Expected result: The value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted is ON(On).
4. (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLTMR to query the value
of Timer of Reserved TCH for EMC.
Expected result: The value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted is 15.
5. Use an MS to make an emergency call.
All the TCHs in the cell are occupied by common calls and there are no idle TCHs.
There exists a call whose priority is lower than the priority of the emergency call and
the channel resources of the call can be preempted.
Expected result: A call in the cell is released because its resources are preempted.
6. The MS makes the emergency call successfully. An SDCCH is assigned in the
immediate assignment phase and a TCHF is assigned in the assignment phase.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Priority of
Emergency Call to 15.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to query the value of
Priority of Emergency Call.
Expected result: The value of Priority of Emergency Call is 15.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Emergency
Call Preemption Permitted to OFF(Off).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to query the value of
Emergency Call Preemption Permitted.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 31 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
Expected result: The value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted is OFF
(Off).
----End
Example
//Activating Guaranteed Emergency Call
LST GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CELLID=1;
SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, EMCPRILV=1;
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, RSVCHMFORECNUM=2;
SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, PREEMPTIONPERMIT=ON;
SET GCELLTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, WAITRESVCHANREFRESHTIMER=15;
//Deactivating Guaranteed Emergency Call
SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, EMCPRILV=15;
LST GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CELLID=1;
SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, PREEMPTIONPERMIT=OFF;
LST GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CELLID=1;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 31 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
32 Configuring License Control for Urgency
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-511001
License Control for Urgency.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
Context
CAUTION
This feature is enabled only in scenarios where the traffic volume increases abruptly, for
example, in a disaster.
This function can be performed only three times for each R version and it is valid only in seven
days since it is enabled.
After this feature is enabled, the network capacity can reach the maximum supported by the
hardware.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace
Protection Period Switch to ON(ON).
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LICUSAGE to check the resource items of
the license.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 32 Configuring License Control for Urgency
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
The returned result shows that all the values of the resource items reach the maximum.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST LICENSECTRL to query the setting of
Grace Protection Period Switch State.
Expected result: In the returned result, there are the settings of Remaining Grace
Protection Times and Remaining Grace Protection Days, and Grace Protection
Period Switch State is set to ON.
3. On the next day (later than 1 a.m.) after this feature is enabled, check whether the
event EVT-22812 Operation of Maximum License Capacity is reported by the alarm
console of BSC6900.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace
Protection Period Switch to OFF(OFF).
----End
Example
/*Activation procedure*/
SET LICENSECTRL: SWITCH=ON;
/*Deactivation procedure*/
SET LICENSECTRL: SWITCH=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 32 Configuring License Control for Urgency
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
33 Configuring the satellite transmission on
the Pb interface
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113904
Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
Context
l If terrestrial lines between the BSC and the external PCU cannot be installed or the
installation cost of the terrestrial lines is high, satellite transmission can be deployed on the
Pb interface.
l The transmission delay over the G-Abis interface of a satellite-capable cell is longer than
that over the G-Abis interface of an ordinary cell. If the same amount of data is transmitted
by these two types of cell, it takes longer time for the satellite-capable cell to wait for a
response message from the MS. Therefore, the transmission performance of a satellite-
capable cell is worse than that of an ordinary cell. Under the condition that the average
downlink rate of an MS is not affected, the network reduces the maximum number of
downlink PDCHs allocated to the MS so that the time required for the RLC sending window
to overflow is prolonged.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Configure satellite transmission on the Pb interface on the LMT.
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PBE1T1. In this step, set Transmission
Mode to SATEL(Satellite Transmission).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 33 Configuring the satellite transmission on the Pb interface
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
NOTE
The value of Start PCIC must be a multiple of 128.
After satellite transmission is applied on the Pb E1 link, the Pb signaling link automatically
switches to the satellite transmission mode accordingly.
2. Configure satellite transmission on the Pb interface through PCU LocalWS.
Run the mt gcell deactive<LCNo> command to deactivate a cell.
Run the pcu add sattrans<LCNo> yes command to configure satellite
transmission for the cell.
Run the mt gcell active <LCNo> command to activate the cell.
3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step,
set T3168 to 2000ms(2000ms), T3192 to 0ms(0ms), and BS_CV_MAX to 15.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the mt gcell deactive<LCNo> command to deactivate the cell.
2. Run the pcu add sattrans<LCNo> yes command to configure satellite transmission
for the cell.
3. Run the mt gcell active<LCNo> command to activate the cell.
4. Run the mt gcell show stat<LCNo> command to verify that the state of the cell is
UNBLOCK.
5. Use the MS to perform PS services. PS services are normally performed.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Disable satellite transmission on the Pb interface on the LMT.
Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD PBE1T1. In this step, set Transmission
Mode to TRRS(Terrestrial Transmission).
2. Configure terrestrial transmission on the Pb interface through PCU LocalWS.
Run the mt gcell deactive<LCNo> command to deactivate the cell.
Run the pcu set sattrans<LCNo> no command to configure terrestrial
transmission for the cell.
Run the mt gcell active <LCNo> command to activate the cell.
3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step,
set T3168 to 500ms(500ms), T3192 to 500ms(500ms), and BS_CV_MAX to 10.
----End
Example
/*Activating Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface*/
ADD PBE1T1: SRN=0, SN=20, PN=0, PCUNO=0, SPCIC=0, TNMODE=SATEL;
/*Deactivating Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface*/
MOD PBE1T1: SRN=0, SN=20, PN=0, TNMODE=SATEL, OPMODE=MODRANGETS,
STARTTS=4, ENDTS=32, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 33 Configuring the satellite transmission on the Pb interface
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
34 Configuring Connection with TMA
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210601
Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier).
Prerequisites
l Hardware Dependencies for Common TMA
The RRU3004 does not support the connection with a common TMA.
The RRU3008 and RRU3908 support the connection with a common TMA.
The GRFU and MRFU support the connection with a common TMA.
The DRFU supports the connection with a common TMA through the GATM board.
l Hardware Dependencies for Smart TMA
The 3012 series base stations do not support the configuration of the smart TMA.
A 3900 or 3036 series base station with the GATM board does not support the
configuration of the smart TMA.
A 3900 or 3036 series base station with the RXU board does not support the
configuration of the smart TMA in non-SRAN mode.
An antenna device is numbered uniquely within a site. In addition, the device number
of a Remote Electrical Tilt (RET) and that of a TMA must be different within a site.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
Context
Installed on the tower top, the TMA is a device for amplifying uplink signals. As an optional
component of the antenna system, the TMA compensates for the feeder loss caused by a long
feeder to improve the uplink sensitivity and converge. In a network whose uplink coverage is
limited, the TMA can be installed to improve the receiver sensitivity and expand the cell radius,
reducing the number of BTSs and minimizing investments.
If a BTS is configured with the TMA, users must configure the BTS-related parameters based
on the actual RF antenna port, power supply mode, and TMA characteristics.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 34 Configuring Connection with TMA
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
Procedure
l Activation Procedure for a Common TMA
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP to configure TMA data after
setting Antenna Tributary 1 Flag, Antenna Tributary 1 Factor, Antenna
Tributary 2 Flag, and Antenna Tributary 2 Factor.
l Activation Procedure for a Smart TMA
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP to turn on the power switches
for antenna ports.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to scan antenna devices.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTMA to add a smart TMA.
4. Optional: To modify the attributes of a TMA subunit, run the BSC6900 MML
command MOD BTSTMASUBUNIT.
5. Optional: To modify the attributes of a TMA device, run the BSC6900 MML
command MOD BTSTMADEVICEDATA.
l Verification Procedure for a Common TMA
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSRXUBP to query the TMA-related
parameters, including Antenna Tributary 1 Flag, Antenna Tributary 1 Factor,
Antenna Tributary 2 Flag, and Antenna Tributary 2 Factor.
2. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace. On the Trace Navigation Tree pane, navigate
to Trace > GSM Services > Abis Interface CS Trace. On the Basic tab page of the
displayed dialog box, select RSL under Trace Type. On the RSL tab page, select
DCM(Measurement Report) under Message Type, select TRX under Filter Flag,
and then specify the TRX ID.
3. For the RRU or RFU board whose RF feeder is attached with the TMA, perform a
dialing test to occupy the channel. Then, check the measured level reported by the
BTS.
Expected result: The Uplink RxLev specified in the Measurement Report message is
normal.
l Verification Procedure for a Smart TMA
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to check whether the
antenna devices are functioning.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSTMA to query the information of a smart
TMA.
l Deactivation Procedure for a Common TMA
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP to configure the TMA data. In
this step:
Set Antenna Tributary 1 Flag to NO(NO).
Set Antenna Tributary 2 Flag to NO(NO).
l Deactivation Procedure for a Smart TMA
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSTMA to remove a smart TMA.
----End
Example
//Activating a common TMA
SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=4, SN=3,
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 34 Configuring Connection with TMA
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
RXUTYPE=DRFU, SndRcvMode1=SGL_ANTENNA, HAVETT1=YES, ATTENFACTOR1=5,
HAVETT2=YES, ATTENFACTOR2=10;
//Activating a smart TMA
SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=3,
RXUTYPE=MRRU, PwrSwitchRET=ON, THRESHOLDTYPERET=UER_SELF_DEFINE,
OverCurAlmThdRET=600, OverCurClrThdRET=300, UnderCurAlmThdRET=50,
UnderCurClrThdRET=100;
STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=3;
ADD BTSTMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=1, DEVICENAME="tafang",
PWRSUPPLYTYPE=SINGLE_PORT_POWER, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4,
CTRLPORTSN=3, SUBUNITNUM=2;
//Verifying a common TMA
LST BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=4, SN=3;
SET FHO: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOMOD=FREE;
//Verifying a smart TMA
STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=3;
DSP BTSTMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=1;
//Deactivating a common TMA
SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=4, SN=3,
RXUTYPE=DRFU, HAVETT1=NO, HAVETT2=NO;
//Deactivating a smart TMA
RMV BTSTMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=1;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 34 Configuring Connection with TMA
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
35 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210602
Remote Electrical Tilt.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The base station is connected to a remote electrical tilt (RET) antenna properly.
The power switch for an RET antenna is turned on. The overcurrent and undercurrent
thresholds are checked since they are related to the number of RET antennas installed
on a board.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
Context
With this feature activated, users can remotely adjust the tilt of an RET antenna to optimize
network performance.
Procedure
l The following operations are applicable to the version V100R012 or later:
Activation Procedure
1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set
RET ALD Power Switch, RET ALD Over Current Occur Threshold, RET ALD
Over Current Clear Threshold, RET ALD Under Current Occur Threshold, and
RET ALD Under Current Clear Threshold to appropriate values.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to start an RET antenna
scanning task.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRET to add an RET antenna.
NOTE
For vendor information, see the antenna equipment manual or scan the RET antenna.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 35 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
4. Optional: To modify parameters concerning an RET antenna subunit, run the
BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSRETSUBUNIT.
5. Optional: To modify parameters concerning the attributes of an RET device, run the
BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSRETDEVICEDATA.
6. Optional: To set the tilt angle of an RET antenna, run the BSC6900 MML
command MOD BTSRETTILT.
Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to check whether an RET
antenna scanning task has been started.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSRET to query the dynamic information
on an RET antenna.
3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSRETSUBUNIT to query the
dynamic information on an RET antenna subunit.
Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
l The following operations are applicable to the version V100R009 or earlier:
Activation Procedure
1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set
RET ALD Power Switch, RET ALD Over Current Occur Threshold, RET ALD
Over Current Clear Threshold, RET ALD Under Current Occur Threshold, and
RET ALD Under Current Clear Threshold to appropriate values.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to start an RET antenna
scanning task.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRET to add an RET antenna.
NOTE
For vendor information, see the antenna equipment manual or scan the RET antenna.
4. Optional: To set the tilt angle of an RET antenna, run the BSC6900 MML
command SET BTSRETANTTILT.
Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to check whether an RET
antenna scanning task has been started.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSRETANTTILT to query the tilt range
of the RET antenna and it's current tilt angle.
Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
l The following scripts are applicable to the version V100R012 or later:
//Activation procedure
SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME,
RXUNAME="rru1", RXUTYPE=MRRU, PwrSwitchRET=ON;
STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4,
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 35 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
CTRLPORTSN=0;
ADD BTSRET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="tianxian",
CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=0,
CTRLPORTNO=0, RETTYPE=MULTI_RET, SUBUNITNUM=1, SCENARIO=REGULAR,
VENDORCODE="AA", SERIALNO="123456";
MOD BTSRETSUBUNIT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1,
TILT=50;
MOD BTSRETDEVICEDATA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1,
BEARING=50, MODELNO="1";
MOD BTSRETTILT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, OPMODE=DEVICENO, DEVICENO=0,
TILT=45;
//Verification procedure
STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4,
CTRLPORTSN=0;
DSP BTSRET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0;
DSP BTSRETSUBUNIT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0;
l The following scripts are applicable to the version V100R009 or earlier:
//Activation procedure
SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME,
RXUNAME="rru1", RXUTYPE=MRRU, PwrSwitchRET=ON;
STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4,
CTRLPORTSN=0;
ADD BTSRET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="tianxian",
CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=0,
CTRLPORTNO=0, RETTYPE=MULTI_RET, SUBUNITNUM=1, SCENARIO=REGULAR,
VENDORCODE="AA", SERIALNO="123456";
SET BTSRETANTTILT: OPMODE=DEVICENO, BTSIDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9,
DEVICENO=0, TILT=45;
//Verification procedure
STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4,
CTRLPORTSN=0;
DSP BTSRETANTTILT: OPMODE=SITE, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 35 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
36 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive
Diversity
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210604
2-Antenna Receive Diversity.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The BTS3006C or BTS3002E is configured with the DATM board.
The BTS3012 or BTS3012AE is configured with the DATU board.
The BTS3900, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L that uses the DRFU is configured with the
GATM board.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
Context
Two-antenna receive diversity is an effective approach of reducing signal attenuation by using
two antennas to receive a signal at the reception end, where two received signals are combined
after processing.
The following procedures assume that two-antenna receive diversity is configured for a DRFU
of a BTS3900.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRFU
Sending Receiving Mode to DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX+2RX]).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 36 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
NOTE
Based on the type and number of TRX boards, the receiving and sending mode can be set to
SGLDOUBLE_ANTENNA(Single Feeder[1TX + 2RX]), DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double
Feeder[2TX + 2RX]), or DOUBLEDOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[1TX + 2RX])
to meet site requirements.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSRXUBP to query the receiving and
sending mode of the TRX board.
Expected result: DRFU Sending Receiving Mode is set to DOUBLE_ANTENNA
(Double Feeder[2TX + 2RX]).
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=153, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0,
RXUTYPE=DRFU, SndRcvMode1=DOUBLE_ANTENNA;
//Verifying 2-Antenna Receive Diversity
LST BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=153, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 36 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
37 Configuring BTS Clock
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210501
BTS Clock.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
When the synchronization with the GPS clock is configured, the DBS3900/BTS3900/
BTS3900A must be configured with the USCU.
When the synchronization with the BITS clock is configured, the DBS3900/BTS3900/
BTS3900A must be configured with the USCU.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
Context
l The synchronization of the BTS clock provides the basis for the frame synchronization.
The BTS uses the synchronization clock to obtain the reference clock source for the internal
frame synchronization.
l The BTS supports three clock synchronization modes: synchronization with the Abis clock,
synchronization with the GPS clock, and synchronization with the BITS clock. In addition,
the BTS internal clock can work in free-run mode to temporarily provide a stable reference
clock source for the BTS.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
Synchronization with the Abis clock (default mode)
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLKPARA. In this step, set Clock
Type to TRCBSC_CLK(Trace BSC Clock).
Synchronization with the GPS clock
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type to
TRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock).
Synchronization with the BITS clock
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 37 Configuring BTS Clock
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type to
EXTSYN_CLK(External Sync Clock).
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSCLK to query the current configuration
of the system clock.
Expected result:
If... Then...
The clock information corresponds to
the clock type configured
The configuration is successful.
The clock information is inconsistent
with the configuration
The configuration is unsuccessful.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSATTR to query the attributes of the
BTS. Here,
Set List Object to SITE(By Site).
Select CLKATTR(CLKATTR) under the BTS Attribute check box.
Expected result: Clock attribute is Available.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
//Configure the Synchronization with the Abis clock.
SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ClkType=TRCBSC_CLK;
//Configure the Synchronization with the GPS clock
SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ClkType=TRCGPS_CLK;
//Configure the Synchronization with the BITS clock
SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ClkType=EXTSYN_CLK;
//Verification procedure
LST BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;
DSP BTSATTR: OBJTP=SITE, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, SITEATTR=CLKATTR;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 37 Configuring BTS Clock
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
38 Configuring Voice Fault Detection
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-119301
Voice Fault Detection.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
The crosstalk detection function cannot be used together with the features
GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch, GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch, GBFD-115701
TFO, GBFD-115702 TrFO, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, and GBFD-118601
Abis over IP.
The one-way audio detection function cannot be used together with the features
GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch and GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
l Other Prerequisites
The crosstalk detection function can be enabled only in A over TDM transmission mode.
Context
This feature provides alarm mechanisms for crosstalk and one-way audio. The BSC records the
number of times of crosstalk and one-way audio occurrences periodically. If the number exceeds
a specified threshold, the BSC reports the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm.
Procedure
l Activation procedure for One-Way Audio Detection
Ater or Abis over TDM
1. Run the BSC6900SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set One-Way Mute
Alarm Reporting Period to 12, Speech Channel Alarm Threshold to 10,
Speech Channel Alarm Clearance Threshold to 6, One-Way Audio Log
Type to LEV2_MUTETEST_LOG_REC, and Force HO Upon Speech
Problem to an appropriate value.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 38 Configuring Voice Fault Detection
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
2. Run the BSC6900SET GCELLSOFT command. In this step, set Mute Detect
Class1 Switch to ENABLE(ENABLE), Period of Mute Detect Class1 to 5,
Exceptional Frame Threshold of Mute Detect Class1 to 25, Mute Detect Class2
Switch to ENABLE(ENABLE), Period of Mute Detect Class2 TRAU Frame
to 2, and Period of Mute Detect Class2 to 4.
NOTE
If the proportion of bad frames to all speech frames exceeds the threshold specified in
Exceptional Frame Threshold of Mute Detect Class1 in the measurement period specified in
Period of Mute Detect Class1, one-way audio may have occurred. Then the one-way audio
detection class 2 starts. If no test speech frame is received in the measurement period specified
in Period of Mute Detect Class2, the one-way audio is confirmed, and the BSC records a one-
way audio occurrence. If the number of times of one-way audio occurrences exceeds the threshold
specified in Speech Channel Alarm Threshold in the measurement period specified in One-
Way Mute Alarm Reporting Period, the BSC reports the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm.
If the number of times of one-way audio occurrences is smaller than the threshold specified in
Speech Channel Alarm Clearance Threshold in the measurement period specified in One-
Way Mute Alarm Reporting Period, the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm is cleared. If Force
HO Upon Speech Problem is set to ON(On), the BSC hands over the calls to another cell to
avoid voice faults when detecting one-way audio class 2.
A, Ater, or Abis over IP
1. Run the BSC6900SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set One-Way Mute
Alarm Reporting Period to 12, Speech Channel Alarm Threshold to 10,
Speech Channel Alarm Clearance Threshold to 6, and One-Way Audio Log
Type to IP_MUTETEST_LOG_REC.
2. Run the BSC6900SET GCELLSOFT command. In this step, set Mute Detect
Class1 Switch to ENABLE(ENABLE), Period of Mute Detect Class1 to 5,
Exceptional Frame Threshold of Mute Detect Class1 to 25, and Speech
Channel Alarm Threshold to an appropriate value.
NOTE
If the proportion of bad frames to all speech frames exceeds the threshold specified in
Exceptional Frame Threshold of Mute Detect Class1 in the measurement period specified in
Period of Mute Detect Class1, the BSC records a one-way audio occurrence. If the number of
times of one-way audio occurrences exceeds the threshold specified in Speech Channel Alarm
Threshold in the measurement period specified in One-Way Mute Alarm Reporting Period,
the BSC reports the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm. If the number of times of one-way audio
occurrences is smaller than the threshold specified in Speech Channel Alarm Clearance
Threshold in the measurement period specified in One-Way Mute Alarm Reporting Period,
the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm is cleared.
l Activation procedure for Crosstalk Detection
1. Run the BSC6900SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set One-Way Mute
Alarm Reporting Period to 12, Speech Channel Alarm Threshold to 10, Speech
Channel Alarm Clearance Threshold to 6, Force HO Upon Speech Problem to
an appropriate value, and do not set Cross Call Detect Time Threshold to 255.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 38 Configuring Voice Fault Detection
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
NOTE
The Cross Call Detect Time Threshold specifies the tolerance duration for crosstalk. If the duration
of crosstalk exceeds the threshold specified in Cross Call Detect Time Threshold, the BSC records
a crosstalk occurrence. If the number of times of crosstalk occurrences exceeds the threshold specified
in Speech Channel Alarm Threshold in the measurement period specified in One-Way Mute
Alarm Reporting Period, the BSC reports the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm. If the number
of times of crosstalk occurrences is smaller than the threshold specified in Speech Channel Alarm
Clearance Threshold in the measurement period specified in One-Way Mute Alarm Reporting
Period, the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm is cleared. If Force HO Upon Speech Problem is
set to ON(On), the BSC hands over the calls to another cell to avoid voice faults when detecting
crosstalk.
l Verification Procedure
1. When crosstalk or one-way audio occurs, view Dynamic Alarms.
Expected result: The BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm exists with Failure
Type being Crosstalk or One-way Audio.
NOTE
If the number of times of actual crosstalk or one-way audio occurrences exceeds the threshold
specified in Speech Channel Alarm Threshold, the LMT reports the BSS Internal Voice
Channel Alarm.
l Deactivation procedure for One-Way Audio Detection
Ater or Abis over TDM
1. Run the BSC6900SET GCELLSOFT command. In this step, set Mute Detect
Class1 Switch to DISABLE(DISABLE) and Mute Detect Class2 Switch to
DISABLE(DISABLE).
A, Ater, or Abis over IP
1. Run the BSC6900SET GCELLSOFT command. In this step, set Mute Detect
Class1 Switch to DISABLE(DISABLE).
l Deactivation procedure for Crosstalk Detection
1. Run the BSC6900SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set Cross Call Detect
Time Threshold to 255.
----End
Example
//Activating One-Way Audio Detection in Ater or Abis over TDM transmission
mode by running the following commands:
1. SET BSCBASIC: SpeechAlmPeriod=12, SPEECHCHANALARMTHRES=10,
SPEECHCHANRESUMEALARMTHRES=6,
MuteTestLogStyle=LEV1_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-0&LEV2_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-1&IP_MUTET
EST_LOG_REC-0&CIC_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-0, SpeechErrorForceHOSwitch=OFF;
2. SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCMUTEDETECTFLAG=ENABLE,
MUTECHECKCLASS1PERIOD=5, EXCEPFRAMETHRES=25,
MUTECHECKCLASS2SWITCH=ENABLE, DETECTFRAMEPERIOD=2, MUTECHECKPEIROD=4;
//Activating One-Way Audio Detection in A, Ater, or Abis over IP
transmission mode by running the following commands:
1. SET BSCBASIC: SpeechAlmPeriod=12, SPEECHCHANALARMTHRES=10,
SPEECHCHANRESUMEALARMTHRES=6,
MuteTestLogStyle=LEV1_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-0EV2_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-0&IP_MUTETES
T_LOG_REC-1&CIC_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-0, SpeechErrorForceHOSwitch=OFF;
2. SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCMUTEDETECTFLAG=ENABLE,
MUTECHECKCLASS1PERIOD=5, EXCEPFRAMETHRES=25;
//Activating Crosstalk Detection by running the following commands:
1. SET BSCBASIC: CROCALTMTHRD=64, SpeechAlmPeriod=12,
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 38 Configuring Voice Fault Detection
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
SPEECHCHANALARMTHRES=10, SPEECHCHANRESUMEALARMTHRES=6,
SpeechErrorForceHOSwitch=OFF;
2. SET GCELLBTSSOFTPARA: CROCALCHKSW=ON;
//Deactivating One-Way Audio Detection in Ater or Abis over TDM
transmission mode by running the following command:
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCMUTEDETECTFLAG=DISABLE,
MUTECHECKCLASS2SWITCH=DISABLE;
//Deactivating One-Way Audio Detection in A, Ater, or Abis over IP
transmission mode by running the following command:
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCMUTEDETECTFLAG=DISABLE;
//Deactivating Crosstalk Detection by running the following command:
SET BSCBASIC: CROCALTMTHRD=255;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 38 Configuring Voice Fault Detection
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
39 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common
CPRI Interface (GBTS)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210001
Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS).
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
As Figure 39-1 shows, the hardware of the base station is installed.
Figure 39-1 Network topology of Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface

NOTE
As Figure 39-1 shows, CPRI0, CPRI1, and CPRI2 on the GTMU board are respectively connected
to one CPRI port on the WBBP board. CPRI3, CPRI4, and CPRI5 are connected to the RRU3908.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide
39 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface
(GBTS)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
Context
In the traditional GSM+UMTS dual-mode solution, the GSM and UMTS base stations use the
same site. Different RF modules are used for different radio standards and therefore separate
optical cables are required. As a result, many optical cables are required for the entire system,
which increases the deployment cost. After this feature is applied, the demand of optical cables
is reduced by 50%, which helps reduce the cost of the optical modules and optical cables and
reduce the expense in the installation and maintenance of the optical cables between the BBU
and RF modules.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSSFPMODE to configure the switching
relation of the SFP ports and switch the data of CPRI0, CPRI1, and CPRI2 on the
GTMU to CPRI3, CPRI4, and CPRI5 on the GTMU.
NOTE
The switching relation of the SFP ports is configured only on the GSM side.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSSFPMODE to query the configurations
of the SFP ports.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSSFPMODE to remove the SFP port
switching relation.
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
ADD BTSSFPMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=161, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SFPPORTNO=0,
SWITCHPORTNO=3;
//Verification procedure
LST BTSSFPMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=161, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SFPPORTNO=0;
//Deactivation procedure
RMV BTSSFPMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=161, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SFPPORTNO=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide
39 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface
(GBTS)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
40 Configuring PBT
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115901
Power Boost Technology (PBT).
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012 (QTRU), BTS3012AE (QTRU), DBS3900
(RRU3008), BTS3900A (GRFU), BTS3900L (GRFU), BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do
not support PBT currently.
When a double-transceiver TRX board uses PBT, only channel 0 is configured with one
carrier.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
PBT aims to increase the downlink transmit power to extend network coverage. In PBT mode,
only one carrier is configured for a double-transceiver TRX board. A signal transmitted from
the carrier is modulated and then converted into a radio frequency (RF) signal, known as DA
conversion. Then, the RF signal is transmitted to two power amplifiers (PAs). After being
amplified, the two signals are combined and output. The transmit power is increased because
the two signals are aligned accurately. This increases downlink signal strength. PBT is applicable
to wide coverage areas.
The following procedure illustrates how to configure PBT for the DTRU on a BTS3012.
Figure 40-1 shows connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in PBT mode.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 40 Configuring PBT
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
Figure 40-1 Connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in PBT mode
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to
PBT(PBT).
NOTE
In PBT mode, the single carrier must be configured on channel 0.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 40 Configuring PBT
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
l Verification Procedure
1. Optional: Use an MS to make a call.
NOTE
This operation is required if the test TRX does not carry a BCCH carrier. This operation can be
skipped if the test TRX carries a BCCH carrier.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to
NONE(None). Then, use an optical power meter to measure the power of the test base
station, and record the measurement result.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to
PBT(PBT).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to check the value of Send
Mode.
Expected result: Send Mode is set to PBT(PBT).
5. Use the optical power meter to measure the power of the test base station, and record
the measurement result.
6. Compare the measurement result obtained in step 2 with that obtained in step 5.
Expected result: The power measured in step 5 is greater than that measured in step
2. This indicates that PBT has taken effect.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=PBT;
//Verification procedure
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=NONE;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=PBT;
LST GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TRXID=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 40 Configuring PBT
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
41 Configuring Transmit Diversity
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115902
Transmit Diversity (TD).
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
BTS3012 (QTRU), BTS3012AE (QTRU), BTS3900A (GRFU), BTS3900L (GRFU),
BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do not support TD currently.
When a double-transceiver TRX board uses TD, only channel 0 is configured with one
carrier.
The cell where TD is applied has at least one dual-polarized antenna or two single-
polarized antennas.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
In TD mode, one baseband signal is transmitted through two radio frequency (RF) channels.
This prevents signal levels from changing dramatically and also prevents signal quality from
dropping since there is no correlation between two antennas. As an effect of this, service quality
for users that move at a low speed is improved and the downlink network coverage is expanded.
To sum up, TD improves the downlink signal quality and meets the requirements of high signal
quality in some special areas.
The following procedure illustrates how to configure TD for the DRRU on a GSM DBS3900.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRRU
Sending Receiving Mode to DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX+2RX]).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 41 Configuring Transmit Diversity
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to
DIVERSITY(Transmit Diversity).
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to
NONE(None).
2. Use an optical power meter to measure the power of the test base station, and record
the measurement result.
Expected result: The power is 0.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRRU
Sending Receiving Mode to DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX+2RX]).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to
DIVERSITY(Transmit Diversity).
5. Use an optical power meter to measure the power of channel B, and record the
measurement result.
Expected result: The power is not 0, which indicates that TD has taken effect.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=0, SN=3,
RXUTYPE=DRRU, SndRcvMode=DOUBLE_ANTENNA, Lvl1Vswr=22, Lvl2Vswr=30;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=8, SNDMD=DIVERSITY;
//Verification procedure
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=NONE;
SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=0, SN=3,
RXUTYPE=DRRU, SndRcvMode=DOUBLE_ANTENNA, Lvl1Vswr=22, Lvl2Vswr=30;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=8, SNDMD=DIVERSITY;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 41 Configuring Transmit Diversity
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
42 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115903
4-Way Receiver Diversity. The 4-way receive diversity combines 4-way receive signals to
optimize the quality of uplink signals.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The BTS3012 (QTRU), BTS3012AE (QTRU), DBS3900 (RRU3004/RRU3008),
BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L(GRFU), and BTS3900B/BTS3900E do not support
this feature.
A DTRU board that adopts the 4-way receive diversity technique can be configured
with only one carrier.
The cell has two dual-polarized antennas or four single-polarized antennas.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
The 4-way receive diversity enables signals from four directions to be transmitted to a single
carrier simultaneously. The carrier then combines these 4-way receive signals to improve uplink
receive sensitivity. In this way, this technique optimizes the quality of uplink signals to meet the
demanding requirements for radio communications in certain cases and to improve the uplink
performance in wide network coverage scenarios.
The following procedures assume that the 4-way receive diversity is configured for two
associated DRFUs of a BTS3900.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 42 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRFU
Sending Receiving Mode to DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX
+4RX]).
NOTE
The two associated DRFUs must be configured simultaneously.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Receive
Mode to FOURDIVERSITY(Four Diversity Receiver).
NOTE
l If the carrier of a double-transceiver TRX board is configured on channel 0, Send Mode can be
set to DTIC(Transmit Independency or Combination), PBT(PBT), DIVERSITY(Transmit
Diversity), DDIVERSITY(Dynamic Transmit Diversity), or DPBT(DPBT).
l If the carrier of the double-transceiver TRX board is configured on channel 1, Send Mode must
be set to DTIC(Transmit Independency or Combination).
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to query the attributes of the
TRX board.
Expected result: Receive Mode is set to FOURDIVERSITY(Four Diversity
Receiver).
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activating 4-Way Receiver Diversity
SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0,
RXUTYPE=DRFU, SndRcvMode1=DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENNA;
SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=1,
RXUTYPE=DRFU, SndRcvMode1=DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENNA;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, RCVMD=FOURDIVERSITY;
//Verifying 4-Way Receiver Diversity
LST GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=9, TRXID=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 42 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
43 Configuring Dynamic Transmit
Diversity
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118101
Dynamic Transmit Diversity.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012(DTRU), BTS3012AE(DTRU), DBS3900,
BTS3900(DRFU/MRFUe), BTS3900A(DRFU/MRFUe) and BTS3900L(DRFU/
MRFUe) support the feature dynamic transmit diversity currently.
The test cell has at least one dual-polarized antenna or two single-polarized antennas.
l Dependencies on Other Features
The feature depends on the feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell.
This feature is mutually exclusive with the following features: GBFD-113701
Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping), GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping
and GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell.
This feature is mutually exclusive with the following feature when multi-carrier RRU
dynamic TX diversity is used: GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing(Dual PA power
sharing)
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
In dynamic transmit diversity mode, the transmit diversity technique is applied to two carriers'
same timeslots only. The two carriers belong to a double-transceiver TRX board. After these
timeslots are released, they stop using the transmit diversity technique to transmit signals. The
dynamic transmit diversity technique makes full use of idle timeslots, improves signal quality
in rural areas, and strikes a balance between system capacity and network coverage by
dynamically adjusting network coverage or system capacity according to the actual situation in
the live network.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 43 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
The following operation illustrates how to configure the dynamic transmit diversity technique
for the DTRU on a BTS3012.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set
Dynamic Transmission Div Supported to DDIVERSITY(DDIVERSITY).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to
DDIVERSITY(Dynamic Transmit Diversity) for the TRXs in the overlaid subcell.
NOTE
l You can run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXIUO to query the attributes of
TRXs in the overlaid subcell.
l If the dynamic transmit diversity technique is to be applied to a DTRU, two carriers must
be configured and the technique must not be applied to the BCCH carrier.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Assign
Optimum Layer to SysOpt(System optimization).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXADMSTAT. In this step, set
Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for carriers except the BCCH carrier and those
carriers whose send mode is not DDIVERSITY(Dynamic Transmit Diversity).
CAUTION
Setting Administrative State for the TRX to Lock(Lock) may causes congestion in
the cell where the TRX is located.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, set
Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for the TCH or TCHF of the BCCH carrier.
CAUTION
Setting Administrative State for the TCH or TCHF of main BCCH carrier to Lock
(Lock) may causes congestion in the cell where the TRX is located.
4. Monitor the status of the TCH or TCHF by referring toMonitoring Channel Status,
and use an MS to make an emergency call.
NOTE
A TCH in the overlaid subcell is assigned to the MS only when the uplink receive level of the
SDCCH meets the following conditions: The difference between the assign-optimum-level
threshold and the PBT gain is smaller than the SDCCH uplink receive level. The SDCCH uplink
receive level is smaller than the assign-optimum-level threshold. The default assign-optimum-
level threshold is 35 while the default PBT gain is 4. You can change the assign-optimum-level
threshold according to the SDCCH uplink receive level to enable the system to assign a channel
to the overlaid subcell. In this way, dynamic transmit diversity can be triggered.
Expected result: Checking the channel monitoring tab page on the BSC6900 LMT,
you can find that the emergency call occupies channels of the two carriers' same
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 43 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
timeslots. One channel is in the Working state while the other one is in the
Subordinate Channel state.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV, in this step, set Send Mode for
TRXs in the overlaid subcell to other send modes supported by the TRXs.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC, in this step, set
Dynamic Transmission Div Supported to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DYNPBTSUPPORTED=DDIVERSITY;
SET GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, TRXID=2, SNDMD=DDIVERSITY;
//Verification procedure
SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OPTILAYER=SysOpt;
SET GTRXADMSTAT: TRXID=2, ADMSTAT=Lock;
SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, ADMSTAT=Lock;
//Deactivation procedure
SET GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, TRXID=2, SNDMD=NOCOMB;
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DYNPBTSUPPORTED=NOTSUPPORT;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 43 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
44 Configuring Dynamic PBT
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118102
Dynamic PBT.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012 (QTRU), BTS3012AE (QTRU), DBS3900
(RRU3008), BTS3900A (GRFU), BTS3900L (GRFU), BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do
not support the feature Dynamic PBT currently.
l Dependencies on Other Features
The feature depends on the feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
In dynamic Power Boost Technology (PBT) mode, the PBT is applied to two carriers' same
timeslots only. The two carriers belong to a double-transceiver TRX board. After these timeslots
are released, they stop using the PBT to transmit signals. The dynamic PBT makes full use of
idle timeslots, improves signal quality for some areas with poor signal quality, and strikes a
balance between system capacity and network coverage by dynamically adjusting network
coverage or system capacity according to the actual situation in the live network.
Moreover, the dynamic PBT increases the handover success rate for MSs located at the edge of
a cell, and therefore improves the performance of a concentric cell where the Co-BCCH function
is enabled.
The following operation illustrates how to configure the dynamic PBT for the DTRU on a
BTS3012.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 44 Configuring Dynamic PBT
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set
Dynamic Transmission Div Supported to DPBT(DPBT).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to
DPBT(DPBT) for TRXs in the overlaid subcell.
NOTE
l You can run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXIUO to query the attributes of
TRXs in the overlaid subcell.
l If the dynamic PBT is to be applied to a radio frequency (RF) module, two carriers must
be configured for the module and the dynamic PBT must not be applied to the BCCH
carrier.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Assign
Optimum Layer to SysOpt(System optimization).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXADMSTAT. In this step, set
Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for carriers except the BCCH carrier and those
carriers whose send mode is not DPBT(DPBT).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, set
Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for the TCH or TCHF of the BCCH carrier.
4. Monitor the status of the TCH or TCHF by referring toMonitoring Channel Status,
and use an MS to make an emergency call.
NOTE
A TCH in the overlaid subcell is assigned to the MS only when the uplink receive level of the
SDCCH meets the following conditions: The difference between the assign-optimum-level
threshold and the PBT gain is smaller than the SDCCH uplink receive level. The SDCCH uplink
receive level is smaller than the assign-optimum-level threshold. The default assign-optimum-
level threshold is 35 while the default PBT gain is 4. You can change the assign-optimum-level
threshold according to the SDCCH uplink receive level to enable the system to assign a channel
to the overlaid subcell. In this way, dynamic transmit diversity can be triggered.
Expected result: Checking the channel monitoring tab page on the BSC6900 LMT,
you can find that the emergency call occupies channels of the two carriers' same
timeslots. One channel is in the Working state while the other one is in the
Subordinate Channel state.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DYNPBTSUPPORTED=DPBT;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, SNDMD=DPBT;
//Verification procedure
SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OPTILAYER=SysOpt;
SET GTRXADMSTAT: TRXID=2, ADMSTAT=Lock;
SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, ADMSTAT=Lock;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 44 Configuring Dynamic PBT
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
45 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118104
Enhanced EDGE Coverage.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
Enhanced EDGE coverage is supported by the following BTSs and TRXs.
Double-transceiver series base stations
DTRUs and DTRMs of BTS3012, BTS3012II, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C, and
BTS3002E.
3900 series base stations
DBS3900, BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, and BTS3900E.
NOTE
Neither QTRUs nor BTS3900B supports enhanced EDGE coverage.
l Dependencies on Other Features
The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This
feature depends on the feature GBFD-114201 EGPRS.
If the DTRU is used, this feature depends on the following feature: GBFD-118102
Dynamic PBT(Power Boost Technology) and GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit
Diversity.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
l The Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature described in this feature only applies to the 8PSK
modulation mode.
l The Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature improves the average power of PS services through
the coverage enhancement technology and power sharing technology, thus ensuring that
data services can have the same cell coverage capability as speech services. This feature is
applicable to both the DTRU and QTRU.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 45 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
l After the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature is activated, the Cell 8PSK Power
Attenuation Grade parameter becomes invalid automatically.
l Table 45-1 list the conditions for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature for
the BTS3012 series.
Table 45-1 Prerequisites for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature
(BTS3012 series)
Prerequisite Whether Enhanced EDGE Coverage
Is Supported
The TRX module is DTRU (type B). Supported.
The power of two carriers configured on
the DTRU is 60 W, and the static power
levels of both carriers are equal to 0.
Supported.
The TRX module is DTRU (type A) or
QTRU.
Not supported.
A single DTRU module is configured with
one carrier.
Not supported.
When a single DTRU module is configured
with two carriers, the intelligent shutdown
function is performed on one of the
carriers.
Not supported.
The two carriers configured on the DTRU
module belong to two cells.
Not supported.
When one of the carriers is configured as
the BCCH, the other non-BCCH carrier of
the DTRU module is supported or not.
Not supported.
The transmit mode of the DTRU is
configured as PBT (excluding dynamic
PBT) or transmit diversity (excluding
dynamic transmit diversity).
Not supported.
A channel of the DTRU is faulty. Not supported.

l Table 45-2 list conditions for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature for the
BTS3900E.
Table 45-2 Prerequisites for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature
(BTS3900E)
Prerequisite Whether Enhanced EDGE Coverage
Is Supported
Not FH, RF FH, and baseband FH Supported.
RanSharing Supported.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 45 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152

Procedure
l Activation procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA, and then set High-
Order Modulation Power Increase Allowed to ALLOWED(Allowed), set Enable
Enhanced EDGE Coverage to ALLOWED(Allowed).
NOTE
l The support of High-Order Modulation Power Increase Allowed by the BCCH is
determined by the High-Order Modulation Power Increase on BCCH TRX Allowed
parameter.
l The Power Increase in 8PSK parameter is used to control the increased amplitude of the
maximum power in 8PSK modulation mode.
l Verification procedure
1. Check traffic statistics information about the measurement unit High-Order
Modulation Power Increase Measurement per TRX on the M2000, and then
determine the effect of the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature. For details, see the
M2000 product documentation.
NOTE
The measurement unit High-Order Modulation Power Increase Measurement per TRX
contain 11 counters, such as Number of Bursts in High-Order Modulation Scheme and
Number of Bursts with High-Order Modulation Power Increase of n dB. The value of n
can be either of the following values: 0.4, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.4, 2.8, 3.2, 3.6, or 4.0.
l Deactivation procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA, and then set High-
Order Modulation Power Increase Allowed to NOT_ALLOWED(Not
Allowed).
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HIGHMODPWREN=ALLOWED,
EDGEPWREN=ALLOWED;
//Deactivation procedure
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HIGHMODPWREN=NOT_ALLOWED;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 45 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
46 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118106
Dynamic Power Sharing.
Prerequisites
l Dependency on Hardware
Only multi-carrier RF modules support this feature.
Only multi-carrier RF modules in dual-transmit mode support dual-PA power sharing.
l Dependency on Other Features
The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This
feature depends on the feature GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.
The single-PA power sharing function cannot be used together with any of the following
features: GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation),
GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, and GBFD-114001
Extended Cell.
For the radio frequency unit (RFU), the dual-PA power sharing function cannot be used
together with any of the following features: GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier
Intelligent Shutdown, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell,
GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell, GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping,
baseband hopping), GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, and
GBFD-114001 Extended Cell.
For the remote radio unit (RRU), the dual-PA power sharing function cannot be used
together with any of the following features: GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier
Intelligent Shutdown, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell,
GBFD-115902 Transmit Diversity, GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity,
GBFD-117002 IBCA, GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-114001 Extended Cell, and
GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell.
If the Dynamic Power Sharing feature has been enabled in a cell, you do not need to
enable the GBFD-117602 Active Power Control feature because the Dynamic Power
Sharing feature contains all of its functions.
If power control parameters are not properly set, there will be a high percentage of high
signal levels. When this occurs, network performance will not be improved even if
Dynamic Power Sharing is enabled and the number of peak clipping attempts is
minimized. Therefore, set downlink power control parameters to appropriate values and
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 46 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
enable the GBFD-114801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink function
before enabling Dynamic Power Sharing.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
Dependency on frequency bands and cells: All activated TRXs of a multi-transceiver
unit must work on the same frequency band and must be configured in the same cell.
In the case of a concentric cell, all activated TRXs must be configured in the underlaid
or overlaid subcell.
Restriction on PS channel allocation: If the remaining power of the timeslot of a PS
channel is lower than the maximum transmit power of the TRX, the channel cannot be
converted into a packet data channel (PDCH).
Restriction on cell configuration: To avoid cell congestion and enhance network
performance after this feature is enabled, the Channel Assign Allow for Insuff
Power parameter must be set to YES(Yes) and the recommended value of the C/I
Estimate Value parameter is 10 dB.
Restriction on TRX configuration: The percentage of stand-alone dedicated control
channels (SDCCHs) and PDCHs must be less than or equal to 30% the total number of
channels in a cell. It is recommended that static PDCHs be configured on BCCH carriers
and only one SDCCH be configured on each timeslot.
Context
With this feature, the transmit power of a TRX can be improved if the transmit power of the
TRX cannot meet the actual requirements. In addition, if the total transmit power of TRXs in a
TRX group exceeds the transmit power threshold of the TRX group, calls with different power
requirements are grouped into different timeslots to ensure that the total power of the same
timeslot on the TRX group does not exceed the transmit power threshold. Therefore, this feature
decreases the number of peak clippings and improves the network performance.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set Multi-
Density TRX Power Sharing to DYNAMIC(Dynamic power sharing).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV to improve the transmit power
of the TRX. In this step, set Power Type based on the network plan.
l Verification Procedure
1. Log in to the M2000 client, choose Performance > Query Result. Click New
Query in the display window. Then, the New Query dialog box is displayed. Choose
BSC6900 GSM > BTSM Measurement > TRX State Measurement per TRX to
check the values of counters such as The total BURST count cut 0.5dB power, The
total BURST count cut 1.0dB power, The total BURST count cut 1.5dB power,
and The total BURST count cut 2.0dB power before and after this feature is
activated.
The expected result: After this feature is activated, the probability of peak clipping
for timeslots is decreased.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 46 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
NOTE
When the transmit power of all the calls on a timeslot of a TRX group is greater than the
maximum transmit power of the BTS, the BTS decreases the power of all the calls to ensure
its normal operation. Number of Timeslots with Power Decreased provides the number of
timeslots whose transmit power is decreased.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD to set Multi-Density
TRX Power Sharing to NONE(None).
----End
Example
//Activating dynamic power sharing
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QTRUPWRSHARE=DYNAMIC;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWT=50W;
//Deactivating dynamic power sharing
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QTRUPWRSHARE=NONE;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 46 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
47 Configuring Extended Cell
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114001
Extended Cell.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This
feature depends on the feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the
license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2 Overview
of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
The Extended Cell feature expands the cell radius and improves the capability of the BTS for
wide coverage.
This feature is applicable to areas with a small population and low signal fading such as deserts,
seashores, islands, and water areas.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL with Cell Extension Type set to
DualTS_ExtCell(Double Timeslot Extension Cell).
l Verification Procedure
1. Monitor the channel status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status.
Expected result: One of the two adjacent TCHs with the same TRX number is not
displayed, as shown in Figure 47-1.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 47 Configuring Extended Cell
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
Figure 47-1 Channels in a cell enabled with Extended Cell
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL with Cell Extension Type set to
Normal_cell(Normal cell).
2. Verify that Extended Cell has been deactivated by monitoring the channel status. For
details, see Monitoring Channel Status.
Expected result: Both of the two adjacent TCHs with the same TRX number are
displayed, as shown in Figure 47-2.
Figure 47-2 Channels in a cell not enabled with Extended Cell
----End
Example
//Activating Extended Cell
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EXTTP=DualTS_ExtCell;
//Deactivating Extended Cell
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EXTTP=Normal_cell;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 47 Configuring Extended Cell
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
48 Configuring Concentric Cell
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113201
Concentric Cell.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115830 VAMOS.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The cell is configured.
Context
l When tight frequency reuse is adopted, the concentric cell technology can be used to avoid
or reduce radio interference and therefore to ensure voice quality.
l The concentric cell technology divides an ordinary cell into two service layers: overlaid
(OL) subcell and underlaid (UL) subcell. Compared with the UL subcell, the OL subcell
is configured with more channels and therefore it becomes the primary traffic bearer layer.
The OL subcell aims to absorb most subscribers in the concentric cell. The UL subcell aims
to provide services for areas that are not covered by the OL subcell.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Cell IUO Type
to Concentric_cell(Concentric Cell) and Enhanced Concentric Allowed to an
appropriate value.
NOTE
After enhanced concentric cell is enabled, the BSC automatically configures the OL subcell
and the UL subcell as neighboring cells. The neighboring cell relationship cannot be removed.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 48 Configuring Concentric Cell
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXIUO. In this step, set Concentric
Attribute to OVERLAID(Overlaid Subcell) or UNDERLAID(Underlaid
Subcell) based on the network plan.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set
Concentric Circles HO Allowed to YES(Yes).
NOTE
It is recommended that Concentric Attribute on the BCCH TRX be set to UNDERLAID
(Underlaid Subcell).
4. Run the SET GCELLHOIUO command to set the handover parameters in the
concentric cell based on the current network status.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Assign
Optimum Layer to USubcell(Underlaid subcell).
2. Use an MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell.
NOTE
To facilitate the verification, ensure that only one call is made in the serving cell.
Expected result: You can obtain the call setup procedure by performing the operations
given in Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages on
the Abis Interface. You can learn that the call occupies a TCH on the TRX in the
underlaid subcell by running the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block the
channel that is occupied by the call. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock
(Lock).
Expected result: You can learn that the call is handed over to another TCH on the TRX
in the underlaid subcell by using the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.
CAUTION
Setting Administrative State for the TRX to Lock(Lock) may cause congestion in
the cell where the TRX is located.
4. Repeat step 3 to block all available channels on the TRX in the underlaid subcell.
Expected result: You can learn that the call is handed over to another TCH on the TRX
in the overlaid subcell by using the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Assign
Optimum Layer to OSubcell(Overlaid subcell).
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block all TCHs
on the TRX in the underlaid subcell. In this step, set Administrative State to Unlock
(Unlock).
7. Use the MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell.
Expected result: You can obtain the call setup procedure by performing the operations
given in Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages on
the Abis Interface. You can learn that the call occupies a TCH on the TRX in the
overlaid subcell by running the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.
l Deactivation Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 48 Configuring Concentric Cell
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Cell IUO Type
to Normal_cell(Normal Cell).
----End
Example
//Activating Concentric Cell
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IUOTP=Concentric_cell, ENIUO=ON,
FLEXMAIO=OFF;
SET GTRXIUO: TRXID=0, IUO=UNDERLAIDOVERLAID;
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CONHOEN=YES;
SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ULTOOLHOALLOW=YES,
OLTOULHOALLOW=YES;
//Verifying Concentric Cell
//Configuring the underlaid subcell to be preferentially assigned
SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
OPTILAYER=USubcell;
//Making a call. Checking that the call occupies a channel of the
underlaid subcell
DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;
//Blocking the channel that the call occupies (assuming that channel 2 of
TRX 2047 is occupied)
SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=2047, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Lock;
//Checking that the call is successfully handed over to a channel of the
overlaid subcell
DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;
//Blocking TCHs of all the TRXs of the underlaid subcell
SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=2047, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Lock;
//Making a call. Checking that the call occupies a channel of the overlaid
subcell
DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;
//Unblocking TCHs of all the TRXs of the underlaid subcell
SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=2047, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Unlock;
//Configuring the overlaid subcell to be preferentially assigned
SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, OPTILAYER=OSubcell;
//Making a call Checking that the call occupies a channel of the overlaid
subcell
DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;
//Deactivating Concentric Cell
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IUOTP=Normal_cell;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 48 Configuring Concentric Cell
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
49 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114501
Co-BCCH Cell.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependency on Other Features
The feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell has been configured before this feature is
activated.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The BTS supports the configured frequency band.
Context
Co-BCCH cell increases the traffic capacity of a cell, reduces handovers and interference, and
supports continuous coverage and sparse coverage in hot spots.
A co-BCCH cell consists of an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell. The frequency band
configuration is as follows:
l If the overlaid subcell is configured to be work at DCS1800M, then the underlaid subcell
must be configured to be work at GSM900M or GSM850M.
l If the overlaid subcell is configured to work at PCS1900M, then the underlaid subcell must
be configured to work at GSM850M.
NOTE
The signal loss of DCS1800M changes with the transmission distance. At the distance of 0.5-1 km, the
signal power of DCS1800M is about 15 dB lower than the signal power of GSM900M.
The configuration of the co-BCCH cell must comply with the following principles:
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 49 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
l Generally, a channel in the overlaid subcell is not directly assigned to a call, an incoming
inter-cell handover request is not directly assigned to the overlaid subcell, and a call beyond
the coverage of the DCS1800M TRX is not assigned to the overlaid subcell.
l The traffic in the underlaid subcell and the overlaid subcell should be properly assigned to
implement traffic balance between the subcells.
l Generally, the GSM900M or GSM850M TRX is configured in the underlaid cell to expand
the coverage, whereas the DCS1800M or PCS1900M TRX is configured in the overlaid
cell to absorb the traffic. Generally, the BCCH is configured on the GSM900M TRX. The
priorities of different types of TRXs are: P-GSM > E-GSM > R-GSM.
l The SDCCH, PDCH, and BCCH should be configured on the same TRX.
l The frequency hopping between GSM900M and DCS1800M is not allowed. Frequency
hopping within the same frequency band is allowed.
l Avoid using a multi-layer concentric cell due to inconsistent combination modes of the
TRXs on the same frequency band. A multi-layer concentric cell affects the network KPIs,
such as handover success rate and assignment success rate.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Optional: When the frequency band of a cell is GSM850_1900, run the BSC6900
MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Support High Frequency
Band to PCS1900.
NOTE
If the frequency band of the cell to be added is GSM900_DCS1800 or GSM850_1800, perform
the following steps:
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add a cell and set the parameters
Freq. Band and BCCH IUO of Double Frequency Cell.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL to configure the concentric cell
attributes of the cell.
NOTE
After performing this step, run the MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO to set the handover
parameters for the concentric cell.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Assign
Optimum Layer to USubcell(Underlaid subcell).
2. Use an MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell.
NOTE
To facilitate the verification, ensure that only one call is made in the serving cell.
Expected result: You can obtain the call setup procedure by performing the operations
given in Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages on
the Abis Interface. You can learn that the call occupies a TCH on the TRX in the
underlaid subcell by running the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block the
channel that is occupied by the call. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock
(Lock).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 49 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
Expected result: You can learn that the call is handed over to another TCH on the TRX
in the underlaid subcell by using the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.
CAUTION
Setting Administrative State for the TRX to Lock(Lock) may cause congestion in
the cell where the TRX is located.
4. Repeat step 3 to block all available channels on the TRX in the underlaid subcell.
Expected result: You can learn that the call is handed over to another TCH on the TRX
in the overlaid subcell by using the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Assign
Optimum Layer to OSubcell(Overlaid subcell).
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block all TCHs
on the TRX in the underlaid subcell. In this step, set Administrative State to Unlock
(Unlock).
7. Use the MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell.
Expected result: You can obtain the call setup procedure by performing the operations
given in Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages on
the Abis Interface. You can learn that the call occupies a TCH on the TRX in the
overlaid subcell by running the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCELL to remove the co-BCCH cell to
be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activating Co-BCCH Cell
//Assuming that the cell ID is 2047
//Setting Support High Frequency Band to PCS1900
SET BSCBASIC: HiFreqBandSupport=PCS1900;
//Adding a co-BCCH cell with the frequency band set to GSM850_1900 and the
cell type set to concentric cell
ADD GCELL: CELLID=2047, CELLNAME="PCS1900", TYPE=GSM850_1900, MCC="460",
MNC="08", LAC=0808, CI=0001, IUOTP=Concentric_cell, ENIUO= OFF,
DBFREQBCCHIUO=Extra, FLEXMAIO=OFF;
//Modifying concentric cell attributes
MOD GCELL MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, IUOTP=Concentric_cell,
ENIUO=OFF;
//Setting the concentric cell handover algorithm to handover algorithm I
and allowing handover from the underlaid subcell to the overlaid subcell
SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
ULTOOLHOALLOW=YES;
//Verifying Co-BCCH Cell
//Configuring the underlaid subcell to be preferentially assigned
SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
OPTILAYER=USubcell;
//Making a call. Checking that the call occupies a channel of the
underlaid subcell
DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;
//Blocking the channel that the call occupies (assuming that channel 2 of
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 49 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
TRX 2047 is occupied)
SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=2047, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Lock;
//Checking that the call is successfully handed over to a channel of the
overlaid subcell
DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;
//Blocking TCHs of all the TRXs of the underlaid subcell
SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=2047, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Lock;
//Making a call. Checking that the call occupies a channel of the overlaid
subcell
DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;
//Unblocking TCHs of all the TRXs of the underlaid subcell
SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=2047, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Unlock;
//Configuring the overlaid subcell to be preferentially assigned
SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, OPTILAYER=OSubcell;
//Making a call Checking that the call occupies a channel of the overlaid
subcell
DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;
//Deactivating Co-BCCH Cell
//Removing the configured co-BCCH cell
RMV GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 49 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
50 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band
Network
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114402
Enhanced Dual-Band Network.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
The enhanced dual-band network is an improved version of the existing dual-band network. In
the enhanced dual-band network, two single-band cells at the same level and layer with different
coverage areas logically form a cell group with two bidirectional neighboring cells. One is an
overlaid subcell and the other is an underlaid subcell. In the enhanced dual-band network
algorithm, channel resources can be shared and cell load can be balanced between the two cells
in a cell group.
NOTE
l If the two cells belong to different operators, an enhanced dual-band network cannot be configured.
l Before changing the relationships between the cells and the operator, check whether an enhanced dual-
band network is configured. If an enhanced dual-band network is configured, modify the parameters
for the enhanced dual-band network.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 50 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
1. A GSM900 cell and a DCS1800 cell are configured in the BSS. Run the BSC6900
MML command ADD G2GNCELL to configure the GSM900 cell as a unidirectional
neighboring 2G cell of the DCS1800 cell.
2. Repeat Step 1 to configure the DCS1800 cell as a unidirectional neighboring 2G cell
of the GSM900 cell, so that the two cells are configured as bidirectional neighboring
cells of each other.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL to modify the parameters for the
GSM900 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to EDB_cell(Enhanced Double
Frequency Cell), Cell Inner/Extra Property to Extra(Extra), Same Group Cell
Index Type to BYID(By Index), and Same Group Cell Index to the index of the
DCS1800 cell.
l Verification Procedure
Verify the call access function in the enhanced dual-band network by performing the
following operations:
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set
ECSC to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set
Directed Retry of the two cells to YES(Yes).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA to set the
parameters for the GSM900 cell. In this step, set UL Subcell Assignment
Optimization to YES(Yes), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, UL
Subcell General Overload Threshold to 1, and both Distance Between
Boundaries of Subcells and Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries to 0. Set
Load HO Allowed and Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell to NO(No).
4. Make MS1 and MS2 (both supporting the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency
bands) camp on the GSM900 cell. Then, use MS1 to make a call to a fixed-line
phone. MS1 is assigned a channel in the GSM900 cell.
5. Maintain the call of MS1 and use MS2 to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the
GSM900 cell. MS2 is assigned a channel in the DCS1800 cell because the load of
the underlaid subcell is higher than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold.
This indicates that the call in the underlaid subcell can be assigned a channel in
the overlaid subcell when the traffic in the underlaid subcell is heavy and the signals
in the overlaid subcell are strong enough.
6. Terminate the calls. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters for the DCS1800 cell. In this step,
set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell Assignment
Optimization to YES(Yes), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 50, and UL
Subcell General Overload Threshold to 80.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL to set the parameters
for the DCS1800 cell. In this step, set Min Power Level For Directed Retry to
0.
8. Make MS1 camp on the DCS1800 cell and make a call. MS1 is assigned a channel
in the underlaid GSM900 subcell because the load of the underlaid subcell is not
higher than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold. This indicates that the call
in the overlaid subcell can be assigned a channel in the underlaid subcell when the
traffic in the underlaid subcell is light.
Verify the handover in the enhanced dual-band network by performing the following
operations:
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 50 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set the
parameters for enabling each type of handover to NO(No) and Edge HO DL
RX_LEV Threshold to 4.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA to set the
parameters for the DCS1800 cell. In this step. set UL Subcell Assignment
Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No),
UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 50, UL Subcell General Overload
Threshold to 80, Load HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Load HO of OL Subcell to
UL Subcell to YES(Yes), Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH to 10, and
Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 5.
3. Make MS1 camp on the DCS1800 cell and make a call to a fixed-line phone. MS1
is assigned a channel in the overlaid subcell. Then, MS1 is handed over to the
GSM900 cell because the load of the underlaid subcell is lower than UL Subcell
General Overload Threshold. On the A interface, the HANDOVER PERFORM
message is traced and the handover cause value in the message is traffic.
4. Keep the call alive. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters for the GSM900 cell. In this step.
set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell Assignment
Optimization to NO(No), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, UL Subcell
General Overload Threshold to 1, Load HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Load HO
of OL Subcell to UL Subcell to YES(Yes), Incoming OL Subcell HO Level
TH to 10, and Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 5.
5. The call is handed over from the GSM900 cell back to the DCS1800 cell because
the load in the underlaid subcell is higher than UL Subcell General Overload
Threshold. On the A interface, the HANDOVER PERFORM message is traced
and the handover cause value in the message is traffic.
6. Keep the call alive. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters for the DCS1800 cell. In this step.
set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell Assignment
Optimization to NO(No), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, UL Subcell
General Overload Threshold to 1, Load HO Allowed to NO(No), Load HO of
OL Subcell to UL Subcell to NO(No), Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH to
63, and Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 62. Set Inner Cell EDGE HO
Enable to YES(Yes).
7. MS1 is handed over to the GSM900 cell because the receive level of MS1 is lower
than Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH. On the A interface, the HANDOVER
PERFORM message is traced and the handover cause value in the message is
better cell.
NOTE
This type of edge handover requires that the underlaid subcell is more preferably selected as the target
cell for handover than the overlaid subcell. You can adjust the levels of the overlaid subcell and
underlaid subcell, so that the level of the underlaid subcell is higher than the level of the overlaid
subcell.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL to modify the parameters for the
GSM900 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal Cell).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL to modify the parameters for the
DCS1800 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal Cell).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G2GNCELL to remove the DCS1800 cell
from the neighboring cell list of the GSM900 cell.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 50 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G2GNCELL to remove the GSM900 cell
from the neighboring cell list of the DCS1800 cell.
----End
Example
//Activating Enhanced Dual-Band Network
ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, NBR2GNCELLID=2,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;
ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=2, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, IUOTP=EDB_cell, CELLINEXTP=Extra,
DBLFREQADJIDTYPE=BYID, DBLFREQADJCID=2;
//Deactivating Enhanced Dual-Band Network
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, IUOTP=Normal_cell;
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=2, IUOTP=Normal_cell;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 50 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
51 Configuring Flex MAIO
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117001
Flex Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO).
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
BTS3900B does not support this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete.
This feature depends on the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping,
baseband hopping).
This feature is mutually exclusive to the features GBFD-117002 IBCA, GBFD-118106
Dynamic Power Sharing and GBFD-115830 VAMOS.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
Frame offset is not configured for the BTS.
A cell is configured for frequency hopping, and the MAs list used by the same timeslot
have the same length.
Context
Under the BTSs with large capacity, adjacent-channel or co-channel interference is likely to
occur among channels because the frequency resources are insufficient and tight frequency reuse
is adopted. When dynamic MAIO is enabled, the MAIO value is dynamically adjusted according
to the current interference and the MAIO value with the minimum interference is assigned to
the channel. This reduces the adjacent-channel and co-channel interference in the GSM system.
It also achieves tight frequency reuse within the BTSs and therefore improves the system
capacity.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 51 Configuring Flex MAIO
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
CAUTION
l PS services provided by an external PCU do not support dynamic MAIO.
l Flex MAIO must be configured for all the cells under the same BTS, and the settings of flex
MAIO parameters must be the same in all the cells.
l Each cell can be configured with a maximum of two MAs. Flex MAIO cannot be enabled
simultaneously in both the overlaid cell and the underlaid cell.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL with Start Flex MAIO Switch
and HSN Modification Switch set to ON(On).
l Verification Procedure
1. Perform the single user CS trace by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages of a
Single Subscriber.
2. Make a call in the cell that is enabled with Flex MAIO.
3. View the hopping channel Information Element (IE) of the Channel Activation
message.
Expected result: The hopping channel IE carries a valid MAIO (not 255) and HSN
information.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL with Start Flex MAIO Switch
set to OFF(Off).
----End
Example
//Activating Flex MAIO
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FLEXMAIO=ON, HSNSW=ON;
//Deactivating Flex MAIO
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FLEXMAIO=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 51 Configuring Flex MAIO
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
52 Configuring ICC
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115801
ICC.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
Currently, the following BTSs support ICC: the BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C,
BTS3002E, BTS3900E GSM, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, BTS3900L GSM and
DBS3900 GSM.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
Interference Cancellation Combining (ICC) is a technology that combines signals of multiple
antennas to suppress interference. Generally, the interference received by different antennas is
generated by the same interference source. Thus, there are correlations between the interference
signals received by different antennas. ICC uses the correlations when combing signals to
eliminate some interference. In this way, ICC improves the anti-interference capability of
equipment and increases the uplink coverage and receiver sensitivity.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBTSSOFT to view the value of
software parameter No. 53.
2. If the value is an odd number, it indicates that the ICC function is enabled. Otherwise,
run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBTSSOFT to enable the ICC
function. In this step,
Set Item Index to 53.
Set Item Value to its current value plus one.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 52 Configuring ICC
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBTSSOFT to view the value of
software parameter No. 53.
Expected result: If the value is an odd number, it indicates that the ICC function is
enabled. Otherwise, the ICC function is disabled.
2. Perform an FTP service in the existing network and then view the upload rate. If the
ICC function is enabled, the upload rate is increased. If the ICC function is disabled,
the upload rate is decreased.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 52 Configuring ICC
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
53 Configuring EICC
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115821
EICC.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The BTS3012 that uses the QTRU, BTS3012AE that uses the QTRU, BTS3900E, and
BTS3900B do not support the feature.
The RRU3008 V1 and RRU3908 V1 do not support the feature when they are configured
with more than four carriers.
l Dependencies on Other Features
It is recommended that this feature be used together with the features GBFD-118201
Soft-Synchronized Network and GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization.
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-510101 Automatic
Frequency Correction (AFC).
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
l The interference between signals received by multiple antennas has both spatial correlation
and temporal correlation: co-channel interference (CCI) and intersymbol interference (ISI).
ICC eliminates these two types of interference independently. EICC, however, considers
the correlation of these two types of interference and constructs the multidimensional
combining coefficient matrix to combine the signals according to the maximum signal-to-
noise ratio (SNR) criteria. In this way, EICC achieves better uplink signals.
l EICC requires the matrix of interference, which is calculated on the basis of the training
sequence of desired signals. For each receive signal, the network estimates a channel model
based on the training sequence of the signal, reconstructs the desired signal, and subtracts
the desired signal from the receive signal to obtain the interference signal. By doing so, the
network estimates the matrix of each interference signal and analyzes the statistical
dependency of these interference signals. Based on the statistical dependency, some
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 53 Configuring EICC
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
interference is eliminated during the combination of receive signals to maximize
combination gains.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT to enable EICC for a cell. In
this step, set EICC Allowed to YES(Yes).
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLSOFT to query the value of EICC
Allowed.
2. Perform an FTP upload in a live network with interference. Then, check the upload
rate. If the EICC function is enabled, the upload rate increases. If the EICC function
is disabled, the upload rate decreases.
3. Make a call in a live network with interference. Then, check the counters related to
uplink receive quality on the M2000 in the following way: Choose Performance >
Query Result from the menu bar. In the displayed window, click New Query. The
Query Result window is displayed. Navigate to BSC6900 GSM > MR
Measurement > Receive Quality Measurement per TRX. Then, check the value of
the counter Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF(Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) and
calculate the proportion of this counter to the sum of Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF
(Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) through Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF(Mean
Receive Quality Rank 7). If the EICC function is enabled, the proportion is high,
indicating that the speech quality is good. If the EICC function is disabled, the
proportion is low, indicating that the speech quality is poor.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT to disable EICC for a cell.
In this step, set EICC Allowed to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating EICC
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STIRCALLOWED=YES;
//Verifying EICC
LST GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;
//Deactivating EICC
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STIRCALLOWED=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 53 Configuring EICC
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
175
54 Configuring VAMOS
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115830
VAMOS.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
Only the MRRU/GRRU and MRFU/GRFU of 3900 series base stations support
VAMOS.
The VAMOS-capable MS is classified into Non-SAIC, SAIC, VAMOS level I, and
VAMOS level II. At present, VAMOS level I and VAMOS level II MSs are not available
for commercial use.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-117501 Enhanced
Measurement Report(EMR), GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-117002 IBCA,
GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell, GBFD-114001 Extended Cell, GBFD-113521 A5/1
Encryption Flow Optimization, GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch, GBFD-117701 BSC
Local Switch or GBFD-510101 Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC).
In A over IP mode, the configurations of the features on which this feature depends are
complete. This feature depends on the features GBFD-117601 Configuring HUAWEI
III Power Control Algorithm, GBFD-115502 AMR HR / GBFD-113401 Configuring
Half Rate Speech (HR), GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC, and GBFD-117301
Flex Abis.
In A over TDM mode, the configurations of the features on which this feature depends
are complete. This feature depends on the features GBFD-117601 Configuring
HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm, GBFD-115502 AMR HR/GBFD-113401
Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR), GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC, and
GBFD-118601 Configuring Abis over IP / GBFD-118611 Configuring Abis IP over
E1/T1.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 54 Configuring VAMOS
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
VAMOS supports the following transmission modes over the Abis interface: TDM in
Flex Abis mode, Ethernet IP, IP over E1, and high level data link control (HDLC).
Context
CAUTION
If VAMOS is enabled only in some cells controlled by the BSC, and Mute SAIC Terminal
Processing Switch or Problem SAIC Terminal Processing Switch is set to ON(On),
multiplexing may not be performed when a call is handed over from a cell not enabled with
VAMOS to a cell enabled with VAMOS because the IMEI of the MS is not obtained. This affects
the VAMOS traffic volume. Therefore, it is recommended that the BSS identification function
be enabled to obtain the IMEI of an MS. To enable this function, run the BSC6900 MML
command SET IDRQTEST. In this steps, set BSS Identity Request Initiation to ON(Switch
On) , Time for BSS Identity Request to 65535 , Single-User Tracing Mode to
SNDONEIDRQ(Send An IDENTITY REQUEST Message) , and MS Identity Type for
Single-User Tracing to IMEI(IMEI).
Voice service over Adaptive Multi-user channels on One Slot (VAMOS) aims to expand the
capacity of a GSM network without adding TRXs or frequencies. Without adding any
configurations, VAMOS increases the traffic volume.
Although VAMOS expands the network capacity and reduces the network congestion rate, it
affects the voice quality and deteriorates some other KPIs. Therefore, it is recommended that
the Half-Rate Service feature be enabled preferentially to expand network capacity and VAMOS
be enabled only when network capacity needs to be further expanded. VAMOS is not
recommended for users sensitive to voice quality.
VAMOS is applicable to scenarios with loose frequency reuse.
VAMOS deteriorates voice quality and causes interference to the entire network. Therefore, it
is recommended that VAMOS multiplexing be enabled to increase network capacity when
channels are congested in a cell and VAMOS demultiplexing be enabled to improve voice quality
when the cell load is low.
Call drops may occur if users dynamically add a carrier in a network where the VAMOS feature
has been enabled. Therefore, it is recommended that users perform this operation in low traffic
hours.
VAMOS multiplexing is classified into:
l VAMOS multiplexing during assignment
l VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover
VAMOS demultiplexing is classified into:
l VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load
l VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
Activating VAMOS multiplexing during assignment
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 54 Configuring VAMOS
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3, In this step, set III
Power Control Optimized Enable to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set
VAMOS Switch to ON(On), set Allow Channel Multiplex in Assignment to
ON(On), set Primary TSC in VAMOS and Secondary TSC in VAMOS to
appropriate values.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set Waiting
for MR on SDCCH Switch to ON(On).
Activating VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3, In this step, set III
Power Control Optimized Enable to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set
VAMOS Switch to ON(On), set Allow Channel Multiplex via In-Cell HO to
ON(On), set Primary TSC in VAMOS and Secondary TSC in VAMOS to
appropriate values.
Activating VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3, In this step, set III
Power Control Optimized Enable to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set
VAMOS Switch to ON(On), set Channel Demultiplex on Low Cell Load to
ON(On), set Primary TSC in VAMOS and Secondary TSC in VAMOS to
appropriate values.
Activating VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3, In this step, set III
Power Control Optimized Enable to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set
VAMOS Switch to ON(On), set Channel Demultiplex on Bad Qual. to ON
(On), set Primary TSC in VAMOS and Secondary TSC in VAMOS to
appropriate values.
l Verification Procedure
Verifying VAMOS multiplexing during assignment
Assume that there are idle half-rate traffic channels (TCHHs) in cell 0, both MS1 and
MS2 support SAIC, the Abis interface uses IP transmission, and the BTS supports
VAMOS.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set
TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0 and AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed to OFF
(Off),set Load of UL-OL Cells Rate Select Allowed to NO(No).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set
both Ratio of TCHH and Ratio of AMR-HR to 100.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set TCH
Rate Modify to YES(Yes).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set
VAMOS Switch to ON(On), Allow Channel Multiplex in Assignment to ON
(On), Channel Multiplex Load Thres. to 0, Channel Multiplex ATCB Thres.
Offset in Asgmt. to 0, ATCB Thres. of Established SAIC Calls to 1, Channel
Multiplex Rx Qual. Thres. Offset in Asgmt. to 0, UL Rx Qual. Thres. of
Established Calls to 70, DL Rx Qual. Thres. of Established Calls to 70, and
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 54 Configuring VAMOS
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
Path Loss Offset Thres. of VAMOS Call to 63, Load Thres. in Overlaid
Subcell to 0, and set ATCB Offset in Overlaid Subcell to 128.
5. Start channel status monitoring in cell 0. Figure 54-1 shows the TCHH status in
cell 0.
Figure 54-1 TCHH status 1

6. Use MS1 and MS2 to call each other in cell 0.
7. Check the TCHH status in cell 0.
Expected result: Calls are established successfully and the voice quality is good. MS1
and MS2 are multiplexed on the same TCHH. Figure 54-2 shows the possible TCHH
status in cell 0.
Figure 54-2 TCHH status 2

Verifying VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover
Assume that there are idle TCHHs in cell 0, both MS1 and MS2 support SAIC, the Abis
interface uses IP transmission, and the BTS supports VAMOS.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set
TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0 and AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed to OFF
(Off).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set
both Ratio of TCHH and Ratio of AMR-HR to 100.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set TCH
Rate Modify to YES(Yes).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set
VAMOS Switch to ON(On), Channel Multiplex Load Thres. to 0, ATCB
Thres. of Established SAIC Calls to 1, UL Rx Qual. Thres. of Established
Calls to 70, DL Rx Qual. Thres. of Established Calls to 70, and Path Loss Offset
Thres. of VAMOS Call to 63.
5. Start channel status monitoring in cell 0. Figure 54-3 shows the TCHH status in
cell 0.
Figure 54-3 TCHH status 1
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 54 Configuring VAMOS
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179

6. Use MS1 and MS2 to call each other in cell 0.
7. Check the TCHH status in cell 0.
Expected result: Calls are established successfully and the voice quality is good.
MS1 and MS2 occupy their respective TCHHs during call establishment. Figure
54-4 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0.
Figure 54-4 TCHH status 2

8. Several seconds later, MS1 and MS2 are multiplexed on the same TCHH. Figure
54-5 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0.
Figure 54-5 TCHH status 3

Verifying VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load
Assume that there are idle TCHHs in cell 0, both MS1 and MS2 support SAIC, the Abis
interface uses IP transmission, and the BTS supports VAMOS.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set
TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0 and AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed to OFF
(Off).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set
both Ratio of TCHH and Ratio of AMR-HR to 100.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set TCH
Rate Modify to YES(Yes).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set both
VAMOS Switch and Channel Demultiplex on Low Cell Load to ON(On) and
set Load Thres. of Channel Demultiplex to 100.
5. Start channel status monitoring in cell 0. Figure 54-6 shows the TCHH status in
cell 0.
Figure 54-6 TCHH status 1
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 54 Configuring VAMOS
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180

6. Use MS1 and MS2 to call each other in cell 0.
7. Check the TCHH status in cell 0.
Expected result: Calls are established successfully and the voice quality is good.
MS1 and MS2 occupy their respective TCHHs during call establishment. Figure
54-7 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0.
Figure 54-7 TCHH status 2

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO to trigger a VAMOS multiplexing
handover of an MS. Then, check the TCHH status. Figure 54-8 shows the possible
TCHH status in cell 0.
Figure 54-8 TCHH status 3

9. Check the TCHH status in cell 0 a few seconds later. Figure 54-9 shows the
possible TCHH status in cell 0.
Figure 54-9 TCHH status 4

Expected result: After VAMOS multiplexing through handover is performed
successfully, MS1 and MS2 are multiplexed on the same TCHH. Several seconds
later, VAMOS demultiplexing is triggered and MS1 and MS2 occupy their
respective TCHHs.
Verifying VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality
Assume that there are idle TCHHs in cell 0, both MS1 and MS2 support SAIC, the Abis
interface uses IP transmission, and the BTS supports VAMOS.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set
TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0 and AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed to OFF
(Off).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set
both Ratio of TCHH and Ratio of AMR-HR to 100.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 54 Configuring VAMOS
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set TCH
Rate Modify to YES(Yes).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set both
VAMOS Switch and Channel Demultiplex on Bad Qual. to ON(On) and set
both UL RX Bad Qual. Demultiplex Thres. and DL RX Bad Qual. Demultiplex
Thres. to 0.
5. Start channel status monitoring in cell 0. Figure 54-10 shows the TCHH status in
cell 0.
Figure 54-10 TCHH status 1

6. Use MS1 and MS2 to call each other in cell 0.
7. Check the TCHH status in cell 0.
Expected result: Calls are established successfully and the voice quality is good.
MS1 and MS2 occupy their respective TCHHs during call establishment. Figure
54-11 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0.
Figure 54-11 TCHH status 2

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO to trigger a VAMOS multiplexing
handover of an MS. Then, check the TCHH status. Figure 54-12 shows the
possible TCHH status in cell 0.
Figure 54-12 TCHH status 3

9. Check the TCHH status in cell 0 a few seconds later. Figure 54-13 shows the
possible TCHH status in cell 0.
Figure 54-13 TCHH status 4
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 54 Configuring VAMOS
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182

Expected result: After VAMOS multiplexing through handover is performed
successfully, MS1 and MS2 are multiplexed on the same TCHH. Several seconds
later, VAMOS demultiplexing is triggered and MS1 and MS2 occupy their
respective TCHHs.
l Deactivation Procedure
Deactivating VAMOS multiplexing during assignment
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set
VAMOS Switch to ON(On) and Allow Channel Multiplex in Assignment to
OFF(Off).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set
VAMOS Switch to OFF(Off).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set Waiting
for MR on SDCCH Switch to OFF(Off).
Deactivating VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set
VAMOS Switch to ON(On) and Allow Channel Multiplex via In-Cell HO to
OFF(Off).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set
VAMOS Switch to OFF(Off).
Deactivating VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set
VAMOS Switch to ON(On) and Channel Demultiplex on Low Cell Load to
OFF(Off).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set
VAMOS Switch to OFF(Off).
Deactivating VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set
VAMOS Switch to ON(On) and Channel Demultiplex on Bad Qual. to OFF
(Off).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set
VAMOS Switch to OFF(Off).
----End
Example
//Activating VAMOS multiplexing during assignment
SET GCELLPWR3: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRCTRLOPTIMIZEDEN=YES;
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON,
VamosAssSwitch=ON,VamosMainTsc=0, VamosSubTsc=2;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SDCCHWaitMREn=ON;
//Verifying VAMOS multiplexing during assignment
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, TCHBUSYTHRES=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=OFF;
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ALLOWHALFRATEUSERPERC=100,
ALLOWAMRHALFRATEUSERPERC=100;
SET OTHSOFTPARA: TCHRATEMODIFY=YES;
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, TCHBUSYTHRES=0;
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosAssSwitch=ON,
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 54 Configuring VAMOS
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
VamosMultLoadThd=0, VamosAssMultAtcbOffset=0, VamosAssUlQualThdOffset=0,
VamosIntraHoSaicAtcbThd=1, VamosIntraHoUlQualThd=70,
VamosIntraHoDlQualThd=70, VamosPathLossMaxDiffValue=63;
//Deactivating VAMOS multiplexing during assignment
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON,
VamosAssSwitch=OFF;
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=OFF;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SDCCHWaitMREn=OFF;
//Activating VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover
SET GCELLPWR3: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRCTRLOPTIMIZEDEN=YES;
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON,
VamosIntraHoSwitch=ON,VamosMainTsc=0, VamosSubTsc=2;
//Verifying VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, TCHBUSYTHRES=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=OFF;
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ALLOWHALFRATEUSERPERC=100,
ALLOWAMRHALFRATEUSERPERC=100;
SET OTHSOFTPARA: TCHRATEMODIFY=YES;
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, TCHBUSYTHRES=0;
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON,
VamosMultLoadThd=0, VamosIntraHoSwitch=ON, VamosIntraHoSaicAtcbThd=1,
VamosIntraHoUlQualThd=70, VamosIntraHoDlQualThd=70,
VamosPathLossMaxDiffValue=63;
//Deactivating VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON,
VamosIntraHoSwitch=OFF;
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=OFF;
//Activating VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load
SET GCELLPWR3: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRCTRLOPTIMIZEDEN=YES;
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON,
VamosLoadReuseSwitch=ON,VamosMainTsc=0, VamosSubTsc=2;
//Verifying VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, TCHBUSYTHRES=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=OFF;
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ALLOWHALFRATEUSERPERC=100,
ALLOWAMRHALFRATEUSERPERC=100;
SET OTHSOFTPARA: TCHRATEMODIFY=YES;
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON,
VamosLoadReuseSwitch=ON, VamosLoadReuseLoadThd=100;
//Deactivating VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON,
VamosLoadReuseSwitch=OFF;
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=OFF;
//Activating VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality
SET GCELLPWR3: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRCTRLOPTIMIZEDEN=YES;
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON,
VamosQualReuseSwitch=ON,VamosMainTsc=0, VamosSubTsc=2;
//Verifying VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, TCHBUSYTHRES=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=OFF;
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ALLOWHALFRATEUSERPERC=100,
ALLOWAMRHALFRATEUSERPERC=100;
SET OTHSOFTPARA: TCHRATEMODIFY=YES;
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON,
VamosQualReuseSwitch=ON, VamosQualReuseDownLinkQualThd=0,
VamosQualReuseUpLinkQualThd=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 54 Configuring VAMOS
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
//Deactivating VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON,
VamosQualReuseSwitch=OFF;
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 54 Configuring VAMOS
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
55 Configuring Mute SAIC MS
Identification
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115831
Mute SAIC MS Identification.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete.
This feature depends on GBFD-115830 VAMOS.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
VAMOS aims to expand the GSM network capacity without adding TRXs or frequencies. Mute
SAIC MSs are the MSs that support SAIC but report Non-SAIC in CLASSMARK3. A non-
SAIC MS can only be multiplexed with a VAMOS Level II MS. However, VAMOS level II
MSs are not available for commercial use at present. To improve VAMOS multiplexing rate,
Huawei BSC provides an effective detection mechanism to identify the Mute SAIC MSs.
A database is created at the BSC to record whether an MS is a Mute SAIC MS. The BSC
differentiates Mute SAIC MSs from Non-SAIC MSs upon channel allocation.
The Mute VAMOS MS Identification is applicable in scenarios with loose frequency reuse and
limited network capacity. The MS may drop off when the BSC When the Mute SAIC MS
identification is enabled, call drops may occur during detection of SAIC-capable MSs.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set Mute
SAIC Terminal Processing Switch to ON(On) and set Abnormal Average RX
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 55 Configuring Mute SAIC MS Identification
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
Qual Times Threshold to an appropriate value. Note that the value of Abnormal
Average RX Qual Times Threshold must be smaller than or equal to the value of
Periods for Auto Mute SAIC Identify.
NOTE
When the value of Periods for Auto Mute SAIC Identify is fixed, an MS is easier to be
determined as a Mute SAIC MS when the value of Abnormal Average RX Qual Times
Threshold is greater. It is recommended that Abnormal Average RX Qual Times
Threshold be set to 1 when Periods for Auto Mute SAIC Identify uses the default value 3.
l Verification Procedure
Assume that there are idle TCHHs in cell 0, the Abis interface uses IP transmission, the
BTS supports VAMOS, and MS 1 and MS 2 are Mute SAIC MSs.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS with the following
parameter settings: VAMOS Switch set to ON(On), Allow Channel Multiplex via
In-Cell HO set to ON(On), Channel Multiplex Load Thres. set to 0, ATCB Thres.
of Established SAIC Calls set to 1, UL Rx Qual. Thres. of Established Calls set
to 70, DL Rx Qual. Thres. of Established Calls set to 70, and Path Loss Offset
Thres. of VAMOS Call set to 63.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD with TCH Traffic Busy
Threshold set to 0.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV with TCH Rate Adjust
Allow set to YES(Yes).
4. View the International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) on the back of each MS or
input *#06# on each MS to display their respective IMEIs. The MS model and origin
comprise the initial 8-digit portion of the IMEI, known as type approval code (TAC).
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GMSSAICCAP to set MS 1 as a Mute SAIC
MS with TAC set to the initial eight digits of the IMEI, Mute SAIC Flag set to YES
(Yes), and Problem SAIC Flag set to UNCERTAIN(Uncertain).
NOTE
If you are not sure whether an MS is a problem SAIC MS, set Problem SAIC Flag to
UNCERTAIN(Uncertain).
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GMSSAICCAP to set MS 2 as a Mute SAIC
MS with TAC set to the initial eight digits of the IMEI, Mute SAIC Flag set to YES
(Yes), and Problem SAIC Flag set to UNCERTAIN(Uncertain).
7. Start channel status monitoring in cell 0. Figure 55-1 shows the TCHH status in cell
0.
Figure 55-1 TCHH status 1

8. Use MS 1 and MS 2 to call each other in cell 0.
9. Observe the TCHH status in cell 0. MS 1 and MS 2 occupy their respective TCHHs.
Figure 55-2 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 55 Configuring Mute SAIC MS Identification
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
Figure 55-2 TCHH status 2

10. Check whether two MSs are multiplexed a few seconds later. Figure 55-3 shows the
possible TCHH status in cell 0 after multiplexing.
Figure 55-3 TCHH status 3

11. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS with VAMOS Switch set
to ON(On) and Mute SAIC Terminal Processing Switch set to OFF(Off).
12. Run Step 8 through Step 10 again. The two MSs cannot be multiplexed.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS with VAMOS Switch set
to ON(On) and Mute SAIC Terminal Processing Switch set to OFF(Off).
----End
Example
//Activating Mute SAIC MS identification
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, MuteSaicSwitch=ON;
//Verifying Mute SAIC MS identification
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON,
VamosMultLoadThd=0, VamosIntraHoSwitch=ON, VamosIntraHoSaicAtcbThd=1,
VamosIntraHoUlQualThd=70, VamosIntraHoDlQualThd=70,
VamosPathLossMaxDiffValue=63;
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, TCHBUSYTHRES=0;
SET GTRXDEV: TCHAJFLAG=YES;
ADD GMSSAICCAP: TAC="11111111", MuteSAICFlag=YES,
ProSAICFlag=NOT_ALLOWED;
ADD GMSSAICCAP: TAC="22222222", MuteSAICFlag=YES,
ProSAICFlag=NOT_ALLOWED;
//Deactivating Mute SAIC MS identification
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, MuteSaicSwitch=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 55 Configuring Mute SAIC MS Identification
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
56 Configuring VAMOS Call Drop
Solution
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115832
VAMOS Call Drop Solution.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
The feature GBFD-115830 VAMOS has been configured before this feature is
activated.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
VAMOS aims to expand the GSM network capacity without adding TRXs or frequencies. Test
results, however, indicate that call drops are likely to occur after SAIC-capable MSs are
multiplexed with other MSs. To obtain the desired capacity gain through VAMOS, the BSC
provides a mechanism to identify defective SAIC-capable MSs so that these MSs can be
multiplexed with other suitable MSs based on support capability. In addition, the BSC uses a
power control policy specific to defective SAIC-capable MSs to ensure speech quality.
A database is created at the BSC to record whether the MSs under the BSC have defects in SAIC.
All the MSs under the BSC are classified into three types: defective SAIC-capable MSs that
cannot use VAMOS, defective SAIC-capable MSs that can use VAMOS but require alpha
hopping modulation, and normal SAIC-capable MSs that can use VAMOS but require alpha-
QPSK modulation. Before allocating a channel to an MS, the BSC determines the MS type and
the required modulation scheme by checking the records in the database.
The VAMOS call drop solution is applicable in scenarios with loose frequency reuse and limited
network capacity.When the VAMOS call drop solution is enabled, call drops may occur during
detection of SAIC-capable MSs with AFC defects.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 56 Configuring VAMOS Call Drop Solution
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set Problem
SAIC Terminal Processing Switch to ON(On) and set Faulty SAIC MS Mean RX
Qual Abnor Thres to an appropriate value. Note that the value of Faulty SAIC MS
Mean RX Qual Abnor Thres must be smaller than or equal to the value of Auto
Identify Periods for Faulty SAIC MS.
NOTE
When the value of Auto Identify Periods for Faulty SAIC MS is fixed, an MS is easier to be
determined as a defective SAIC-capable MS that can use VAMOS but require alpha hopping
modulation when the value of Faulty SAIC MS Mean RX Qual Abnor Thres is greater. It
is recommended that Faulty SAIC MS Mean RX Qual Abnor Thres be set to 1 when Auto
Identify Periods for Faulty SAIC MS uses the default value 3.
l Verification Procedure
Assume that there are idle TCHHs in cell 0, IP transmission is used over the Abis interface,
the BTS supports VAMOS, and MS1 and MS2 are SAIC-capable but MS2 has defects in
SAIC.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set VAMOS
Switch to ON(On) and Problem SAIC Terminal Processing Switch to OFF(Off).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set TCH
Traffic Busy Threshold to 0.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set TCH Rate
Adjust Allow to YES(Yes).
4. Initiate channel status monitoring in cell 0. Figure 56-1 shows the TCHH status in
cell 0.
Figure 56-1 TCHH status 1

5. Use MS1 and MS2 to call each other in cell 0.
6. Check the TCHH status in cell 0. MS1 and MS2 occupy their respective TCHHs.
Figure 56-2 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0.
Figure 56-2 TCHH status 2

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO to hand over an MS for VAMOS
multiplexing. MS1 and MS2 are multiplexed on the same TCHH. Figure 56-3 shows
the possible TCHH status in cell 0.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 56 Configuring VAMOS Call Drop Solution
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
Figure 56-3 TCHH status 3

8. A call drop occurs on defective SAIC-capable MS2 a few seconds later.
9. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set both
VAMOS Switch and Problem SAIC Terminal Processing Switch to ON(On).
10. View the International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) on the back of each MS or
input *#06# on each MS to display their respective IMEIs. The MS model comprises
the initial 8-digit portion of the IMEI, known as type approval code (TAC).
11. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GMSSAICCAP to set MS1 as a normal
SAIC-capable MS. In this step, set TAC to the first eight digits of the IMEI of MS1,
Mute SAIC Flag to NOTINVOLVED(Not involved), and Problem SAIC Flag to
NO(No).
12. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GMSSAICCAP to set MS2 as a defective
SAIC-capable MS. In this step, set TAC to the first eight digits of the IMEI of MS2,
Mute SAIC Flag to NOTINVOLVED(Not involved), and Problem SAIC Flag to
YES(Yes).
13. Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 to multiplex MS1 and MS2 on the same TCHH. MS2
does not experience a call drop.
Expected result: When Problem SAIC Flag is set to NO(No), a call drop occurs in
MS2 after being multiplexed with normal SAIC-capable MS1. When Problem SAIC
Flag is set to YES(Yes), MS2 does not experience a call drop after being multiplexed
with normal SAIC-capable MS1.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set VAMOS
Switch to ON(On) and Problem SAIC Terminal Processing Switch to OFF(Off).
----End
Example
//Activating VAMOS Call Drop Solution
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON,
SaicProMsSwitch=ON;
//Verifying VAMOS Call Drop Solution
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON,
SaicProMsSwitch=OFF;
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, TCHBUSYTHRES=0;
SET GTRXDEV: TCHAJFLAG=YES;
SET FHO: OBJTYPE=CHN, TRXID=0, CHNO=1, HOMOD=VAMOSREUSE, SUBCHNO=0,
DESTTRXID=1, DESTCHNO=7, DESTSUBCHNO=0;
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON,
SaicProMsSwitch=ON;
ADD GMSSAICCAP: TAC="11111111", MuteSAICFlag=NO, ProSAICFlag=NOTINVOLVED;
ADD GMSSAICCAP: TAC="22222222", MuteSAICFlag=NOTINVOLVED,
ProSAICFlag=JUMP_ALPHA;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 56 Configuring VAMOS Call Drop Solution
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
//Deactivating VAMOS Call Drop Solution
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON,
SaicProMsSwitch=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 56 Configuring VAMOS Call Drop Solution
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
57 Configuring Frequency Hopping (RF
hopping, baseband hopping)
This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-113701 Frequency
Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping).
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The BTS3900B does not support this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
Baseband hopping is mutually exclusive with the following features:
GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass
GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type
GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity
GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT (Power Boost Technology)
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
In baseband FH mode, all carriers in a baseband FH group in a cell must be in transmit
diversity mode, or none of the carriers can be in transmit diversity mode.
Context
FH can simplify frequency planning, reduce interference, improve voice quality, and increase
system capacity.
When the PS services use coding schemes of high rate such as CS3, CS4, and MCS5 through
MCS9, the application of FH will exert negative impact on the PS services. In this case, enabling
FH is not recommended.
When the cell activation state is Active, the FH feature can be configured quickly.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide
57 Configuring Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband
hopping)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP to add a FH group. In
this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index, Hop Index,
Hop Mode, and Frequency.
NOTE
Set Hop Mode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband FH) or RF_FH(RF FH) as required.
If the BCCH participates in baseband FH, the cell must be configured with at least two FH
groups.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to set the FH type of the
cell. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index and
Frequency Hopping Mode.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In
this step, set TRX ID and Hop Type.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP. In this step, set
Channel Hop Index and Channel MAIO.
NOTE
When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXs
must be different.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell.
l Procedure for Quick Activation
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP to quickly set
the frequency hopping of the cell. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index),
and then set Cell Index. Set Frequency Hopping Mode, and then set Frequency
Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX and TRXID LST.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP. In this step,
set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index. Set Frequency Hopping
Mode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping) and Frequency Hopping
Mode of BCCH TRX to Hop(Hop).
2. Use the MS to initiate a call in the cell to be verified. The call is initiated successfully
and the voice quality is good. In the Um interface CS tracing window, the Assignment
Command message is traced, and the value of the information element (IE) h:rf-
hopping-channel in the message is 1.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
DEA GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;
ADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPINDEX=0, HOPMODE=BaseBand_FH,
FREQ1=1, FREQ2=11;
SET GCELLHOPTP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH;
SET GTRXHOP: TRXID=0, HOPTYPE=BaseBand_FH;
SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, TRXHOPINDEX=0, TRXMAIO=1;
ACT GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide
57 Configuring Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband
hopping)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
//Verification procedure
SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH,
BCCHTRXHP=Hop, TRXIDLST="0";
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide
57 Configuring Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband
hopping)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
58 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency
Hopping
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113702
BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The BTS3900B does not support this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
The feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping) has been
configured before this feature is activated.
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping
(RF hopping).
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
Frequency hopping (FH) can simplify frequency planning, reduce interference, improve voice
quality, and increase system capacity.
When PS services use higher order coding schemes such as CS3, CS4, and MCS-5 through
MCS-9, the application of FH has a negative impact on the PS services. In this case, enabling
FH is not recommended.
When the cell activation state is Active, BCCH carrier FH can be activated quickly.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell.
2. To configure more FH groups and include the BCCH frequencies to the FH groups,
run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP for each FH group you
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 58 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
want to add. In this step, set Hop Mode to BaseBand_FH(BaseBand FH) and Cell
Index, Hop Index, and Frequency to appropriate values.
NOTE
To enable the BCCH TRX to participate in FH, at least two FH groups need to be configured
with one FH group containing the BCCH frequency.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to set the FH type of a cell
to baseband FH. In this step, set Cell Index and Hop Mode to appropriate values.
4. To configure more frequencies and set the FH type of the TRXs participating in FH
(including the BCCH TRX) to baseband FH, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GTRXHOP for each frequency you want to set. In this step, set TRX ID and Hop
Type to appropriate values.
5. To configure more channels and set the FH index and mobile allocation index offset
(MAIO) of the channels, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GTRXCHANHOP for each channel you want to set. In this step, set Channel Hop
Index and Channel MAIO to appropriate values.
NOTE
l When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXs
must be different.
l Channel 0 on the BCCH TRX does not participate in FH, and therefore its FH index should
be set to 255.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell.
NOTE
In addition to the preceding activation procedure, you can quickly activate this feature by performing
the following step:
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP to quickly set FH for a cell.
In this step, set Cell Index, Frequency Hopping Mode, Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH
TRX, and TRXID LST (which contains the BCCH TRX ID) to appropriate values.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP. In this step,
set Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified, Frequency Hopping Mode to
BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping), and Frequency Hopping Mode of
BCCH TRX to Hop(Hop).
2. Use the MS to initiate a call in the cell to be verified. The call is initiated successfully
and the voice quality is good. In the Um interface CS tracing window, the Assignment
Command message is traced, and the value of the information element (IE) h:rf-
hopping-channel in the message is 1.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activating BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping
DEA GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;
//Configuring FH groups and setting FREQ2 to the BCCH frequency
ADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPINDEX=0, HOPMODE=BaseBand_FH,
FREQ1=1, FREQ2=11, FREQ2=12;
ADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPINDEX=1, HOPMODE=BaseBand_FH,
FREQ1=1,FREQ3=12;
SET GCELLHOPTP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 58 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
//Running the follow command for all TRXs participating in FH
SET GTRXHOP: TRXID=0, HOPTYPE=BaseBand_FH;
//Running the follow command to set the channels of all TRXs participating
in FH
SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=1;
ACT GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;
//Verifying BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping
SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH,
BCCHTRXHP=Hop, TRXIDLST="0";
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 58 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
59 Configuring Antenna Frequency
Hopping
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113703
Antenna Frequency Hopping.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The base station is a double-transceiver base station or a 3900 series base station.
There are at lease two antennas in a cell participating in antenna frequency hopping.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
Antenna frequency hopping enables downlink data on each TRX to be randomly transmitted on
other TRXs. This improves receive quality of the MS from the BCCH TRX and transmit quality
of the BCCH TRX, thereby improving network performance.
If a cell supports both baseband frequency hopping and antenna frequency hopping, the TRX
involved in baseband frequency hopping must also participate in antenna frequency hopping.
When the cell is active, the antenna frequency hopping feature can be configured quickly.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPANT. In this step, set Cell
Antenna Hopping to YES_HPANT(Yes).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 59 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLHOPANTGRP to configure
antenna frequency hopping. In this step, set Index Type and Hop TRX Group
Index to appropriate values.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.
l Quick Configuration Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPANTQUICKSETUP to
quickly configure antenna frequency hopping. In this step, set Index Type and Cell
Antenna Hopping to appropriate values.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOPANT to query Cell Antenna
Hopping.
Expected result: Cell Antenna Hopping is set to YES_HPANT(Yes).
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPANT. In this step, set Cell
Antenna Hopping to NO_HPANT(No).
NOTE
When the cell is active, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GCELLHOPANTQUICKSETUP. In this step, set Cell Antenna Hopping to NO_HPANT(No).
----End
Example
//Activating Antenna Frequency Hopping
DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
SET GCELLHOPANT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HPANTMODE=YES_HPANT;
ADD GCELLHOPANTGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPTRXINDEX=0, TRXID1=1,
TRXID2=2;
ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
//Verifying Antenna Frequency Hopping
LST GCELLHOPANT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;
//Deactivating Antenna Frequency Hopping
SET GCELLHOPANT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HPANTMODE=NO_HPANT;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 59 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
60 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency
Multiplexing
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118001
BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell or
GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
The BCCH dense frequency multiplexing technique is used in networks with limited frequency
resources. It helps to reduce the number of frequencies occupied by the BCCH TRXs so that
more frequencies can be used as TCHs, increasing the system capacity.
NOTE
If BCCH dense frequency multiplexing is applied with the increase of the cell load, the handover from a
non-BCCH TRX to the BCCH TRX will be triggered, leading to the increase on the handover of the entire
network.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set
TIGHT BCCH Switch to ON(On).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 60 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set Level
Thresh. for Assign BCCH Udr TBCCH and Quality Thresh. for Assign BCCH
Udr TBCCH based on the site requirements.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set Load
Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO to an appropriate value.
l Verification Procedure
1. Make a call in the cell configured with this feature.
Expected result: The call is successfully set up and the voice quality is good.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT. In this step, set Object Type
to CELL(Cell) and Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified.
Expected result: The value of Sub Channel Status is Working.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set
TIGHT BCCH Switch to OFF(Off).
----End
Example
//Activating BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TIGHTBCCHSWITCH=ON;
//Deactivating BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TIGHTBCCHSWITCH=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 60 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
61 Configuring IBCA
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117002
Interference Based Channel Allocation (IBCA).
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
A built-in PCH and a pair of service processing boards are required. An IP interface
board is required to support inter-BSC IBCA.
l Dependencies on Other Features
The following features have been configured before this feature is activated:
GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network, GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF
hopping, baseband hopping), GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization,
GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.
If Soft-Synchronized Network is enabled, this feature depends on the following features:
GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP (when inter-BSC IBCA is supported).
This feature and the following features and functions are mutually exclusive:
GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, the very early assignment function in GBFD-110502
Assignment and Immediate Assignment, GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell,
GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing, GBFD-114151 DTM, GBFD-118001 BCCH
Dense Frequency Multiplexing, MRFD-211802 GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum
Sharing(GSM), and GBFD-115830 VAMOS.
If Soft-Synchronized Network is enabled, this feature and the feature GBFD-118601
Abis over IP are mutually exclusive.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
Two cells are configured: cell1 and cell2. Cell1 has at least two TRXs; cell2 has at least
three TRXs.
Context
When the network admits a new call, the interference between the established calls and the new
call is calculated. Based on the calculation result, the network assigns a channel with the
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 61 Configuring IBCA
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
minimum interference to the new call. This minimizes the overall interference in the network
and therefore enables a tighter frequency reuse pattern. In addition, this increases the network
capacity while ensuring the voice quality in the entire network.
NOTE
l In an IBCA-enabled cell, each timeslot and each frequency band can be configured with only one
mobile allocation (MA) group; for a co-BCCH cell, two MA groups can be configured (one for each
frequency band).
l A maximum of three MA groups can be configured for an IBCA-enabled cell; a maximum of 24 MA
groups can be configured for all the IBCA neighboring cells.
l The number of frequencies in each MA group in an IBCA-enabled cell cannot exceed 64.
l A maximum of 12 IBCA neighboring cells and 24 IBCA mobile allocation index offsets (MAIOs) can
be configured for an IBCA-enabled cell.
l The value calculated from Number of MAs for the Serving Cell x Number of MAIOs for the Serving
Cell x Number of MAs for All IBCA Neighboring Cells x Maximum Number of MAIOs for IBCA
Neighboring Cells cannot exceed 8192.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an XPUa or XPUb board to the
MPS or EPS. In this step, set Logical function type to MCP.
NOTE
A maximum of four MCP boards can be configured to share the IBCA calculation load and
improve the system reliability.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD twice to enable IBCA
for cell1 and cell2 respectively. In this step, set IBCA Allowed to YES(Yes).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set IBCA
Info Report Period Within BSC and IBCA Info Report Period Between BSC to
appropriate values.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLMAIOPLAN twice to configure
MAIOs for cell1 and cell2 respectively. In this step, set Cell Index or Cell Name, and
set Hop Index and the relevant MAIO parameters for cell1 and cell2 based on the
network plan.
NOTE
Each cell needs to be configured with more than two MAIOs, and MAIOs for cell1 should be
consistent with those for cell2.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL twice to configure cell1 and
cell2 as an IBCA neighboring cell of each other. In this step, set Neighboring Cell
Type to IBCANCELL(IBCA Neighboring Cell) and IBCA Dyn Measure
Neighbour Cell Flag to YES(Yes).
NOTE
To configure the handover-supporting IBCA function, set Neighboring Cell Type to
HANDOVERANDIBCANCELL(Handover and IBCA Neighboring Cell).
l Verification Procedure
Verifying the IBCA algorithm
1. Initiate CS message tracing of a single user by referring to Tracing CS Domain
Messages of a Single Subscriber.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 61 Configuring IBCA
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT twice for
cell1 and cell2 respectively. In this step, set Administrative State of the TCHs on
the same timeslot of all non-BCCH TRXs to Unlock(Unlock) and set
Administrative State of all other TCHs to Lock(Lock).
3. Use MS1 to make a call in cell1 and keep the call alive. Ten seconds later, use
MS2 to make a call in cell2 and keep the call alive.
4. In the Single User CS Trace tracing window, check the two calls. Record the
MAIO information element in the Channel Activation messages on TCHs.
5. Compare the MAIO for the call made by MS1 with that for the call made by MS2.
Expected result: The MAIOs in the two records are inconsistent, which indicates
that the IBCA algorithm has been enabled.
Verifying the IBCA handover
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL twice to configure cell1
and cell2 as an IBCA neighboring cell of each other. In this step, set Neighboring
Cell Type to HANDOVERANDIBCANCELL(Handover and IBCA
Neighboring Cell) and IBCA Dyn Measure Neighbour Cell Flag to YES
(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT twice for
cell1 and cell2 respectively. In this step, set Administrative State of the TCHs on
the same timeslot of all non-BCCH TRXs to Unlock(Unlock) and Administrative
State of all other TCHs to Lock(Lock).
3. Use MS1 to make a call in cell1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO
to hand over the call to cell2. In this step, set Object Type to CELL(Cell),
Handover Scope to OUTCELL(Outgoing cell), and Cell Index Type to
BYNAME(By name) or BYID(By index).
4. Initiate CS message tracing of a single user by referring to Tracing CS Domain
Messages of a Single Subscriber. Record the MAIO information element in the
Channel Activation message on the TCH for MS1 in cell2.
5. Keep the call of MS1 alive and use MS2 to make a call in cell1. Run the
BSC6900 MML command SET FHO to hand over the call in cell1 to cell2. In this
step, set Object Type to CELL(Cell), Handover Scope to OUTCELL(Outgoing
cell), and Cell Index Type to BYNAME(By name) or BYID(By index).
6. Initiate CS message tracing of a single user by referring to Single User CS Trace.
Record the MAIO information element in the Channel Activation message on the
TCH for MS2 in cell2.
7. Compare the MAIOs in the two records in 4 and 6.
Expected result: The MAIOs in the two records are inconsistent, which indicates
that an IBCA handover has been performed.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G2GNCELL to remove the neighbor cell
relations between cell1 and cell2. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By index)
and set Source Cell Index and Neighbor 2G Cell Index to appropriate values.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST G2GNCELL. In this step, set Index Type
to BYID(By Index), Neighboring Cell Type to IBCANCELL(IBCA Neighboring
Cells), and Source Cell Index to an appropriate value.
Expected result: No queried items have desired results.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 61 Configuring IBCA
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set IBCA
Allowed to NO(No).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set Index
Type to BYID(By Index) and Cell Index to an appropriate value.
Expected result: The value of IBCA Allowed is No.
----End
Example
//Activating IBCA
ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=XPU, BRDTYPE=XPUa, LGCAPPTYPE=MCP, SN=0;
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, IBCAALLOWED=YES;
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, IBCAALLOWED=YES;
SET OTHSOFTPARA: IBCAINBSCINFORPTPRD=2000, IBCAOUTBSCINFORPTPRD=4000;
//Deactivating IBCA
RMV G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, NBR2GNCELLID=2;
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, IBCAALLOWED=NO;
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, IBCAALLOWED=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 61 Configuring IBCA
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
62 Configuring Soft-Synchronized
Network
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118201
Soft-Synchronized Network.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUa/GOUc/GOUd board is configured.
The BTS supports the feature Soft-Synchronized Network.
l Dependencies on Other Features
The feature GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP has been configured before
this feature is activated.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The BSC initial configuration is complete. The BSC is configured with at least two
BTSs.
Each BTS is configured with at least two cells. In addition, the longitude, latitude, and
antenna azimuth of each cell are configured.
Context
The soft-synchronized network applies to the scenario of tight frequency reuse and requires the
cooperation of network planning and features such as IBCA. It can effectively improve the
performance of the KPIs associated with the wireless network. In addition, this feature can
convert an asynchronous network into a synchronous network. In cooperation with other
associated technologies, this technology eliminates random and unpredictable interference and
therefore increases the system capacity.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 62 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
NOTE
l The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature.
l This feature can be used together with the feature GBFD-117002 IBCA to improve the frequency
utilization and increase the network capacity.
l This feature is applicable to the scenario where TDM transmission is used between the BSC and BTS,
that is, Abis TDM over E1/T1/STM-1. In a scenario where an IP network is used between the BSC and
BTS, including Abis IP over E1/T1/STM-1 and Abis IP over FE/GE, the Soft-Synchronized Network
feature is not supported.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
Configuring an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAISS. In this step, specify BTS Index
or BTS Name of the BTS to participate in the intra-BSC soft-synchronized task. To
configure more BTSs, run this command for each BTS you want to add. Site Sync
Zone of each BTS must be set to the same value.
NOTE
BTS Symbol Offset is optional. This parameter specifies the frame offset between BTSs and
is set as required.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AISSCFG. In this step, set Reference BTS
Index to the index of the BTS that supports the soft-synchronized network. In addition,
set both Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time Adjustment
Switch to ON(ON) and Support BSC AISS to NO(NO).
3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NCELL to add a pair of
neighboring cells in the BSC. In this step, set AISS Task Index to the index of the
soft-synchronized network task specified in Step 1. Then, set First Cell Index and
Second Cell Index to appropriate values.
NOTE
A pair of neighboring cells in the BSC are automatically generated based on certain rules. If
the neighboring cells do not meet the measurement requirements, reconfigure the neighboring
cells as required.
Configuring an inter-BSC soft-synchronized network
The configuration of the soft-synchronized network between BSC1 and BSC2 is used as
an example. Each BSC has only one BTS. IP-based inter-BSC interconnection is
configured.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAISS at BSC1 and BSC2 respectively.
In this step, specify BTS Index or BTS Name of the BTS to participate in the intra-
BSC soft-synchronized task. Site Sync Zone of each BTS must be set to the same
value.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AISSCFG at BSC1. In this step, set
Reference BTS Index to the index of the BTS that supports the soft-synchronized
network. In addition, set Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time
Adjustment Switch to ON(ON), and set Support BSC AISS and Base BSC to YES
(YES).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AISSCFG at BSC2. In this step, set
Reference BTS Index to the index of a BTS that supports the soft-synchronized
network. In addition, set Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 62 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
Adjustment Switch to ON(ON), Support BSC AISS to YES, Base BSC to NO, and
Control BSC DPC to the DPC of BSC1.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT2GCELL at BSC1 to configure a
cell under BSC2 as an external cell of BSC1.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL at BSC1 to configure the
external cell added in Step 4 as a neighboring cell of a cell under BSC1.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD EXTNCELL at BSC1 to add a pair of
neighboring cells between BSCs.
NOTE
A pair of neighboring cells between BSCs are automatically generated according to certain rules. If
the neighboring cells do not meet the measurement requirements, reconfigure the neighboring cells
as required. Steps 4 to 6 are performed to add a pair of optimal neighboring cells between BSCs.
l Verification Procedure
Verifying the intra-BSC soft-synchronized network
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST AISSCFG to query the information about
the soft-synchronized network.
NOTE
If you do not specify AISS Task Index, the information about all the soft-synchronized network
tasks is queried.
Expected result: Check whether AISS Task Index of the added intra-BSC soft-
synchronized network exists. If the index exists, the intra-BSC soft-synchronized
network is added successfully.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP NCELLTBL to query information about
neighboring cell pairs within a BSC.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP AISSRUNSTATE to query the BTS
synchronization information.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSYNCINFO to query the frame offset
in the synchronization between BTSs.
Verifying the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST AISSCFG to query the information about
the soft-synchronized network.
Expected result: The value of Support BSC AISS for BSC1 is YES and the value of
Control BSC DPC for BSC2 is the signaling point of the control BSC.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BSCSYNCINFO to query the information
about the synchronization between BSCs.
NOTE
l Set Adjacent BSC DPC to the signaling point of BSC1 to query the state of the local BSC.
l Set Adjacent BSC DPC to the signaling point of BSC2 to query the state of the
collaborative BSC.
Expected result: The value of BSC Sync State for BSC1 and BSC2 is Adjusted.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSYNCINFO to query the frame offset
in the synchronization between BTSs.
Expected result: The value of BTS status for the BTS is Synchronized.
l Deactivation Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 62 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV AISSCFG to remove a soft-synchronized
network task. In this step, specify BTS Index or BTS Name of the BTS involved in
the intra-BSC or inter-BSC soft-synchronized network.
----End
Example
//Activating Soft-Synchronized Network
SET BTSAISS: IDTYPE=BYIDX, BTSID=0, SYMOFFSET=12, SITESYNCZONE=1;
ADD AISSCFG: TASKIDX=0, GATHON=ON, ADTON=ON, BASEBTSID=0, REINITTBL=NO,
ISSPTBSCAISS=NO, ISBASICBSC=YES, GATHST=00&10, GATHET=08&50,
BSCGATHST=10&00, BSCGATHET=12&00;
//Deactivating Soft-Synchronized Network
RMV AISSCFG: TASKIDX=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 62 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
63 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization
This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-510401 BTS GPS
Synchronization.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, and BTS3900B/E do not support the feature.
In the case of the BTS3012/BTS3012AE, the DGPS board needs to be added.
In the case of the DBS3900/BTS3900/BTS3900A, the USCU board needs to be added.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
Converting an asynchronous network into a synchronous network can effectively reduce the
interference, increase the network capacity, and improve the performance of the KPIs related to
the radio network.
The following procedure takes how to configure the GPS synchronization of the BTS3900 GSM
as an example.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSBRD to add a USCU board. In this step,
set Board Type to USCU(USCU).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSUSCUBP. In this step, set GPS or
Glonass to GPS(GPS), GPS Antenna Delay to 800, and Antenna Power Supply
Switch to NOPOWER(No Power).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 63 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
NOTE
GPS or Glonass needs to be set according to the type of the GPS satellite card. Antenna Power
Supply Switch is set to NOPOWER(No Power) only in the co-antenna scenario. GPS
Antenna Delay needs to be set according to the feeder length.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type to
TRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock).
l Verification Procedure
None.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
ADD BTSBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, BT=USCU;
SET BTSUSCUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, CFGFLAG=YES,
GPSORGLONASS=GPS, ANTENNALONG=800, ANTENNAPOWERSWITCH=NOPOWER;
SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, ClkType=TRCGPS_CLK;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 63 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
64 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118202
Synchronous Ethernet.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
Impact on BSC6900 hardware: IP interface boards need to be used on the Abis interface.
Impact on BTS hardware: This feature applies to only the 3900 series base stations.
l Dependencies on Other Features
The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This
feature depends on the feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
This feature provides a solution for clock synchronization in the all-IP network. The clock of a
synchronous Ethernet can be obtained and recovered from the physical layer of the Ethernet.
The solution provided by this feature is easy to deploy, as it does not require additional BSC or
BTS hardware.
The clock synchronization technology adopted by this feature is based on the physical layer of
the Ethernet. By using this technology, the clock signals can be retrieved from the code flow of
the Ethernet link. With this feature, the data is transmitted at the physical layer by adopting the
highly precise clock. The reception end can retrieve and recover the clock directly from the data
flow. In this way, the accuracy of the clock is ensured. Another benefit of the feature is that it
does not require additional BTS hardware to achieve clock synchronization in the all-IP network.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set the clock type of a BTS. In
this step, set Clock Type to SYNETH_CLK(SynEth Clock).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 64 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSBRD to query the current clock source
configuration of the system.
Expected results: Selected Clock Source is SynEth Clock.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ClkType=SYNETH_CLK, TRANSTYPE=FE, PN=0;
//Verification procedure
DSP BTSBRD: INFOTYPE=BASEINFO, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 64 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
65 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control
Algorithm
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117601
HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not depend on the hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature can be used together with the feature GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of
Measurement Report.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The BSC to which the test cell belongs is connected to the M2000, and cell-level
counters can be retrieved on the M2000.
Context
Power control is a process in which the MS or BTS uses certain rules to adjust and control the
transmit power as required, without affecting the speech quality. It reduces the interference in
the entire network and decreases power consumption. Power control is mainly applicable to the
network with tight frequency reuse as well as high traffic volume or strong interference. In the
GSM network, power control can be separately performed on the uplink and downlink. It can
also be performed on each MS.
HUAWEI III power control algorithm enhances and optimizes the GBFD-110703 Enhanced
Power Control Algorithm feature in terms of the filtering algorithm, interpolation of the
measurement report, power control decision algorithm, and flexibility of threshold
configuration.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 65 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set
Power Control Switch to PWR3(Power controlIII).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3. In this step, set Allow III
Power Control For AMR to ON(Allowed), set Allow III Power Control For Non-
AMR to ON(Allowed), and set III Power Control Optimized Enable to YES
(Yes). In addition, adjust Huawei III power control parameters or set them to their
default values.
NOTE
l Both Allow III Power Control For AMR and Allow III Power Control For Non-
AMR are set to ON(Allowed) by default.
l By default, PC Step Calculation Optimization is set to NO (No). It can be set to YES
(Yes) as required to optimize the results of power control.
3. Optional: To improve the effect of handover and power control when the BCCH
participates in baseband frequency hopping, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GCELLCCCH with PWRC set to YES(Yes) and run the BSC6900 MML command
SET GCELLOTHEXT with Power Control and Handover CMP CON Sw set to
YES(Yes).
l Verification Procedure
1. Configure two cells, cell 0 and cell 1, on the BSC6900 and set the frequencies of the
BCCH TRXs of the two cells as non co-channel or adjacent-channel frequencies while
the frequencies of the non-BCCH TRXs as co-channel or adjacent-channel
frequencies.
2. Retrieve the following counters related to cell 0 on the M2000.
Table 65-1 Counters for verifying HUAWEI III power control
Measurement Unit Counter Name
Measurement of Power
Control Messages in MR
per Cell
Average MS Power Level of Non-AMR Call
Average BTS Power Level of Non-AMR Call
Ratio of Maximum Downlink Power Duration (%)
Ratio of Maximum Uplink Power Duration (%)
Mean Strength of Downlink Signals
Mean Strength of Uplink Signals
Mean Quality of Downlink Signals
Mean Quality of Uplink Signals
Interference Band
Measurement per TRX
Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 1
Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 2
Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 3
Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 4
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 65 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
Measurement Unit Counter Name
Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 5
Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 1
Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 2
Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 3
Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 4
Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 5
Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 1
Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 2
Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 3
Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 4
Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 5
Receive Quality
Measurement per TRX
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 0)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 1)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 2)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 3)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 4)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 5)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 6)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 7)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 0)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 1)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 2)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 3)
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 65 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
Measurement Unit Counter Name
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 4)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 5)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 6)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 7)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 0)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 1)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 2)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 3)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 4)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 5)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 6)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 7)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 0)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 1)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 2)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 3)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 4)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 5)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 6)
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 65 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
Measurement Unit Counter Name
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 7)

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set
Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1 to PWR2(Power control II).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the setting
of Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1.
Expected result: Power Control Switch is set to Power control II.
5. Initiate a large number of calls in cell 0 and cell 1.
6. Check the counters for one hour and save them.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set
Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1 to PWR3(Power control III).
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the setting
of Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1.
Expected result: Power Control Switch is set to Power control III.
9. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3. In this step, set Allow III
Power Control For AMR to ON(Allowed), and set Allow III Power Control For
Non-AMR to ON(Allowed) for cell 0 and cell 1.
10. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWR3 to query the settings of
Allow III Power Control For AMR and Allow III Power Control For Non-
AMR for cell 0 and cell 1.
Expected result: Both Allow III Power Control For AMR and Allow III Power
Control For Non-AMR are set to Allowed.
11. Initiate a large number of calls in cell 0 and cell 1.
12. Check the counters for one hour and save them.
13. Compare the measured counter results obtained from Step 12 and Step 6.
Expected result: For the counters related to power level, the power level obtained in
Step 12 is smaller than that obtained in Step 6. For the counters related to interference
band, the value of a counter with lower quality rank obtained in Step 12 is larger than
that obtained in Step 6. For the counters related to receive quality, the value of a
counter with lower quality rank obtained in Step 12 is larger than that obtained in
Step 6.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set
Power Control Switch to PWR2(Power control II).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the setting
of Power Control Switch.
Expected result: Power Control Switch is set to PWR2(Power control II).
----End
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 65 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
66 Configuring Discontinuous
Transmission (DTX)-Downlink
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114801
Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
Idle channels are available in the test cell.
Context
DTX reduces data to be transmitted during inactive speech periods, thereby reducing system
interference and saving system resources. DTX also reduces BTS power consumption and
frequency interference on the radio interface.
CAUTION
DTX cannot be configured in multi-site cell mode.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set FR
Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide
66 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-
Downlink
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
NOTE
If half-rate calls are in progress, set HR Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set DL DTX
Strategy to BSC_STRATEGY(BSC Strategy).
l Verification Procedure
1. Use an MS to originate a call. The call is set up successfully.
2. Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain
Messages on the Abis Interface, and then check the message tracing results.
Expected result: A message of the Channel Activation type is traced. In the
information element (IE) channel-mode, the value of dtx-downlink is 1, indicating
that the BSC supports downlink DTX.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set FR
Use Downlink DTX to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FRDLDTX=YES;
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, DLDTXPOLICY=BSC_STRATEGY;
//Deactivating Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FRDLDTX=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide
66 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-
Downlink
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
67 Configuring Discontinuous
Transmission (DTX)-Uplink
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114803
Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not depend on the hardware.
l Dependencies on other features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
Idle channels are available in the test cell.
Context
License is required to activate DTX.
DTX reduces the data to be transmitted during inactive speech periods, thus reducing the system
interference and saving system resources. In addition, DTX reduces the workload of the TX
module of the MS, thus enabling the MS to enjoy a longer call duration and standby time.
CAUTION
DTX cannot be configured in multi-site cell mode.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 67 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set FR
Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use).
NOTE
If the HR service is processed currently, set HR Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use).
l Verification Procedure
1. Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain
Messages on the Abis Interface.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG to send system messages
to the test cell.
3. Check the results of message tracing over the Abis interface in the CS domain.
Expected results: A message of the BCCH Information type is traced. system-info-
type is system-information-3 and the value of dtx is 1. The system message is sent
correctly.
4. Use an MS to originate a call. The call is set up successfully.
5. Check the results of message tracing over the Abis interface in the CS domain.
Expected results: A message of the Channel Activation type is traced. In the
information element channel-number, the value of channel-type is bm-acch. In the
information element channel-mode, the value of dtx-uplink is 1. This indicates that
the BSC supports uplink DTX.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA to set the basic
parameters of a cell. In this step, set FR Uplink DTX to Shall_NOT_Use(Shall not
Use).
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FRULDTX=Shall_Use;
//Verification procedure
SND GCELLSYSMSG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024;
//Deactivation procedure
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FRULDTX=Shall_NOT_Use;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 67 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
223
68 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier
Intelligent Shutdown
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111602
TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping) when one frequency hopping
group is involved in baseband hopping.
GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping) when inter-module RF hopping is
applied.
GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell.
GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping(in GBSS12.0, the GBFD-111602 TRX
Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown can be used together with the GBFD-113703
Antenna Frequency Hopping feature when DRRUs or DRFUs are used.).
GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
The TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function can be enabled during a specific
period. After this function is enabled, idle TRXs can be shut down to reduce power consumption
when estimated traffic load is light, and disabled TRXs can be switched on so that they are
available for use when estimated traffic load is heavy.
Generally, channel allocation measures are used together with this function. The channels on
the BCCH TRX are preferentially assigned so that the utilization of the non-BCCH TRX
channels is decreased and the overall power consumption of the BTS is reduced. In addition, the
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 68 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
BTS allocates channels based on the priorities of TRXs. Channels on the TRXs with high
priorities are preferentially assigned to MSs. In this way, the BSC centralizes busy channels into
a few TRXs so that as many idle TRXs as possible can be shut down.
When the BCCH TRX participates in baseband FH, the cell TRX cannot be shut down. Thus,
the TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown cannot be used.
When the BCCH TRX does not participate in baseband FH and all the TRXs (excluding the
BCCH TRX) in the cell are idle, the TRXs can be shut down. If one or more TRXs (excluding
the BCCH TRX) are not idle, the TRXs cannot be shut down.
Before configuring Allow Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier on the TRX, ensure that the TRX
meets the following conditions:
l The TRX is not on the BCCH.
l The PDCH is not available on the TRX.
l The antenna hopping is disabled for the TRX.
After confirming that all target TRXs are shutdown, wait for one minute, and then check whether
the power decreases.
Data Preparation
Parameter
Name Parameter ID Remarks
Data
Source
Allow Dynamic
Shutdown of TRX
by BSC
BSCDynSwitchT
rxPAAllow
This parameter specifies whether to
enable the TRX Intelligent Shutdown
feature. This parameter takes effect on
all BTSs under a BSC.
Networ
k
plannin
g
Time When the
Function Is
Enabled
StartTimeTAClo-
seTrxPA
Set this parameter based on the cell
traffic volume. You are advised to use
this feature during off-peak hours.
Networ
k
plannin
g
Time When the
Function Is
Disabled
EndTimeTAClo-
seTrxPA
Set this parameter based on the cell
traffic volume. You are advised to use
this feature during off-peak hours.
Networ
k
plannin
g
Allow Dynamic
Shutdown of TRX
DYNOpenTrxPo
wer
You are advised to set this parameter to
YES(Yes) for all cells.
Networ
k
plannin
g
Allow Dynamic
Shutdown of TRX
CPS This parameter specifies whether to
allow the BSC to enable or disable the
TRX power amplifier based on the
traffic volume.
Networ
k
plannin
g
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 68 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
Parameter
Name Parameter ID Remarks
Data
Source
TRX Power-on
Protection Time
ProtectTimeTrx-
PowerOn
This parameter is set to prevent the BSC
from frequently enabling or disabling
the TRX. After a TRX is powered on,
the BSC is not allowed to disable the
TRX within the period of time specified
by this parameter.
Networ
k
plannin
g
Reserve Idle
Channel Number
RsvIdleChanNu
m
This parameter specifies the number of
reserved idle channels. If this parameter
is set too small, the TRX will be
frequently enabled or disabled. If this
parameter is set too large, idle TRXs will
not be disabled in a timely manner.
Networ
k
plannin
g

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA. In this step, set Allow
Dynamic Shutdown Trx by BSC to YES(Yes), and set Time When the Function
Is Enabled and Time When the Function Is Disabled according to the actual
condition.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set
Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier to YES(Yes) to enable the
TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown function for the cell.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Allow
Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier to YES(Yes), therefore allowing the BSC6900
to shut down the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.
4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BSCDSTPADATE. In this step,
set the period in which the TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown function is
disabled. In the period of heavy traffic, this function needs to be disabled.
NOTE
l The BSC6900 MML command LST BSCDSTPADATE can be used to query the value of
Prohibit DynShutdown TRX DateRangeldx.
l The BSC6900 MML command RMV BSCDSTPADATE can be used to remove the period in
which the TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown function is disabled.
l Verification Procedure
1. Wait for about five minutes. Then, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP
GTRXSTAT to query the value of Close TRX Power.
Expected result: The value of Close TRX Power is Yes.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA. In this step, set Allow
Dynamic Shutdown Trx by BSC to NO(No).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set
Allow Dynamic Shutdwn TRX to NO(No).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 68 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
226
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Allow Dynamic
Shutdown TRX to NO(No).
----End
Example
/*Activation procedure*/
//Enabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for the
BSC
SET BSCDSTPA: BSCDynSwitchTrxPAAllow=YES, StartTimeTACloseTrxPA=19&00,
EndTimeTACloseTrxPA=24&00;
//Enabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for a
cell
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, DYNOpenTrxPower=YES;
//Enabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for a
TRX
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, CPS=YES;
//Setting the period during which the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent
Shutdown function is prohibited
ADD BSCDSTPADATE: DateRangeIndex=1, StartMonthDSTPA=JAN,
StartDayDSTPA=10, EndMonthDSTPA=FEB, EndDayDSTPA=10;
/*Deactivation procedure*/
//Disabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for the
BSC
SET BSCDSTPA: BSCDynSwitchTrxPAAllow=NO;
//Disabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for a
cell
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, DYNOpenTrxPower=NO;
//Disabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for a
TRX
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, CPS=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 68 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
227
69 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier
Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111603
TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
DRFU, RRU3004, and DTRU (type B) support this feature.
BTSs configured with multi-transceivers do not support this feature.
BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012, and BTS3012AE do not support this feature when
they use a non-optimized double-transceiver unit.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level is a function based on which the
PA is controlled on a timeslot basis. In this manner, the static power consumption of the PA is
0 in the timeslots when the TRX is has no data to transmit, and thus the static power consumption
of the PA is reduced.
TRX power consumption is a major part of the BTS power consumption, and PA power
consumption is a major part of TRX power consumption. According to network operation
experiences, TRXs do not transmit signals all the time. This function shuts down the PA of the
TRX when there is no data to be transmitted in certain timeslots, thus reducing the cost on power
greatly.
Data Preparation
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide
69 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown
on Timeslot Level
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
228
Parameter
Name Parameter ID Remarks Data Source
Allow Turning
Off Time Slot
TsTurningOffEna-
ble
This parameter does not
depend on other parameters.
Network
planning

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA. In this step, set Allow Turning
Off Time Slot to YES(Yes).
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCDSTPA to check the value of Time Slot
Turning Off PA Enable. The expected result is Yes.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA. In this step, set Allow
Dynamic Shutdown of TRX by BSC to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
SET BSCDSTPA: TsTurningOffEnable=YES;
//Verification procedure
LST BSCDSTPA:;
//Deactivation procedure
SET BSCDSTPA: TsTurningOffEnable=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide
69 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown
on Timeslot Level
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
229
70 Configuring Intelligent Combiner
Bypass
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111604
Intelligent Combiner Bypass.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
Intelligent Combiner Bypass (ICB) is applicable to only the double-transceiver TRXs
and must be configured as combining output. The TRXs supporting ICB are the DTRU
(type B), , RRU3004, and DRFU.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping
(baseband hopping), GBFD-113701, Antenna Frequency Hoppingare or GBFD-510104
Multi-site Cell.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment in the MML command SET
GCELLBASICPARA is set to Yes.
Context
The ICB can be enabled only when all the non-BCCH carriers are idle and there are idle channels
on the BCCH carrier in the cell.
The ICB function cannot be enabled on channels that are configured as static PDCHs. Neither
can the function be enabled on dynamic PDCHs (TCHs) that are converted to PDCHs.
The enabled ICB feature does not save energy in all cases. It is energy-saving only when the
output power of the TRX is 40 W and the static power level is 0, when the output power of the
TRX is 60 W and the static power level is 0, or when the output power of the TRX is 60 W and
the static power level is 1.
Data Preparation
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 70 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
230
Parameter
Name
Parameter
ID Remarks Data Source
ICB Allowed ICBALLOW You can set this parameter to YES
(YES) only when the SNDMD for an
RF module is set to WBANDCOMB
(Wideband Combination).
Network
planning

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, change
ICB Allowed to YES(YES).
l Verification Procedure
None.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, ICBALLOW=YES;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 70 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
231
71 Configuring Active Backup Power
Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111605
Active Backup Power Control.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The BTS must be configured with the battery and PMU.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
Huawei power backup device is needed, such as APM30.
Context
When the BTS external power supply fails, storage batteries are started to supply power. The
BTS shuts down some TRXs automatically under the control of a timer to save the backup power.
Meanwhile, the BTS gradually decreases the TRX transmit power with a certain step until the
entire BTS is powered off. When the BTS external power supply recovers, start the TRXs. Then,
the transmit power of all the TRXs recovers.
Considering the cell coverage, cell capacity, and backup power, this feature gradually decreases
cell coverage and hands over MSs at the cell edge to neighboring cells. This does not degrade
network performance.
NOTE
Using this feature decreases the system capacity.
Operators can choose any of the following modes:
l Coverage preferred
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 71 Configuring Active Backup Power Control
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
232
Shut down some TRXs and then gradually reduce the transmit power of the remaining
TRXs.
l Capacity preferred
Gradually reduce the transmit power of all TRXs and then shut down some of the TRXs.
l Backup power preferred
Shut down some TRXs and at the same time reduce the transmit power of the remaining
TRXs.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Coverage preferred
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSBAKPWR to set parameters related to
hierarchical backup power reduction of a BTS. In this step, set Backup Power Saving
Method to BYPWR(Reduce Backup Power) and Backup Power Saving Policy to
BYCOVER(Cover Priority), and set Drop Power Start Time[T1], Shutdown TRX
Start Time[T2], Drop Power Time Interval[T3], Drop Power Step, and Max Drop
Power Threshold to appropriate values.
2. Capacity preferred
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSBAKPWR to set parameters related to
hierarchical backup power reduction of a BTS. In this step, set Backup Power Saving
Method to BYPWR(Reduce Backup Power) and Backup Power Saving Policy to
BYCAP(Capability Priority), and set Drop Power Start Time[T1], Shutdown
TRX Start Time[T2], Drop Power Time Interval[T3], Drop Power Step, and Max
Drop Power Threshold to appropriate values.
3. Backup power preferred
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSBAKPWR to set parameters related to
hierarchical backup power reduction of a BTS. In this step, set Backup Power Saving
Method to BYPWR(Reduce Backup Power) and Backup Power Saving Policy to
BYSAVING(Saving Priority), and set Drop Power Start Time[T1], Shutdown
TRX Start Time[T2], Drop Power Time Interval[T3], Drop Power Step, and Max
Drop Power Threshold to appropriate values.
l Verification Procedure
1. Before the feature is activated:
a. Shut down the mains power supply of the BTS locally. The BTS reports
ALM-25622 Mains Input Out of Range, and the battery starts to supply power
b. When the BTS reports ALM-21807 OML Fault, the entire BTS is powered off.
c. Measure the difference between the time the BTS reporting ALM-25622 Mains
Input Out of Range and the time the BTS reporting ALM-21807 OML
Fault. That is, measure the lasting duration.
2. After the feature is activated, perform the same operations as that are performed before
the feature is activated at the same time of a different day.
3. Compare the lasting duration before and after the feature is activated. If the lasting
duration after feature activation is greater than that before feature activation, this
feature takes effect.
l Deactivation Procedure
NOTE
The methods of deactivating this feature in GUL modes are the same.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 71 Configuring Active Backup Power Control
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
233
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSBAKPWR. In this step, set Backup
Power Saving Method to BYTRX(Turn off TRX).
----End
Example
//Enabling Active Backup Power Control
SET BTSBAKPWR: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, BAKPWRSAVMETHOD=BYPWR;
//Disabling Active Backup Power Control
SET BTSBAKPWR: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, BAKPWRSAVMETHOD=BYTRX;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 71 Configuring Active Backup Power Control
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
234
72 Configuring Power Optimization Based
on Channel Type
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111606
Power Optimization Based on Channel Type.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
Currently, only double-transceiver TRXs support this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping
(baseband hopping), GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping, or GBFD-510104
Multi-site Cell.
l Dependency on License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
The power consumption optimization based on channel type has two functions: dynamic voltage
adjustment and dynamic PDCH voltage adjustment. With the dynamic voltage adjustment
function, different working voltages are provided for the TRX power amplifiers according to
the applied modulation scheme. If all channels on a TRX are configured as TCHs and the TRX
works in GMSK mode, the BTS provides the TRX with the working voltage required in GMSK
mode. If a channel on the TRX is configured as dynamic or static PDCH and the TRX works in
8PSK mode; the BTS provides the TRX with the working voltage required in 8PSK mode. The
BTS provides the TRX with appropriate working voltage, reducing the power consumption.
Data Preparation
Parameter
Name Parameter ID Remarks Data Source
GPRS GPRS Set this parameter based on the
current network status.
Network
planning
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 72 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
235
Parameter
Name Parameter ID Remarks Data Source
EDGE EDGE Set this parameter based on the
current network status.
Network
planning
PDCH Power
Saving Enable
PDCHPWRSAV
EN
Set this parameter to YES(Yes)
only for carriers with dynamic
PDCHs.
Network
planning
Adjust Voltage BTSadjust The recommended value is YES
(Yes).
Network
planning

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set PDCH
Power Saving Enable to YES(Yes).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set
Adjust Voltage to YES(Yes).
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLSOFT to query the value of PDCH
Power Saving Enable.
Expected result: The value of PDCH Power Saving Enable is YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBASICPARA to query the value
of Adjust Voltage.
Expected result: The value of Adjust Voltage is Yes.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set PDCH
Power Saving Enable to NO(No).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA to set Adjust
Voltage to NO(No).
----End
Example
/*Activation procedure*/
//Enabling GPRS and EDGE
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES;
//Enabling the PDCH power optimization function
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, PDCHPWRSAVEN=YES;
//Enabling the dynamic voltage adjustment function
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, BTSadjust=YES;
/*Deactivation procedure*/
//Disabling the PDCH power optimization function
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, PDCHPWRSAVEN=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 72 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
236
//Disabling the dynamic voltage adjustment function
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, BTSadjust=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 72 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
237
73 Configuring PSU Smart Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111608
PSU Smart Control.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012 (DTRU/QTRU), BTS3900B, and BTS3900E
do not support this feature.
The BTS is configured with storage batteries, and no alarm about broken battery loop,
AC overvoltage, or AC undervoltage is generated.
The BTS must be configured with the PSU.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PSU
Turning Off Enable to YES(YES).
l Verification Procedure
This feature does not need to be verified.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PSU
Turning Off Enable to NO(NO).
----End
Example
//Activating PSU Smart Control
SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, PSUTURNINGOFFENABLE=YES;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 73 Configuring PSU Smart Control
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
238
//Deactivating PSU Smart Control
SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, PSUTURNINGOFFENABLE=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 73 Configuring PSU Smart Control
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
239
74 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power
Consumption Optimization
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111609
Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
BTS3900B does not support this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l Dependency on License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
The Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization feature aims to reduce the transmit
power of the non-BCCH timeslots of the BCCH TRX, reducing the power consumption of the
BTS.
NOTE
After this feature is enabled, the accuracy of measuring the receive levels of neighboring cells may be affected.
Therefore, it is recommended that this feature be enabled when the traffic is light, for example, at night.
Data Preparation
Parameter
Name Parameter ID Remarks Data Source
Power Derating
Enabled
MAINBCCHPW
RDTEN
To use the BCCH Power
Consumption Optimization
function, set this parameter to
YES(Yes).
Network
planning
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide
74 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption
Optimization
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
240
Parameter
Name Parameter ID Remarks Data Source
Power Derating
Start Time
MAIN-
BCCHPWRDTS
TIME
Set this parameter during off-
peak hours.
Network
planning
Power Derating
End Time
MAINBCCHPW
RDTETIME
Set this parameter during off-
peak hours.
Network
planning
Power Derating
Range
MAIN-
BCCHPWRDTR
ANGE
This parameter does not affect
cell reselection and handover
measurement.
Network
planning
Power Derating
Active Channel
Enabled
MAIN-
BCCHPWDTAC
TCHEN
This parameter does not affect
cell reselection and handover
measurement.
Network
planning

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set Power
Derating Enabled to YES(Yes), and set other parameters such as Power Derating
Start Time, Power Derating End Time, and Power Derating Range.
WARNING
l When the power of the non-BCCH timeslots of the BCCH TRX is reduced, the
downlink receive level of the cell detected by the MS camping on the neighboring
cells may be inaccurate and the handover of the MS to the cell may fail. Therefore,
perform this operation with caution.
l When Power Derating Enabled is set to YES(Yes) and the current time is between
Power Derating Start Time and Power Derating End Time, the BTS reduces
the transmit power of idle channels in non-BCCH timeslots on a BCCH TRX by
Power Derating Range.
l When Power Derating Enabled is set to YES(Yes), the BTS also reduces the
power of occupied channels on a BCCH TRX. If power control is applied to the
occupied channel and the reduction degree in power control is smaller than the
value of Power Derating Range, then degree in power control is used in power
reduction; otherwise, the reduction range depends on Power Derating Range.
2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step,
set Power Derating Active Channel Enabled to YES(Yes) so that the BSC6900 can
reduce the transmit power of the non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHEXT to query the value of
Power Derating Enabled.
Expected result: The value of Power Derating Enabled is Yes.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide
74 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption
Optimization
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
241
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set Power
Derating Enabled to NO(No).
----End
Example
/*Activation procedure*/
//Enabling the Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization function
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, MAINBCCHPWRDTEN=YES;
/*Deactivation procedure*/
//Disabling the Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization function
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, MAINBCCHPWRDTEN=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide
74 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption
Optimization
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
242
75 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111610
Dynamic Cell Power Off.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
You are advised to use this feature together with GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier
Intelligent Shutdown and GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC.
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power
Sharing(Dual PA power sharing).
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The BTS of the specified cell supports this feature.
The specified cell has a co-coverage cell.
Context
In a co-BSC multiband network topology, when the traffic volume is low, a fully covered
network can carry all the traffic on the existing network. In such a case, all network equipment
of the other frequency band can be disabled to reduce the network power consumption.
Data Preparation
Parameter
Name Parameter ID Remarks
Data
Source
Enable
Turning Off
Cell
TURNOFFENAB
LE
To enable the Dynamic Cell Power Off
feature, set this parameter to ENABLE
(Enable).
Network
planning
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 75 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
243
Parameter
Name Parameter ID Remarks
Data
Source
Same
Coverage Cell
No
SAMECVGCEL
LID
This parameter specifies the ID or name of
co-coverage cells.
Network
planning
Same
Coverage Cell
Load
Threshold
SAMECVGCEL
LLOADTHRD
The value of this parameter is obtained
based on the historical traffic statistics.
Network
planning
Dyn. Turning
On Cell Load
Threshold
TURNONCELL-
LOADTHRD
The value of this parameter is obtained
based on the historical traffic statistics.
Network
planning
Dyn. Turning
Off Cell Busy
Channel Num.
TURNOFFCELL
CHANNUM
A small value of this parameter decreases
the number of handovers in a cell, but leads
to delayed cell shutdown and decreases the
gain obtained from the function. You are
advised to use the default value.
Network
planning
Dyn. Turning
Off Cell
Protection
Time
PROTECTTIME A larger value of this parameter prevents
ping-pong handovers in a cell, but shortens
the cell shutdown duration and decreases
the gain obtained from this function. You
are advised to use the default value.
Network
planning
Same
Coverage Cell
Load Stat.
Time
SAMECVGCEL
LLOADSTATT
M
A larger value of this parameter prevents
ping-pong handovers in a cell, but shortens
the cell shutdown duration and decreases
the gain obtained from this function. You
are advised to use the default value.
Network
planning
Dyn. Turning
Off Cell Start
Time
TURNOFFCELL
STRTIME
The value of this parameter is obtained
according to the historical traffic statistics.
Set this parameter to a time point in the
period when the traffic volume is lower
than TURNONCELLLOADTHRD.
Network
planning
Dyn. Turning
Off Cell Stop
Time
TURNOFFCELL
STPTIME
The value of this parameter is obtained
according to the historical traffic statistics.
Set this parameter to a time point in the
period when the traffic volume is lower
than TURNONCELLLOADTHRD
Network
planning

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF. In this step, set
Enable Turning Off Cell to ENABLE(Enable) and the parameters related to the
time of dynamic cell power off and co-coverage cell to appropriate values.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 75 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
244
NOTE
l When activating the dynamic cell power off feature, you must configure a co-coverage cell.
l If the co-coverage cell does not support certain services in the cell, the related services
cannot be processed in the co-coverage cell after the dynamic cell power off feature is
deactivated.
l Verification Procedure
NOTE
The cell to be verified has a co-coverage cell and the co-coverage cell works properly. There is no
call access request in the cell to be verified. The traffic of the co-coverage cell is lower than Same
Coverage Cell Load Threshold.
It is recommended that Same Coverage Cell Load Threshold be set to a value close to the maximum
value 100 so that the conditions for this feature can be easily met. After the verification, this parameter
must be reset to an appropriate value based on the network plan.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF. In this step, set
Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified, Enable Turning Off Cell to
ENABLE(Enable), and Same Coverage Cell Index Type to the index of the co-
coverage cell. In addition, set Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning
Off Cell Stop Time to appropriate values so that the current time is within the time
period specified by the two parameters.
2. Wait for about five minutes, and then run the BSC6900 MML command DSP
GCELLSTAT to query the status of the cell to be verified.
Expected result: Cell Dynamic Switch is set to Yes, which indicates that the dynamic
cell power off feature has been activated.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF. In this step, set
Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning Off Cell Stop Time to ensure
that the current time is beyond the time period specified by the two parameters.
4. Wait for about one minute, and then run the BSC6900 MML command DSP
GCELLSTAT to query the status of the cell to be verified.
Expected result: The value of Cell Dynamic Switch is No. This indicates that the cell
is enabled.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF. In this step, set
Enable Turning Off Cell to DISABLE(Disable).
----End
Example
//Activating Dynamic Cell Power Off
SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TURNOFFENABLE=ENABLE,
SAMECVGCELLIDTYPE=BYID, SAMECVGCELLID=1, TURNOFFCELLSTRTIME=23&33,
TURNOFFCELLSTPTIME=05&33;
//Deactivating Dynamic Cell Power Off
SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TURNOFFENABLE=DISABLE;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 75 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
245
76 Configuring TRX Working Voltage
Adjustment
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111611
TRX Working Voltage Adjustment.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The BTS3900B does not support this feature.
Double- and multi-carrier RF modules support this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
Data Preparation
Parameter
Name
Parameter
ID Remarks Data Source
Adjust Voltage BTSadjust You are advised to set this parameter
to YES(Yes) for all cells configured
with multicarrier RF modules.
Network
planning

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set
Adjust Voltage to YES(Yes).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 76 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
246
l Verification Procedure
1. Measure the input current and voltage of the TRX board using a clamp meter and
voltmeter, and compare the power consumption before and after enabling the TRX
working voltage adjustment function. It is proven that after the function is enabled,
the power consumption decreases.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set
Adjust Voltage to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating TRX Working Voltage Adjustment
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSadjust=YES;
//Deactivating TRX Working Voltage Adjustment
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSadjust=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 76 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
247
77 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent
Voltage Adjustment
This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier
Intelligent Voltage Adjustment.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012/AE(DTRU), DBS3900(RRU3004), BTS3900/A/L
(DRFU), and BTS3900B do not support the feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
Data Preparation
Parameter
Name
Parameter
ID Remarks Data Source
PA Intelligent
Adjust Voltage
PaAdjVol You are advised to set this parameter
to YES(Yes) for all cells configured
with multicarrier RF modules.
Network
planning

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PA
Intelligent Adjust Voltage to YES(YES).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 77 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
248
l Verification Procedure
None.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PA
Intelligent Adjust Voltage to NO(NO).
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PaAdjVol=YES;
//Deactivation procedure
SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PaAdjVol=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 77 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
249
78 Configuring Flex Abis
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117301
Flex Abis.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
For a BTS3900B or BTS3X series base station which does not support Flex Abis,
If a BTS3X series base station is a root node in a chain or tree topology, none of the
base stations in the chain or tree support Flex Abis.
If a BTS3X series base station is a lower-level base station of BTSs that support Flex
Abis, Flex Abis can be enabled on the upper-level BTSs only when the following
conditions are met:
Flex Abis Mode for the BTS is set to SEMI_ABIS(Semisolid Abis).
Flex Abis Mode for its upper-level BTSs is set to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis).
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and
OML on A-bis Interface, GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/
T1, GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization, or GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The configuration on the BTS is complete. For details, see Configuring a BTS.
Context
Flex Abis enables the sharing of the Abis transmission resources among different BTSs, cells,
and services and therefore improves the resource utilization. Especially for multi-cell large
capacity BTSs, cascaded BTSs, and the cells configured with the EDGE function, the dynamic
Abis resource allocation can greatly improve resource utilization.
Before Flex Abis is introduced, there is one-to-one mapping between the Um interface resources
and the Abis interface transmission resources. After Flex Abis is enabled in the BSC, the Abis
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 78 Configuring Flex Abis
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
250
interface transmission resources work in resource pool mode to improve the utilization of the
transmission resources.
If a ring topology needs to be configured, only BTS ring topology I is supported. When both
Huawei I BTS ring topology and Flex Abis are applied, the following conditions must be met:
l Flex Abis must be configured on all BTSs. In addition, the BTSs support only the
configuration of one E1 for the forward link and one E1 for the reverse link.
l No BTS can be configured with Abis bypass.
l No BTS can be configured with 16 kbit/s LPAD signaling links.
l No BTS can be configured with Abis timeslot self-detection and self-healing functions.
Before deploying Flex Abis, collect the information specified in Table 78-1.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 78 Configuring Flex Abis
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
251
Table 78-1 Data preparation
Parameter
Name Parameter ID Remarks Data Source
Flex Abis Mode FLEXABISMO
DE
Configuration principles for
cascaded BTSs
l To enable Flex Abis for a
cascaded BTS on a link, set
Flex Abis Mode to
FLEX_ABIS for its upper-
level BTSs.
l If Flex Abis Mode is set to
SEMI_ABIS for a cascaded
BTS on a link, set Flex Abis
Mode to SEMI_ABIS for all
its lower-level BTSs.
l Use the E1 port of the primary
cabinet group to connect the
primary cabinet group of the
level-1 BTS to a BSC interface
board. Use the internal
connections of the primary
cabinet group to connect the
secondary cabinet group to a
BSC interface board.
Alternatively, use the E1 port
of the secondary cabinet group
to connect the secondary
cabinet group to a BSC
interface board.
l Use only the E1 ports of the
primary cabinet groups to
connect cascaded BTSs. Use
the internal connections of the
primary cabinet group of a
lower-level BTS to connect the
BTS to an upper-level BTS.
Alternatively, use the E1 port
of the secondary cabinet to
connect the BTS to a BSC
interface board. Note that
secondary cabinet groups
belonging to the same BTS
cannot be cascaded.
l One BTS can only have one
upper-level BTS.
Configuration principles for other
BTSs
Users are allowed to run the
BSC6900 MML command SET
Network
planning
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 78 Configuring Flex Abis
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
252
Parameter
Name Parameter ID Remarks Data Source
BTSFORBIDTSto disable certain
timeslots except timeslots in fixed
allocation mode, such as signaling
timeslots and monitoring timeslots
on E1 links for a Flex Abis-enabled
BTS. Certain timeslots need to be
disabled in certain transmission
modes, such as satellite mode or
when only some timeslots on an E1
link can be used.
Multiplexing
Mode
MPMODE If this parameter is set to a large
value, the RSLs will become
congested. Therefore, set this
parameter to MODE5_1 or
MODE6_1 only when the traffic
on a BTS is light.
Network
planning
Transmission
Resource
Preempting
Support
ENPREEMPTT
RANSADMT
To enable CS services to preempt
the Abis transmission resources
occupied by PS services when all
Abis transmission resources are
occupied, set this parameter to
ON.
The setting of this parameter is
effective for all BTSs under the
BSC.
Network
planning
PCU Support
PREEMPT_ABI
S_LINK
Message
PCUPREEMPT
FLAG
If an external PCU is used, and if a
quick release of Abis links
occupied by PS services is
required, set this parameter to
Yes.
In this way, after CS services
preempt Abis transmission
resources, the BSC sends the PCU
messages indicating Abis link
preemption, instructing the PCU to
release the Abis links, which in
turn speeds up the Abis link
release.
Network
planning
Congestion
remain ratio
TDMCONGTH Set this parameter to a value
smaller than that of Congestion
clear remain ratio to prevent
ping-pong handovers when
transmission links are congested.
Network
planning
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 78 Configuring Flex Abis
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
253
Parameter
Name Parameter ID Remarks Data Source
Congestion clear
remain ratio
TDMCONGCL
RTH
Set this parameter to a value larger
than that of Congestion remain
ratio to prevent ping-pong
handovers when transmission
links are congested.
Network
planning
TRM Load
Threshold switch
LOADTHSW l If this parameter is set to ON,
load control is enabled when
transmission links are
congested. In this case, set
TRM load threshold index to
specify the threshold used for
load control.
Network
planning
TRM load
threshold index
TRMLOADTHI
NDEX
The value of this parameter must
be unique.
Network
planning
LDR First LDRFST If this parameter is set to any value
other than CLOSE, the value must
be different from the values of
LDR Second, LDR Third, and
LDR Fourth.
Network
planning
LDR Second LDRSND If this parameter is set to any value
other than CLOSE, the value must
be different from the values of
LDR First, LDR Third, and LDR
Fourth.
Network
planning
LDR Third LSRTRD If this parameter is set to any value
other than CLOSE, the value must
be different from the values of
LDR First, LDR Second, and
LDR Fourth.
Network
planning
LDR Fourth LDRFOUH If this parameter is set to any value
other than CLOSE, the value must
be different from the values of
LDR First, LDR Second, and
LDR Third.
Network
planning

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 78 Configuring Flex Abis
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
254
CAUTION
This operation will cause the BTS to be out-of-service. Therefore, perform this
operation during off-peak hours.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS to enable flex Abis. In this step, set
Flex Abis Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) and set BTS Multiplexing Mode to an
appropriate value.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSFLEXABISPARA. In this step, set
TCHH Function Switch, Fix Abis Prior Choose Load Thred, Flex Abis Prior
Choose Load Thred, and other parameters to appropriate values.
CAUTION
The transmission resources on the Abis interface may become insufficient before the
TCHF resources become insufficient. To solve this problem, set the following
parameters to enable the TCHH allocation based on the traffic load on the Abis
interface: TCHH Function Switch, Fix Abis Prior Choose Load Thred, and Flex
Abis Prior Choose Load Thred.
When TCHH Function Switch is set to YES(YES), the system allocates TCHHs
preferentially if the fixed Abis channel seizure ratio exceeds Fix Abis Prior Choose
Load Thred and the flex Abis channel seizure ratio exceeds Flex Abis Prior Choose
Load Thred.
4. Optional: If an external PCU is used and the PCU supports preempting Abis
transmission resources,Run the BSC6900 MML command SET
BTSFLEXABISPARA. In this step, set PCU Support PREEMPT_ABIS_LINK
Message to YES(YES).
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT to enable the preemption of
PS secondary link resources of local BTS and lower-level BTS by CS services. In this
step, set Sublink Resources Preemption Switch to YES(YES) and Low-level
Sublink Resource Preempt Switch to YES(YES).
If there are lower-level BTSs, you are advised to set both Sublink Resources
Preemption Switch and Low-level Sublink Resource Preempt Switch to YES
(YES). In this manner, the access success rate of the CS services is increased if
the Abis transmission resources are insufficient.
If there are no lower-level BTSs, you are advised to set Sublink Resources
Preemption Switch to YES(YES). In this manner, the access success rate of the
CS services is increased if the Abis transmission resources are insufficient.
NOTE
When all the Abis transmission resources are occupied, the new CS services need to request
transmission resources. In this case, the CS services need to preempt the resources of the PS services
so that the resources are preferentially allocated to the CS services.
NOTE
CS services can preempt the resources occupied by PCUs when PCU Support
PREEMPT_ABIS_LINK Message is set to YES.
6. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set
Transmission Resource Preempting Support to ON(On).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 78 Configuring Flex Abis
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
255
If Transmission Resource Preempting Support is set to ON(On) and all Abis
transmission resources are occupied, new CS services require more Abis transmission
resources. In this case, the CS services can preempt the Abis transmission resources
occupied by PS services so that the requirements for CS services can be preferentially
met. The setting of this parameter is effective for all BTSs under the BSC.
7. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMLOADTH. In this step, set
Transport Type to TDM, and set TRM load threshold index, Congestion remain
ratio, and Congestion clear remain ratio to appropriate values.
This step is mandatory if the control over transmission resource congestion is required.
8. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCABISPRIMAP. In this step,
specify the BTS to be configured. Set Carrier Type to TDM, and set TRM Load
Threshold switch and TRM load threshold index to appropriate values.
This step is mandatory if the control over transmission resource congestion is required.
NOTE
TRM load threshold index must be set to the value specified by TRM load threshold index in
ADD TRMLOADTH.
9. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LDR. In this step, set LDR
First, LDR Second, LDR Third, and LDR Fourth to appropriate values.
The setting of this parameter is effective for all BTSs under the BSC. This step is
mandatory if the control over transmission resource congestion is required.
10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSPORTTS. In this step, set BTS In Port
NO. to the number of the port that the base station is connected to, Port Direction to
the same direction as the base station, and TS Type to ALL(ALL).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSFORBIDTS to block flex timeslots. In
this step, set Start Timeslot No., Start Sub Timeslot No., End Timeslot NO., and
End Sub Timeslot NO. according to the timeslot No. and sub-timeslot No. of Flex
timeslots to ensure that only two contiguous 8 kbit/s sub-timeslots are used for Flex
Abis.
NOTE
Do not block any timeslot other than Flex Abis timeslots. Timeslots are blocked in unit of 16 kbit/
s subtimeslots, and reserve only one 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot for services.
3. Run the MML command DEA GCELL. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of
the cell to be blocked. Repeat this step until there is only one cell under the BTS.
4. Run the MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, set Channel
No. to the number of the channel to be blocked, and Administrative State to Lock
(Lock). Repeat this step until the cell under the BTS has only one BCCH, one SDCCH,
and two TCHs.
5. Use the test MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell, and keep the call alive.
Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ABISTS to query the timeslot state. In this
step, specify Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No., and set State to OCCUPIED
(OCCUPIED). Check that the Flex Abis timeslot corresponding to the TCH occupied
by the call is the timeslot that is unblocked.
6. End the call and block the occupied TCH by performing the previous steps. Then,
only one unblocked TCH is available.
7. Use the test MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell, and keep the call alive.
Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ABISTS to check the state of timeslots. In
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 78 Configuring Flex Abis
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
256
this step, specify Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No., and set State to OCCUPIED
(OCCUPIED). Check that the call initiated by the MS is carried on a new TCH whose
Flex Abis timeslot is unblocked.
8. Hang up the call.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.
NOTE
This operation will cause the BTS to be out-of-service. Therefore, perform this operation during
off-peak hours.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Flex Abis Mode to
FIX_16K_ABIS(Fix Abis).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.
----End
Example
//Activating Flex Abis
DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, NEWNAME="bts-3900",
FLEXABISMODE=FLEX_ABIS, MPMODE=MODE4_1;
SET BTSFLEXABISPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ABISRESADJTCHHFUNSW=YES;
ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ACTTYPE=ACTALL;
//Deactivating Flex Abis
DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, NEWNAME="bts-3900",
FLEXABISMODE=FIX_16K_ABIS;
ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ACTTYPE=ACTALL;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 78 Configuring Flex Abis
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
257
79 Configuring BTS Local Switch
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117702
BTS Local Switch.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
BTS local switching applies only to BTSs using double-transceiver units and 3900 series
base stations in TDM or IP transmission mode.
l Dependencies on Other Features
In Abis over TDM transmission mode, this feature depends on the feature
GBFD-117301 Flex Abis.
In Abis over IP transmission mode, this feature depends on the features GBFD-118601
Abis over IP and GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1.
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-118602 A over IP,
GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1, GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization,
GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis, GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass, GBFD-115601
Automatic Level Control (ALC), GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC),
GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR), GBFD-115701 TFO, GBFD-115703
Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC), GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss
Concealment (EPLC), GBFD-115711 EVAD, GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate
Threshold Adaptive Adjustment, GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The BSC works in either BM/TC separated mode or BM/TC combined mode, and the
TDM transmission mode is applied over the Ater and A interfaces.
At sites where BTS312s and BTS3012s combine into groups, BSS local switching is
enabled only when both the BTS software and the TRX software support it.
If the calling MS and the called MS are registered on two different MSCs, BSS local
switching is not supported regardless of whether the two MSCs are connected to the
same MGW or different MGWs.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 79 Configuring BTS Local Switch
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
258
In High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) transmission mode, BSS local switching is
not supported.
Context
BTS local switching applies only to BTSs using double-transceiver units and 3900 series base
stations in TDM or IP transmission mode.
When a BTS uses the TDM transmission mode, the BTS must be enabled with Flex Abis or
SemiSolid mode.
When a BTS uses the IP transmission mode, BTS local switching is classified into the local
switching under a BTS and the local switching between IP BTSs in a local switching area. The
local switching under a BTS is considered as a special case of the local switching between IP
BTSs in a local switching area. Local switching area refers to the area where the BTSs are in IP
transmission mode and are connected to the same BSC.
BTS local switching saves transmission resources on the Abis and Ater interfaces and reduces
the TC processing delay during a call.
If the MSC is not provided by Huawei, the following functions are unavailable in BTS local
switching mode: MSC playing the announcement during a call, DTMF number receiving during
a call, speech service and then fax service, and separate billing of BSS local switching.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
TDM transmission
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSSLS. In this step, set BSS Local
Switching General Strategy to BTSPRIORITY(BTS Priority) or BTSONLY
(BTS Only) and set Options for BTS Local Switch and Avoid Number for
BTS to appropriate values.
If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to ABISCONGESTS(Start When
Abis Congests), you need to specify Abis Jam Rate for BTS Local Switch.
If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by Prefix
Number), you need to specify Prefix Number for BTS.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE to determine whether BSS
local switching is performed by the BSC only or by both the BSC and the MSC.
If the BSC6900 is expected to perform BSS local switching independently
based on network planning, you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local
Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).
If the MSC is expected to be involved in BSS local switching based on network
planning, you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to BASIC
(Basic Function) or ENHANCED(Enhanced Function) and then set related
parameters on the MSC side.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Flex Abis
Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) or SEMI_ABIS(Semisolid Abis).
NOTE
1. Before performing this step, run the MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS
if it has been activated.
2. After performing this step, run the MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 79 Configuring BTS Local Switch
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
259
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLSW. In this step, set Support BTS
Local Switch to YES(Yes).
IP transmission
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSSLS. In this step, set BSS Local
Switching General Strategy to BTSPRIORITY(BTS Priority) or BTSONLY
(BTS Only) and set Options for BTS Local Switch and Avoid Number for
BTS to appropriate values.
If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to ABISCONGESTS(Start When
Abis Congests), you need to specify Abis Jam Rate for BTS Local Switch.
If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by Prefix
Number), you need to specify Prefix Number for BTS.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE to determine whether BSS
local switching is performed by the BSC only or by both the BSC and the MSC.
If the BSC6900 is expected to perform BSS local switching independently
based on network planning, you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local
Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).
If the MSC is expected to be involved in BSS local switching based on network
planning, you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to BASIC
(Basic Function) or ENHANCED(Enhanced Function) and then set related
parameters on the MSC side.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLSW. In this step, set Support BTS
Local Switch to YES(Yes). If the cross-BTS local switching function is enabled,
Region Information must be specified.
NOTE
XPUs where control-plane services of BTSs under the same local switching area are located
must be managed by the same MPU.
l Run the BSC6900MML command LST BTS to query the mapping relationship between the
BTS and the XPU.
l Run the BSC6900MML command LST BRD to query the mapping relationship between
the XPU and the MPU.
If you need to configure BTS 1 and BTS 2 under the same local switching area, but the XPUs
where the contror-plane services for BTS 1 and BTS 2 are located are managed by different
MPUs, perform the following operations:
1. Configure region information about BTS 1.
2. Deactivate BTS 2.
3. Configure region information about BTS 2 to be the same as that of BTS 1.
4. Activate BTS 2.
l Verification Procedure
1. Calling and called MSs start a conversation under the BTS enabled with the local
switching function.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES to query call resources used by
an MS.
NOTE
If BTS local switching is enabled successfully, no TC Resource Info and Abis Chno Ts Info is
displayed.
l Deactivation Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 79 Configuring BTS Local Switch
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
260
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSSLS. In this step, set BSS Local
Switching General Strategy to NEITHERSTART(Neither Start) or BSCONLY
(BSC Only).
----End
Example
//Activating BTS Local Switch over TDM transmission
SET BSSLS: BssLsGenMode=BTSONLY, BtsLsStartMode=PREFIXNUMBER,
MsisdnPrfxList2StartBtsLs1="139", MsisdnSegList2AvoidBtsLs1="138";
MOD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, BSSLSMSCCOOP=NONSUPPORT;
MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, FLEXABISMODE=FLEX_ABIS;
SET BTSLSW: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ISSUPPORTBTSLSWITCH=YES;
//Verifying BTS Local Switch
DSP CALLRES: USERIDTYPE=BYMSISDN, MSISDN="13988888888";
//Deactivating BTS Local Switch
SET BSSLS: BssLsGenMode=BSCONLY;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 79 Configuring BTS Local Switch
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
261
80 Configuring Abis Transmission
Optimization
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118401
Abis Transmission Optimization.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
An Abis interface processing board PEUa or POUc is configured.
In BM/TC separated scenarios, a DPUc board is configured for processing HDLC
frames in the subrack where the PEUa board is located.
The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch,
GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on A-bis Interface, or GBFD-117301 Flex Abis.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The BTS software version supports this function.
Context
Abis transmission optimization allows multiple links to be multiplexed onto a channel composed
of several timeslots, enabling more efficient use of transmission resources.
CAUTION
l HDLC does not support bypass or Flex Abis.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 80 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
262
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add a BTS. In this step, set BTS
Index to 1, BTS Type to BTS3012, Service Type to HDLC, Abis ByPass Mode to
FALSE, and Config Ring to NO.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCABINET to add a cabinet to a BTS.
In this step, set BTS Name to the BTS name specified in Step 1, Cabinet No. to 0,
and Cabinet Type to the BTS type specified in Step 1.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTRXBRD to add a TRX board to the
BTS. In this step, set Board Type to TRU, Subrack No. to 0, and Slot No. to 0.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add a GSM cell. In this step, set
Cell Index to 1, Cell Name to gcell-1, Freq. Band to GSM900, MCC to 502,
MNC to 85, Cell LAC to H'0185, Cell CI to 2, Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell,
Start Flex MAIO Switch to OFF, and Operator Name to 46000.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLFREQ to add a frequency to the
cell. In this step, set Cell Index to the cell index specified in Step 4 and Frequency
1 to 21.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLOSPMAP to add the mapping
between the cell and the Originating Signaling Point (OSP). In this step, set Cell
Index to the cell index specified in Step 4 and OSP Code to the Originating Signaling
Point Code (OPC) of the cell.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GTRX to add a carrier frequency. In this
step, set Cell Index to the cell index specified in Step 4, TRX ID to 1, and
Frequency to the frequency specified in Step 5.
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CELLBIND2BTS to bind the cell to the
BTS. In this step, set Cell Index to the cell index specified in Step 4 and BTS
Index to the BTS index specified in Step 1.
9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD to bind the logical
carrier frequency to the physical TRX board. In this step, set TRX ID to the TRX ID
specified in Step 7, TRX Board to TRU, TRX Board Pass No. to 0, Subrack No.
to 1, and Slot No. to 0.
10. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set channel information
about the TRX. In this step, set TRX ID to the TRX ID specified in Step 7, Channel
No. to 0, Channel Type to MBCCH, and Timeslot Priority to 1.
11. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set channel information
about the TRX. In this step, set TRX ID to the TRX ID specified in Step 7, Channel
No. to 1, Channel Type to SDCCH8, and Timeslot Priority to 2.
12. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV to set TRX attributes. In this
step, set TRX ID to the TRX ID specified in Step 7 and Power Level to 7.
13. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connection
between the BTS and the BSC6900. In this step, set BTS Index to the BTS index
specified in Step 1, BTS In Port No. to 0, Dest Node Type to BSC, Subrack No. to
the number of the subrack where the BSC interface board is located, Slot No. to the
number of the slot where the BSC interface board is located, and Port No. to 0.
14. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS. In this step, set
BTS Index to the BTS index specified in Step 1.
l Verification Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 80 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
263
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT.
Expected result: The value of Cell Initialized is Yes and the value of Channel
Fault is No.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS. In this step, set BTS Index to the BTS
index specified in Step 1 in the activation procedure.
----End
Example
//Activating Abis Transmission Optimization
ADD BTS: BTSID=1, BTSNAME="BTS-1", BTSTYPE=BTS3012, SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT,
SERVICEMODE=HDLC, FLEXABISMODE=FIX_16K_ABIS, ABISBYPASSMODE=FALSE,
ISCONFIGEDRING=NO, MPMODE=MODE4_1;
ADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYNAME ,BTSNAME="BTS-1", CN=0, TYPE=BTS3012;
ADD BTSTRXBRD: IDTYPE=BYNAME ,BTSNAME="BTS-1",BT=TRU ,SRN=1, SN=0;
ADD GCELL: CELLID=1, CELLNAME="gcell-1", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="502",
MNC="85", LAC=H'0185, CI=2, IUOTP=Normal_cell, OPNAME="46000";
ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, FREQ1=21;
ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, OPC=H'B85;
ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TRXID=1, FREQ=41;
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1;
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2;
ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1,BTSID=1;
ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=1, TRXTP=TRU, TRXPN=0, SRN=1, SN=0;
ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, INPN=0, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=14,
PN=0;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=1, POWL=7;
ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;
//Verifying Abis Transmission Optimization
DSP BTSSTAT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSIDLST=1;
//Deactivating Abis Transmission Optimization
DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;
RMV BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 80 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
264
81 Configuring Abis Congestion Trigger
HR Distribution
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-112013
Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Other Features
The feature GBFD-113402 Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR has been
configured before this feature is activated.
In Abis over TDM transmission mode, the feature GBFD-117301 Flex Abis has also
been configured before this feature is activated.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Dependencies on Running Environment
This feature does not have any special requirements for the running environment.
l Requirements for Transmission Networking
This feature is applicable to the following scenarios:
The Abis interface uses IP over E1 transmission.
The Abis interface uses IP over Ethernet transmission.
The Abis interface uses TDM transmission and the feature GBFD-117301 Flex Abis
has been configured.
l Requirements for Other NEs and Third-Party Devices
Both the MSC and MSs support HR speech versions.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 81 Configuring Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
265
Context
Table 81-1 Data Preparation
Parameter Name Parameter
ID
Parameter Settings Data Source
LDR First LDRFST If this parameter is set to
CSPH, this feature will be
activated.
If this parameter is set to
CLOSE, this feature will be
deactivated.
Network planning
TRM load threshold
index
TRMLOA
DTHINDE
X
The value of this parameter
must be unique.
Network planning
Transport Type TRANST This parameter must be set to
the actual type of transmission
used by the Abis interface.
Network planning
Threshold type THTYPE This parameter can be set to
Percentage or Band Width.
Internal planning

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST LDR. In this step, query the LDR
configuration.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LDR. In this step, set LDR First to CSPH
and LDR Second, LDR Third, or LDR Fourth to a value except CSPH.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMLOADTH. In this step, set TRM load
threshold index, Transport Type, and Threshold type to appropriate values
according to threshold types.
4. In IP transmission mode, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPPATH. In this
step, set the IP path-related parameters to appropriate values. For example, set TRM
load threshold index to the same value as that set in Step 3.
5. In TDM transmission mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
BSCABISPRIMAP. In this step, configure the Abis priority mapping on the BSC
side. For example, set TRM load threshold index to the same value as that set in
Step 3.
l Verification Procedure
This feature can be enabled only when congestion occurs on the Abis interface. Therefore,
this feature cannot be verified when the TRM load threshold is within a normal range.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST LDR. In this step, query the LDR
configuration.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 81 Configuring Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
266
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LDR. In this step, change the value of LDR
First, LDR Second, LDR Third, or LDR Fourth from CSPH to CLOSE.
----End
Example
//Activating Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution
//Querying the LDR configuration
LST LDR:;
//The result is as follows:
%%LST LDR:;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.
List LDR
--------
LDR First LDR Second LDR Third LDR Fourth
PS Downspeeding AMRC CS Preference TCHH CS TCHF-TCHH HO
(Number of results = 1)
--- END
//Setting "LDR First" to "CS Preference TCHH" and "LDR Third" to "PS
Downspeeding" to ensure the LDR-related parameters are set to different
values
SET LDR: LDRFST=CSPH, LSRTRD=PSDOWN;
//Enabling the Abis interface to use IP transmission
ADD TRMLOADTH: TRMLOADTHINDEX=10, TRANST=IP, THTYPE=PERCENTAGE;
MOD IPPATH: ANI=1, PATHID=1, ITFT=ABIS, TRMLOADTHINDEX=10;
//Enabling the Abis interface to use TDM transmission
ADD TRMLOADTH: TRMLOADTHINDEX=11, TRANST=TDM;
SET BSCABISPRIMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TRANSTYPE=TDM, LOADTHSW=ON,
TRMLOADTHINDEX=11;
//Deactivating Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution
//Querying the LDR configuration
LST LDR:;
//The result is as follows:
%%LST LDR:;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.
List LDR
--------
LDR First LDR Second LDR Third LDR Fourth
CS Preference TCHH AMRC PS Downspeeding CS TCHF-TCHH HO
(Number of results = 1)
--- END
//Setting "CS Preference TCHH" to "CLOSE"
SET LDR: LDRFST=CLOSE;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 81 Configuring Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
267
82 Configuring Flex Ater
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116901
Flex Ater.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The TC subrack is located separately from the BSC.
The Ater interface uses the TDM transmission mode.
Context
With this feature, the Ater resources are classified into 16 kbit/s timeslots and 8 kbit/s timeslots.
The BSC allocates the Ater resources according to the channel type during the call establishment.
If TCHFs are allocated on the Um interface, 16 kbit/s timeslots are used on the Ater interface.
If TCHHs are allocated on the Um interface, 8 kbit/s timeslots are used on the Ater interface.
Therefore, the Ater resources are fully utilized.
This feature effectively reduces the transmission investment on the Ater interface in remote TC
networking.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA with Switch of 8K on
Ater set to YES(Yes).
l Verification Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 82 Configuring Flex Ater
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
268
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ATERTS with BM/TC config flag set to
BM or TC and Ater connection path index to the number of an Ater connection path.
Expected result: The number of occupied 16 kbit/s resources is equal to that of full-
rate calls. In addition, the number of occupied 8 kbit/s resources is equal to that of
half-rate calls. In this case, Flex Ater is enabled.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA with Switch of 8K on
Ater set to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating Flex Ater
SET OTHSOFTPARA: Ater8KSw=YES;
//Deactivating Flex Ater
SET OTHSOFTPARA: Ater8KSw=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 82 Configuring Flex Ater
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
269
83 Configuring BSC Local Switch
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117701
BSC Local Switch.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
When the Abis interface is in TDM transmission mode, this feature cannot be used
together with the feature GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization,
GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, GBFD-118602 A over
IP, and GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.
When the Abis interface is in IP transmission mode, this feature cannot be used together
with the feature GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization, GBFD-118602 A
over IP, and GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The BSC works in basic module (BM)/transcoder (TC) separate mode and TDM
transmission mode is applied over the Ater interface.
With BSC Local Switch, neither the base station serving the calling MS nor that serving
the called MS uses Abis Transmission Optimization.
In sites with a combined BTS cabinet group, BSS local switching can be enabled only
when both the BTS software and the TRX software support it.
Context
With this feature, the BSC performs a voice loopback within the BSC if the calling MS and
called MS are located under the same BSC. Voice signals are no longer transmitted on the Ater
or A interface, therefore releasing transmission resources on the Ater interface and the transcoder
(TC) coding resources.
This feature helps save local or remote transmission resources on the Ater interface.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 83 Configuring BSC Local Switch
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
270
If the MSC is not provided by Huawei, the following functions are unavailable in the BSC Local
Switch mode: MSC playing the announcement during a call, DTMF number receiving during a
call, speech service first and then fax service, and independent billing of BSS local switching.
The BSS local switching is not supported as follow: The BSC is configured the MSC Pool
function. The calling MS and the called MS are registered on more different MGWs, and the
MGW is in IP transmission mode. The BTS is in High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC)
transmission mode.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the SET BSSLS command. In this step, set BSS Local Switching General
Strategy to BSCPRIORITY(BSC Priority) or BSCONLY(BSC Only), and specify
Options for BSC Local Switch and Avoid Number for BTS.
NOTE
l If Options for BSC Local Switch is set to ATERCONGESTS(Start When Ater
Congests), you need to specify Ater Jam Rate for BSC Local Switch.
l If Options for BSC Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by Prefix
Number), you need to specify Prefix Number for BSC.
2. Run the MOD GCNNODE command to configure whether BSS local switching is
performed by the BSC only or by both the BSC and the MSC.
NOTE
l If only the BSC performs BSS local switching as selected by the network plan, you need
to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).
l If both the BSC and the MSC perform BSS local switching as selected by the network plan,
you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to BASIC(Basic Function) or
ENHANCED(Enhanced Function), and then set related parameters on the MSC side to
support BSS local switching.
3. Run the SET BTSLSW command. In this step, set Support BTS Local Switch to
YES(Yes).
l Verification Procedure
1. Ensure that the calling and called MSs are controlled by the same BSC.
2. Run the DSP CALLRES command to query call resources of an MS.
Expected result: If BSC Local Switch is enabled successfully, information about A
interface resources of the TC subrack and information about Abis interface resources
of the BM subrack are displayed in the result.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the SET BSSLS command. In this step, set BSS Local Switching General
Strategy to NEITHERSTART(Neither Start) or BTSONLY(BTS Only).
----End
Example
//Activating BSC Local Switch
SET BSSLS: BssLsGenMode=BSCONLY, BscLsStartMode=PREFIXNUMBER,
MsisdnPrfxList2StartBscLs1="139";
MOD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, BSSLSMSCCOOP=NONSUPPORT;
SET BTSLSW: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ISSUPPORTBTSLSWITCH=YES;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 83 Configuring BSC Local Switch
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
271
//Deactivating BSC Local Switch
SET BSSLS: BssLsGenMode=NEITHERSTART;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 83 Configuring BSC Local Switch
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
272
84 Configuring Ater Compression
Transmission
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116902
Ater Compression Transmission.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The POUc board is in position.
When the Abis interface uses TDM transmission, the DPUc board is configured.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature cannot be used together with GBFD-116901 Flex Ater.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The BSC initial configuration is complete. The BM/TC subracks are in separated
configuration mode, and the TC subrack is configured remotely.
Context
When the BM/TC subracks are in separated configuration mode and the TC subrack is configured
remotely, the compressed IP transmission mode over the Ater interface can be adopted to
improve the transmission efficiency over the Ater interface and reduce the transmission cost.
The Ater Compression Transmission feature is based on IP over PPP over STM-1 technology,
where the IP packets of speech data are encapsulated using the PPP and then transmitted over
the channelized STM-1.
The compressed IP transmission mode over the Ater interface does not support IP over FE/GE,
but only supports IP over E1 for transmitting the user plane data. The configuration on the
signaling plane is similar to that in Ater over TDM mode.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 84 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
273
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add a POUc board to the BM
subrack. Then, repeat the operation to add a POUc board to the TC subrack.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC with Service Mode set to
SEPARATE(Separate) and Ater Interface Transfer Mode to IP(IP).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH to add an Ater
connection path between the MPS and the TCS.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML to add an Ater OML between
the MPS and the main TCS.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL to add an Ater signaling link
between the MPS/EPS and the TCS.
6. Configure the physical layer and data link layer for the POUc board by referring to
Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the POUc Board.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE with Adjacent Node Type set
to BSC(Ater Interface on BSC) to add an adjacent node.
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE with Adjacent Node Type set
to TC(Ater Interface on TC) to add an adjacent node.
9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path to the BM
subrack. Then, run the command again to add an IP path to the TC subrack. To add
more IP paths, run this command repeatedly.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP E1T1 to check the setting of Port State.
2. Verify the links at the physical layer.
Do as follows when the links at the physical layer are configured as PPP links:
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PPPLNK to query the settings of
Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Source IP address set to
the same value as Local IP address in the DSP PPPLNK command and
Destination IP address set to the same value as Peer IP address in the DSP
PPPLNK command.
Expected result: The statistics on PING packets can be received, which
indicates that the MLPPP link is functional.
Do as follows when the links at the physical layer are configured as MLPPP links:
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPGRP to query the settings of
Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address.
b. Run the MML command DSP MPLNK to query the settings of Link state
and LCP negotiated state.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Source IP address set to
the same value as Local IP address in the DSP MPGRP command and
Destination IP address set to the same value as Peer IP address in the DSP
MPGRP command.
Expected result: The statistics on PING packets can be received, which
indicates that the MLPPP link is functional.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LAPDLNK to check whether the LAPD link
is functional.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 84 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
274
Expected result: UsageStatus is set to Normal, which indicates that the LAPD link
is functional.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the state of an adjacent
node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth.
Expected result: Operation state is Available, and the related bandwidth is greater
than 0. That is, the adjacent node is functional.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to check whether the IP path is
available.
Expected result: Operation state is Available and the available bandwidth is greater
than 0. That is, the IP path is functional.
6. Make a call. The call is set up successfully. When the call is set up, run the
BSC6900 MML command DSP IPCHN to query the usage of the Ater interface
resources.
Expected result: The UDP usage on the BM side and the TC side are the same.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
/*Activating the feature Ater Compression Transmission*/
//Adding a POUc board
ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=POUc, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, SN=16, RED=NO,
ISTCBRD=NO, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0;
ADD BRD: SRN=3, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=POUc, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, SN=16, RED=NO,
ISTCBRD=YES;
//Setting the transmission mode over the Ater interface
SET BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=SEPARATE, ATERTRANSMODE=IP;
//Adding an Ater connection path
ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=0, BMSRN=0, BMSN=16, BMPN=0, TCSRN=3, TCSN=16,
TCPN=0;
ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=1, BMSRN=0, BMSN=16, BMPN=1, TCSRN=3, TCSN=16,
TCPN=1;
ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=2, BMSRN=0, BMSN=16, BMPN=2, TCSRN=3, TCSN=16,
TCPN=2;
ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=3, BMSRN=0, BMSN=16, BMPN=3, TCSRN=3, TCSN=16,
TCPN=3;
//Adding an Ater OML
ADD ATEROML: ATEROMLINX=0, ATERPIDX=0,
TSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-
1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&T
S22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;
ADD ATEROML: ATEROMLINX=1, ATERPIDX=1,
TSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-
1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&T
S22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;
//Adding an Ater signaling link
ADD ATERCONSL: ATERIDX=2,
ATERMASK=TS1-0&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS1
1-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0
&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0,
TNMODE=TRRS;
//Adding an Ater PPP link to the BM subrack
ADD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=16, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=6,
TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS1
1-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 84 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
275
&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1,
BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.1", MASK="255.255.255.0",
PEERIP="1.1.1.2", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable, PPPMUX=Disable,
AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF;
//Adding an Ater PPP link to the TC subrack
ADD PPPLNK: SRN=3, SN=16, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=6,
TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS1
1-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1
&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1,
BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.2", MASK="255.255.255.0",
PEERIP="1.1.1.1", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable, PPPMUX=Disable,
AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF;
//Adding an Ater adjacent node to the BM subrack
ADD ADJNODE: ANI=0, NAME="adjnode0", NODET=BSC, BSCID=0;
//Adding an Ater adjacent node to the TC subrack
ADD ADJNODE: ANI=1, NAME="adjnode1", NODET=TC;
//Adding an Ater IP path to the BM subrack
ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=0, ITFT=ATER, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="1.1.1.2",
PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.1", TXBW=2000, RXBW=2000, CARRYFLAG=NULL,
PATHCHK=DISABLED;
//Adding an Ater IP path to the TC subrack
ADD IPPATH: ANI=1, PATHID=1, ITFT=ATER, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="1.1.1.1",
PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.2", TXBW=2000, RXBW=2000, CARRYFLAG=NULL,
PATHCHK=DISABLED;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 84 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
276
85 Configuring Ring Topology
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117801
Ring Topology.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The BTS3900B does not support this feature.
This feature cannot be enabled when a DXX device is used.
Reverse and forward links can be connected to the same Abis interface board or different
Abis interface boards in the same BM subrack, but cannot be connected to different
subracks.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and
OML on A-bis Interface, GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/
T1, GBFD-113728 OML Backup, and GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass.
GBFD-117301 Flex Abis cannot be used together with BTS ring topology II.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
BTS ring topology I
When this feature is simultaneously enabled with Flex Abis, Flex Abis must be
configured on all BTSs, and only a single E1 link can be configured on the forward
and reverse links.
BTS ring topology II
Only a single E1 link can be configured on the forward and reverse links.
HDLC ring topology (only BTS ring topology II is supported)
Hybrid networking of HDLC and TDM is not supported. Secondary link is not
supported.
The cabinets of the BTS30 or BTS312 cannot be used in cabinet groups.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 85 Configuring Ring Topology
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
277
The configuration of exclusive timeslots is supported, but the configuration of
monitoring timeslots is not supported.
Local switching is not supported.
The conversion of the bearing modes, that is, the conversion from the HDLC ring
topology to the TDM ring topology, is not supported.
Timeslots cannot be manually allocated.
Context
A ring topology is a special type of chain topology. In a ring topology, BTSs connect to each
other to form a common chain first, and then the lowest-level BTS is connected to the BSC
through a transmission link, thereby forming a ring. If the transmission link is disconnected at
a point of the ring, the topology of BTSs that precede the breakpoint remains unchanged. BTSs
that follow the breakpoint form a new chain in the reverse direction.
Compared with a common chain topology, the ring topology has the following advantage: When
a transmission link is disconnected at a point, the ring automatically breaks into two chains. In
this way, BTSs that precede and follow the breakpoint can work normally, improving system
robustness.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS. In this step, set Config Ring to YES
(Yes).
2. Configure data for base station equipment by referring to Configuring the Equipment
Data.
3. Configure the logical data for the base station by referring to Configuring the Logical
Data.
4. Configure the transmission data for the base station by referring to TDM/HDLC.
NOTE
In the forward direction, a BTS in a ring connects to an upper-level BTS or BSC through port
0, and it connects to a lower-level BTS or BSC through port 1.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRINGATTR to configure the attributes
of the ring.
To enable BTS ring topology I, set Configure Ring II to NO(No), and set Ring
I Wait Time Before Switch and Ring I Try Rotating Duration Time based on
your individual needs.
To enable BTS ring topology II, set Configure Ring II to YES(Yes), and set Ring
II Wait Time Before Switch, Ring II Try Rotating Duration Time, Ring II
Rotating Penalty Time, T200, T203, andN200 based on your individual needs.
6. Configuring BTS clock by referring to Configuring a Clock for a BTS.
7. Activate the base station configuration by referring to Activating the BTS
Configuration.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSRINGPARA.
Expected result: The parameter settings in the query results are consistent with the
configured values.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 85 Configuring Ring Topology
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
278
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Config Ring to NO
(No).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSCONNECT to remove a reverse ring
connection.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.
----End
Example
//Activating Ring Topology
ADD BTS: BTSID=0, BTSNAME="3900", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM,
SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, ISCONFIGEDRING=YES,
SRANMODE=SUPPORT;
ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=0, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6,
DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0;
ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=1, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6,
DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=14, PN=1;
SET BTSRINGATTR: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, FASTCNETFLAG=YES, BREAKTIME=0,
BUILDTIME=60, ESTTIME=0, T200=12, T203=1, N200=3;
ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
//Verifying Ring Topology
DSP BTSRINGPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
//Deactivating Ring Topology
DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
MOD BTS:IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ISCONFIGEDRING=NO;
RMV BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=1, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6;
ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 85 Configuring Ring Topology
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
279
86 Configuring TRX Cooperation
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113801
TRX Cooperation.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The cell supports TRX cooperation.
At least two TRXs in the same band are configured in the cell.
The cell supports BCCH TRX cooperation.
The cell supports baseband FH TRX cooperation.
The cell supports switchback of BCCH TRX cooperation.
The cell supports switchback of baseband FH TRX cooperation.
Context
TRX cooperation enables the BSC to automatically designate an available TRX in the cell to
replace a faulty BCCH TRX or baseband FH TRX. This ensures that the cell can work properly
when faults occur on some TRXs in the cell. There are two types of TRX cooperation: BCCH
TRX cooperation and baseband FH TRX cooperation.
l BCCH TRX cooperation enables the BSC to use the TRX cooperation algorithm to select
an available TRX as the new BCCH TRX when the original BCCH TRX is faulty. This
ensures that the cell can work properly. When the fault on the original BCCH TRX is
rectified, the BSC can switch the BCCH back to the original TRX.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 86 Configuring TRX Cooperation
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
280
l Baseband FH TRX cooperation enables the BSC to remove a TRX involved in baseband
FH from the FH group when the TRX is faulty in a cell, whereas other TRXs in the FH
group remain in baseband FH.
TRX cooperation is specific to each cell. That is, you can separately enable or disable the TRX
cooperation function for each cell.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set TRX
Aiding Function Control to AllowReImmed(Allowed & Recover Immediately)
and Switchback Policy of Baseband FH Mutual Aid to PART(Part).
l Verification Procedure
Verifying BCCH TRX cooperation and switchback of BCCH TRX cooperation
1. Power off the BCCH TRX for the cell. In this way, the BCCH TRX becomes faulty,
and therefore BCCH TRX cooperation is triggered.
2. Wait for about 15 minutes for cell initialization, and then run the BSC6900 MML
command DSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status. Verify that Channel Type
of channel 0 of a TRX (not the initially configured BCCH TRX) is set to Main
BCCH.
3. Use an MS to access the cell enabled with the BCCH TRX cooperation function and
make a call. Verify that the call is set up successfully and the voice quality is clear.
4. Power on the TRX mentioned in Step 1 to enable switchback of BCCH TRX
cooperation.
5. Wait about 15 minutes for cell initialization, and then run the BSC6900 MML
command DSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status. Verify that Channel Type
of channel 0 of the initially configured BCCH TRX is set to Main BCCH.
6. Use an MS to access the cell enabled with the switchback of BCCH TRX cooperation
function and make a call. Verify that the call is set up successfully and the voice quality
is clear.
Verifying baseband FH TRX cooperation and switchback of baseband FH TRX cooperation
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP. In this step,
set Frequency Hopping Mode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping)
and Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX to NO_Hop(No hop).
NOTE
l There are at least two operational TRXs in a baseband FH group to ensure the baseband
FH when a TRX in the same group is faulty.
l Operations such as performing a level-4 reset of a base station, adding a base station after
removing it, activating a base station, and deactivating a base station clear the base station
state recorded at the BSC. As a result, the cell participating in baseband FH TRX
cooperation returns to the initial state.
2. Initiate Abis-interface CS message tracing by referring to Tracing CS Domain
Messages on the Abis Interface. In the Abis Interface CS Trace dialog box, click the
OML tab. Then, power off a TRX in the baseband FH group to enable baseband FH
TRX cooperation.
3. Wait 15 minutes, and then check that the IE "arfcnLst" in the Set Channel Attributes
message of the faulty TRX contains only one frequency whereas "arfcnLst" in the Set
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 86 Configuring TRX Cooperation
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
281
Channel Attributes message of other TRXs in the same baseband FH group contains
multiple frequencies except the frequency of the faulty TRX.
4. Initiate A-interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages on the A
Interface. In the A Interface Trace dialog box, click the BSSAP tab, and set related
parameters to start the tracing task. Initiate Abis-interface CS message tracing by
referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. In the Abis Interface
CS Trace dialog box, click the RSL tab, and set related parameters to start the tracing
task. Use an MS to access the test cell and then originate a call. Verify that the voice
is clear during the call and that the messages traced over the Abis and A interfaces are
correct. Ensure that the field h in the IE "hopping-channel" of the ASSIGNMENT
COMMAND message is 1.
5. Power on the TRX mentioned in Step 2 to enable switchback of baseband FH TRX
cooperation.
6. Wait 15 minutes, and then verify that the IE "arfcnLst" in the Set Channel Attributes
message of the fault-rectified TRX contains all frequencies in the baseband FH group.
7. Use an MS to access the test cell and then originate a call. Verify that the voice is clear
during the call and that the messages traced over the Abis and A interfaces are correct.
Ensure that h in the IE "hopping-channel" of the ASSIGNMENT COMMAND
message is 1.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set TRX
Aiding Function Control to TRXAid_NotAllow(TRX Aiding Not Allowed).
----End
Example
//Activating TRX Cooperation
SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TRXAIDSWITCH=AllowReImmed,
BHPREPOLICY=PART;
//Verifying TRX Cooperation
Verifying BCCH TRX cooperation and switchback of BCCH TRX cooperation
DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1;
Verifying baseband FH TRX cooperation and switchback of baseband FH TRX
cooperation
SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH,
BCCHTRXHP=NO_Hop;
//Deactivating TRX Cooperation
SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TRXAIDSWITCH=TRXAid_NotAllow;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 86 Configuring TRX Cooperation
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
282
87 Configuring MSC Pool
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117401
MSC Pool.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
Two MSs are available, and they are registered at the HLR.
The MSCs and the MGWs are fully interconnected, and the MSC pool function is
configured on the MSC side.
The interconnection data between the BSC6900 and the MSC is negotiated.
An original signaling point (OSP) and at least two destination signaling points (DSPs)
are configured. For details, see Configuring the OPC and DPC.
The transmission over the A interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the A
Interface (over TDM) or Configuring the Control Plane of the A Interface (over IP).
Context
An MSC pool consists of multiple MSCs processing traffic from one MSC pool area. A
BSC6900 belonging to an MSC pool area is connected to each MSC in the MSC pool. All MSCs
in the MSC pool share load and resources for equal distribution of traffic in the MSC pool,
reducing inter-MSC handovers and providing disaster-tolerant redundancy capabilities.
One BSC6900 can be connected to a maximum of 32 MSCs.
When the MSC does not support the function A Interface Circuits Managed by the MGW or the
function is disabled, DPCs in an MSC pool are configured for different DPC groups.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 87 Configuring MSC Pool
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
283
NOTE
This section uses the configuration of two DSPs whose DPX Index are set to 0 and 1 as an example.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNOPERATOR to add a GSM operator.
In this step, set Operator Type, Operator Index, Operator Name, MCC, and
MNC to appropriate values; set MSC Pool Function Enabled to YES(Yes); and set
Length of NRI in TMSI and MSC NULL-NRI Value based on the data negotiated
with the MSC.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE to add a CN node for the first
DSP. In this step, set DSP index to 0, set Operator Name to the value set in Step
1, set CN Node Index and DPC Group Index appropriately, and set MSC
Administrable State, MSC ID, and MSC Available Capability<K User
number> based on the data negotiated with the MSC.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE to add a CN node for the second
DSP. In this step, set DSP index to 1, set Operator Name to the value set in Step
1, set CN Node Index and DPC Group Index appropriately, and set MSC
Administrable State, MSC ID, and MSC Available Capability<K User
number> based on the data negotiated with the MSC.
NOTE
Repeat the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE if there are more than two DSPs.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRIMSCMAP to add the mapping between
an NRI and an MSC. In this step, set NRI Value based on the data negotiated with
the MSC. Ensure that the NRI value is the same as that on the MSC side.
l Verification Procedure
1. Enable the TMSI reallocation function on the MSC side.
2. On the LMT, initiate A-interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages
on the A Interface. In this step, set Trace Type to BSSAP and DPC(Hex) to the DSP
of MSC1.
3. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the cell where
MS1 camps on. Then, click Submit. The A Interface Trace message window is
displayed.
NOTE
Initiate A-interface message tracing with the DSP of MSC2 by using the method described in Step
2 and Step 3.
4. Power on MS1. Use MS1 to initiate a location update procedure on the MSC1 side.
The CN assigns a TMSI to MS1.
5. Power on MS2. Use MS2 to initiate a location update procedure on the MSC2 side.
The CN assigns a TMSI to MS2.
NOTE
To enable the MS to initiate a location update at a specific MSC, run the BSC6900 MML command
MOD GCNNODE to set MSC Administrable State for all other MSCs to UNAVAIL
(Unavailable). After the location update, set the parameter to NORMAL(Normal).
6. Move MS1 to the coverage area of MSC2. Then, use MS1 to originate a call and check
the A interface message tracing.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 87 Configuring MSC Pool
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
284
Expected result: MS1 sets up the call through MSC1, and the registered MSC of MS1
remains unchanged.
7. Move MS2 to the coverage area of MSC1. Then, use MS2 to originate a call and check
the A interface message tracing.
Expected result: MS2 sets up the call through MSC2, and the registered MSC of MS2
remains unchanged.
NOTE
In the TMSI reallocation procedure, the MSC assigns the TMSI that contains NRI (configured by
the CN) to the MS. With this information, the BSC6900 can allocate the service to an appropriate
MSC when the MS originates a call service. Note that the mapping between the NRI and the MSC
on the BSC6900 side must be consistent with the mapping between the NRI and the MSC on the
CN side. You can use the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRIMSCMAP to configure the mapping
on the BSC6900 side.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set MSC
Pool Function Enabled to NO(No).
----End
Example
/*Activating MSC Pool*/
//Adding a GSM operator and enabling the MSC pool function
ADD GCNOPERATOR: OperatorType=PRIM, OPINDEX=0, OPNAME="op1", MCC="460",
MNC="188",
MSCPOOLALLOW=YES, MSCNRILEN=3, MSCNULLNRI=0, SGSNPOOLALLOW=NO;
//Adding a CN node
ADD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, DPX=0, DPCGIDX=1, OPNAME="op1", MSCCAP=1800,
CNID=0, DFDPC=YES, ATransMode=TDM;
ADD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=1, DPX=0, DPCGIDX=1, OPNAME="op1", MSCCAP=1800,
CNID=1, DFDPC=NO, ATransMode=TDM;
//Adding an NRI-to-MSC mapping
ADD NRIMSCMAP: NRI=10, CNNODEIDX=0;
ADD NRIMSCMAP: NRI=11, CNNODEIDX=1;
/*Deactivating MSC Pool*/
//Disabling the MSC pool function
MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, MSCPOOLALLOW=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 87 Configuring MSC Pool
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
285
88 Configuring the SGSN Pool
About This Chapter
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701
SGSN Pool.
88.1 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over IP)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701
SGSN Pool.
88.2 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over FR)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701
SGSN Pool.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 88 Configuring the SGSN Pool
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
286
88.1 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over IP)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701
SGSN Pool.
Prerequisites
l Dependency on Hardware
The DPUd/XPUa/FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUc/GOUd board is configured. For details, see
Configuring a Board.
l Dependency on Other Features
None
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The basic data of the BSC is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.
The communication between the BSC and the SGSN is normal.
The BSC supports SGSN Pool.
The interface board is configured with a device IP address or port IP address.
Context
SGSN Pool enables multiple SGSNs to form an SGSN pool. The SGSNs in an SGSN pool share
load and resources. Configuring SGSN Pool can expand network capacity, reduce investment
in equipment, implement redundancy, and improve network reliability. In addition, it reduces
the number of inter-SGSN cell reselections, which improves network performance.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set Allow
SGSN Pool to YES(Yes); specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value.
2. Configure the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUc/
GOUd Board.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPCUTYPE to set the type of the packet
control unit (PCU). In this step, set PCU Type to INNER(Built-in PCU).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SGSNNODE to add an SGSN node. In this
step, set Operator Name and SGSN Node ID.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRISGSNMAP to configure the mapping
between the network resource identifier (NRI) and the SGSN.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSE to add a network service entity (NSE).
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLLOCAL to add a network service
virtual link (NSVL) on the BSC6900 side. If the NSE is in static configuration mode,
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 88 Configuring the SGSN Pool
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
287
run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLREMOTE to add an NSVL on the
SGSN side.
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC. In this step, set NSE
Identifier. The mapping between CELL_1 and the first SGSN is complete.
9. Repeat Step 2 through Step 8 to add mapping between CELL_1 and other SGSNs in
the SGSN pool.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PTPBVC to query the state of a PTP BSSGP
virtual connection (PTP BVC) and then record the state.
2. Trace PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in CELL_1 by referring to Tracing PTP
messages on the Gb interface, and check the FLOW CONTROL BVC messages sent
from the BSC to the SGSN through all functional PTP BVCs. If these messages are
correct, SGSN Pool is enabled and functional.
3. Ensure that the MS acessses the network in cell 1. Use the MS to perform PS services.
The MS can perform attach, PDP context activation, upload, and download normally.
According to the traced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PS
services are carried on one PTP BVC.
4. Block the PTP BVC carrying services discussed in step 3. Then ensure the MS acessses
the network in cell 1 and use the MS to perform PS services. The MS can perform
attach, PDP context activation, upload, and download normally. According to the
traced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PS services are carried
on another PTP BVC.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set Allow
SGSN Pool to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Enable SGSN Pool and specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value:
SGSNPOOLALLOW=YES, SGSNNRILEN=1, SGSNNULLNRI=1;
//Configure SGSN Pool (IP transmission mode is used on the Gb
interface):
SET BSCPCUTYPE: TYPE=INNER;
ADD SGSNNODE: OPNAME="abc", CNID=1;
ADD NRISGSNMAP: NRI=1, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1;
ADD NSE: NSEI=1, SRN=1, SN=1, PT=GB_OVER_IP, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1;
ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=1, NSEI=1, IP="131.131.131.132", UDPPN=1355,
SRN=1, SN=1;
ADD PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=2, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=3;
//Query the state of a PTP BVC:
DSP PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=2;
//Deactivate SGSN Pool:
MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=1, SGSNPOOLALLOW=NO;
88.2 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over FR)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701
SGSN Pool.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 88 Configuring the SGSN Pool
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
288
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The DPUd/XPUa/PEUa board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The basic data of the BSC is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.
The communication between the BSC and the SGSN is normal.
The BSC supports SGSN Pool.
Context
The SGSNs in an SGSN pool share load and resources in the pool. Configuring SGSN Pool can
expand network capacity, reduce investment in equipment, implement redundancy, and improve
network reliability. In addition, it reduces the number of inter-SGSN cell reselections, which
improves network performance.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set Allow
SGSN Pool to YES(Yes); specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPCUTYPE to set the type of the packet
control unit (PCU). In this step, set PCU Type to INNER(Built-in PCU).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SGSNNODE to add an SGSN node. In this
step, set Operator Name and SGSN Node ID.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRISGSNMAP to configure the mapping
between the network resource identifier (NRI) and the SGSN.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSE to add a network service entity (NSE).
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BC to add a bearer channel (BC).
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVC to add a network service virtual
connection (NSVC).
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC. In this step, set NSE
Identifier. The mapping between CELL_1 and the first SGSN is complete.
9. Repeat Step 2 through Step 8 to add mapping between CELL_1 and other SGSNs in
the SGSN pool.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PTPBVC to query the state of a PTP BSSGP
virtual connection (PTP BVC) and then record the state.
2. Trace PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in CELL_1 by referring to Tracing PTP
messages on the Gb interface, and check the FLOW CONTROL BVC messages sent
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 88 Configuring the SGSN Pool
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
289
from the BSC to the SGSN through all functional PTP BVCs. If these messages are
correct, SGSN Pool is enabled and functional.
3. Ensure that the MS accesses the network in cell 1. Use the MS to perform PS services.
The MS can perform attach, PDP context activation, upload, and download normally.
According to the traced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PS
services are carried on one PTP BVC.
4. Block the PTP BVC carrying services discussed in step 3. Then ensure the MS accesses
the network in cell 1 and use the MS to perform PS services. The MS can perform
attach, PDP context activation, upload, and download normally. According to the
traced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PS services are carried
on another PTP BVC.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set Allow
SGSN Pool to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Enable SGSN Pool and specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value:
MOD GCNOPERATOR: SGSNPOOLALLOW=YES, SGSNNRILEN=1, SGSNNULLNRI=1;
//Configure SGSN Pool (FR transmission mode is used on the Gb
interface):
SET BSCPCUTYPE: TYPE=INNER;
ADD SGSNNODE: OPNAME="abc", CNID=1;
ADD NRISGSNMAP: NRI=1, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1;
ADD NSE: NSEI=1, SRN=1, SN=1, PT=GB_OVER_FR, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1;
ADD BC: SRN=1, SN=1, PN=1, BCID=1; ADD NSVC: NSVCIDX=1, NSVCI=1, NSEI=1,
SRN=1, SN=1, BCID=1, DLCI=20;
ADD PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=2, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=3;
//Query the state of a PTP BVC:
DSP PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=2;
//Deactivate SGSN Pool:
MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=1, SGSNPOOLALLOW=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 88 Configuring the SGSN Pool
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
290
89 Configuring Abis Bypass
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116601
Abis Bypass.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature.
The BTS3006C and BTS3002E in TDM transmission mode are configured with the
DMCM board that supports Abis Bypass.
The BTS3012 (DTRU/QTRU) and BTS3012AE (DTRU/QTRU) in TDM transmission
mode are configured with the DABB board that supports Abis Bypass.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and
OML on A-bis Interface, GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118401 Abis
Transmission Optimization, GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch, GBFD-117801 Ring
Topology, or GBFD-117301 Flex Abis.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Others
The physical transmission link is connected to the GTMU.
In Abis IP over E1 transmission mode, the BTS uses the logical IP address for
communication.
In Abis IP over E1 transmission mode, the local and peer IP addresses for the PPP links
or MLPPP link groups over the port connecting the BTS and the BSC or connecting the
BTS and the upper-level BTSs must be set to 0.0.0.0, as shown in Figure 89-1.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 89 Configuring Abis Bypass
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
291
Figure 89-1 IP address planned for links in IP over E1 transmission mode

Context
Abis bypass is applicable to GBSS chain topologies. When power supply to a BTS fails, this
function makes the BTS bypassed to function only as the path so that signals of lower-level
BTSs can be transmitted to the BSC6900. After power supply is restored, the BTS and lower-
level BTSs in the chain topology automatically reset and restore.
To enable the Abis bypass function for cascaded BTSs, you only need to set Abis ByPass
Mode to TRUE(Support) for each cascaded BTS.
A maximum of five levels of cascaded BTSs support Abis bypass.
For BTS3900 series, this function is effective only after DIP switches are set properly.
l When the Abis interface uses the TDM transmission mode, DIP switches S4 and S5 are
required for supporting this function.
l When the Abis interface uses the IP over E1 transmission mode, only DIP switch S4 is
required for supporting this function.
Table 89-1 and Table 89-2 describe the bits of DIP switches.
Table 89-1 Meanings of bits on DIP switch S4
DIP Switch Bit Status of S4 Remarks
BIT1 BIT2 BIT3 BIT4
S4 ON ON ON ON Abis Bypass
is supported.
OFF OFF OFF OFF Abis bypass
is not
supported.
Other Prerequisites Unavailable
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 89 Configuring Abis Bypass
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
292

Table 89-2 Meanings of bits on DIP switch S5
DIP Switch Bit Status of S5 Remarks
BIT1 BIT2 BIT3 BIT4
S5 ON ON ON ON Abis bypass
is not
supported.
OFF ON ON OFF The first-
level BTSs
support Abis
bypass.
ON OFF ON OFF The second-
level BTSs
support Abis
bypass.
OFF OFF ON OFF The third-
level BTSs
support Abis
bypass.
ON ON OFF OFF The fourth-
level BTSs
support Abis
bypass.
OFF ON OFF OFF The fifth-
level BTSs
support Abis
bypass.
Others Unavailable

Assuming that the Abis Bypass function is activated when the Abis interface uses the IP over
E1 transmission mode:
l When an upper-level BTS experiences a power failure, call drops or mute occur in lower-
level BTSs and last for approximate 5s. As shown in Figure 89-1, when BTS1 is powered
off, the PPP or MP link between BTS1 and BTS2 is interrupted. BTS2 renegotiates with
the BSC about reestablishing a PPP or an MP link. After the negotiation is complete and
OML is reestablished, the services in the lower-level BTSs recover.
l When the upper-level BTS is powered on again, the services in lower-level BTSs are
interrupted. As shown in Figure 89-1, when BTS1 is powered on again, the PPP or MP
link between BTS2 and BSC is interrupted. BTS2 renegotiates with BTS1 about
reestablishing a PPP or an MP link. After the negotiation is complete and OML is
reestablished, the services in the lower-level BTSs recover. The laboratory test data shows
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 89 Configuring Abis Bypass
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
293
that the adjacent lower-level BTS is affected for 4 to 15 minutes. The impact duration
increases by 1 or 2 minutes for a BTS of a higher level.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add an upper-level BTS. In this step,
set Abis ByPass Mode to TRUE(Support).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add a lower-level BTS. In this step,
set Abis ByPass Mode to TRUE(Support).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connection for
the lower-level BTS. Repeat this step for each cascaded BTS you want to add,
including:
Set Dest Node Type to BTS.
Set Dest Father BTS Port No. to the number of the port that connects the lower-
level BTS to the upper-level BTS.
NOTE
A BTS connects to an upper-level BTS or BSC through port 0, and it connects to a lower-level
BTS through port 2.
4. In Abis IP over E1 transmission mode, if the type of links carried on the E1/T1 link
is PPP:
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK command to add PPP links.
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSPPPLNK command to add BTS
PPP links.
NOTE
Local IP Address and Peer IP address for PPP links over the port connecting the BTS and
the BSC or connecting the BTS and the upper-level BTSs must be set to 0.0.0.0.
5. In Abis IP over E1 transmission mode, if the type of links carried on the E1/T1 link
is MLPPP link group:
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP command to add MLPPP link
groups.
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPLNK command to add MLPPP links.
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSMPGRP command to add BTS
MLPPP link groups.
NOTE
Local IP Address and Peer IP Address for MLPPP link groups over the port connecting the
BTS and the BSC or connecting the BTS and the upper-level BTSs must be set to 0.0.0.0.
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSMPLNK command to add BTS PPP
links.
l Verification Procedure
1. Power off the upper-level BTS.
2. On the LMT, click Device Maintenance and enter the lower-level BTS maintenance
page. Select a BTS that is configured with GPS clock synchronization. Then, right-
click the GTMU board and choose Query Board Information from the shortcut
menu. In the displayed dialog box, click Basic Information. If basic information
about the GTMU board is displayed and the OML Faulty message is not displayed,
the Abis bypass function has been enabled.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 89 Configuring Abis Bypass
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
294
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Abis ByPass Mode
to FALSE(Not Support).
NOTE
Before performing this step, run the MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS if it has
been activated.
----End
Example
//The following uses the Abis over TDM transmission mode as an example.
//Activating Abis Bypass
ADD BTS: BTSID=0, BTSNAME="3900", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM,
SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, ABISBYPASSMODE=TRUE,
SRANMODE=SUPPORT;
ADD BTS: BTSID=1, BTSNAME="3900-1", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM,
SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, ABISBYPASSMODE=TRUE,
SRANMODE=SUPPORT;
ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, INPN=0, DESTNODE=BTS,
UPBTSIDTYPE=BYID, UPBTSID=0, FPN=2;
//Deactivating Abis Bypass
MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ABISBYPASSMODE=FALSE;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 89 Configuring Abis Bypass
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
295
90 Configuring Robust Air Interface
Signalling
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113721
Robust Air Interface Signalling.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
RRU3004, DRFU, RRU3008 V1/V2, RRU3908 V1/V2, and MRFU V1/V2 have
supported uplink and downlink SACCH retransmission since GBSS12.0.
BTS3900B, BTS3900E, BTS3012, and BTS3006C/02E (DTRU/DDRM) have
supported uplink and downlink SACCH retransmission since GBSS13.0.
RRU3926/RRU3929/RRU3942, MRFUe, MRFd, and RRU3928 have supported uplink
and downlink SACCH retransmission since GBSS13.0.
BTS312 and QTRU do not support this feature.
Except BTS312 and QTRU, all other RF modules including BTS3900B/E support
downlink FACCH retransmission.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The MS supports this feature.
Context
When the radio quality is poor, by retransmitting FACCH or SACCH frames, the anti-
interference capability of the FACCH or SACCH is improved, thereby increasing the possibility
that the MS and BSC receive signaling messages successfully.
The robust air interface signaling function includes retransmission of downlink FACCH frames
and retransmission of uplink/downlink SACCH frames.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 90 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
296
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set
ECSC to YES(Yes), Repeated Downlink FACCH to YES(Yes) , Repeated
Downlink FACCH Threshold to 5, and Repeated SACCH to YES(Yes).
l Verification Procedure
1. Verify Repeated Downlink FACCH.
a. Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell. On the main page of the BSC6900 Web
LMT, click Trace. In the Trace Navigation Tree, choose Trace > GSM Services
> Abis Interface CS Trace. For details, see LMT User Guide.
b. During immediate assignment, the BSC6900 decodes the Channel Activation
message. You can obtain MS's capability for supporting this feature in the bit
information for repeate-acch of the IE "ms-capability".
c. Use the MS to initiate a new call in the cell. On the main page of the BSC6900
Web LMT, click Trace. In the Trace Navigation Tree, choose Trace > GSM
Services > BTS Signaling Trace. In the displayed dialog box, select LAPDm.
For details, see LMT User Guide.
d. The BSC6900 compares the receive quality in the downlink measurement report
with the value specified by Repeated Downlink FACCH Downlink Quality
Threshold. If the receive quality is lower than the value of this parameter, the
BSC6900 retransmits FACCH frames to the BTS which then transmits the frames
to the MS. The displayed downlink LAPDm Trace message contains the IE
"lapdm-dl-repeat-facch".
2. Verify Repeated SACCH.
a. Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell. On the main page of the BSC6900 Web
LMT, click Trace. In the Trace Navigation Tree, choose Trace > GSM Services
> BTS Signaling Trace. In the displayed dialog box, select LAPDm. For details,
see LMT User Guide.
Expected result: If the BSC6900 or MS cannot decode SACCH frames correctly,
the displayed downlink LAPDm Trace message contains the IE "lapdm-dl-
repeat-sacch".
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC with Repeated
Downlink FACCH and Repeated SACCH set to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating Robust Air Interface Signalling
SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ECSC=YES, REPEATDLFASET=YES,
REPEATDLFATHRED=5, REPEATSASET=YES;
//Deactivating Robust Air Interface Signalling
SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, REPEATDLFASET=NO,
REPEATSASET=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 90 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
297
91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup
About This Chapter
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117803
Abis Transmission Backup.
91.1 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup (Ring Topology)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the ring topology function in the
optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup.
91.2 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup (Dual-Logical BTS)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the dual-logical BTS function in
the optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
298
91.1 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup (Ring
Topology)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the ring topology function in the
optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
Resources are available for terrestrial transmission and satellite transmission.
The BTS supports the Ring I topology.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature depends on the feature GBFD-113901 Satellite Transmission over Abis
Interface and GBFD-117801 Ring Topology.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
When a disaster-caused failure occurs in the active SDH transmission link over the TDM-based
Abis interface, the GBSS automatically switches transmission link to a backup satellite
transmission link. In this manner, the normal operation of the network is ensured.
With Abis transmission backup enabled, the transmission mode in the forward link is different
from that in the reverse link. That is, the forward link uses terrestrial transmission and the reverse
link uses satellite transmission, as shown in Figure 91-1.
Figure 91-1 Network topology when Abis transmission backup is enabled

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the target BTS.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
299
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Config ring to
YES.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRINGATTR. In this step, set
Configure Ring II to NO(No) and Ring I Wait Time Before Switch and Ring I Try
Rotating Duration Time to appropriate values.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a reverse ring
connection.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set Transmission
Mode to TER_AND_SAT_TRANS(Terrestrial and Satellite).
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the target BTS.
l Verification Procedure
1. (Optional) Use the MS to make a call.
NOTE
Before verification, ensure that the MS can make a call through terrestrial transmission in a non-
ring topology network.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTS to query the value of Config Ring.
Expected result: The value of Config Ring is YES.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to query the value of
Transmission Mode.
Expected result: The value of Transmission Mode is TER_AND_SAT_TRANS.
4. Interrupt the terrestrial transmission between the BTS and the BSC. For example,
remove the E1 cable from port 0 on the BTS.
Expected result: The BTS is reset. Five minutes later, the MS can make a call.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the target BTS.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set Transmission
Mode to TER_TRANS(Terrestrial Transmission) or SAT_TRANS(Satellite
Transmission).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSCONNECT to remove a reverse ring
connection.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Config Ring to NO
(No).
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the target BTS.
----End
Example
/*Activating Abis Transmission Backup (Ring Topology)*/
//Deactivating the target BTS
DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;
//Enabling ring topology for a BTS
MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ISCONFIGEDRING=YES;
SET BTSRINGATTR: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, FASTCNETFLAG=NO, WTBS=90, TBS=90;
//Adding a reverse ring connection
ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, INPN=1, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=18,
PN=1;
//Setting BTS transmission mode
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
300
SET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TransMode=TER_AND_SAT_TRANS;
//Deactivating the target BTS
ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;
/*Deacting Abis Transmission Backup (Ring Topology)*/
//Deactivating the target BTS
DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;
//Setting BTS transmission mode
SET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TransMode=TER_TRANS;
//Removing a reverse ring connection
RMV BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, INPN=1;
//Disabling ring topology for a BTS
MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ISCONFIGEDRING=NO;
//Activating the target BTS
ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;
91.2 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup (Dual-Logical
BTS)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the dual-logical BTS function in
the optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
Link resources are required for terrestrial and satellite transmission modes.
An interface board for TDM transmission is required on the BSC side.
BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, and BTS3900AL must be configured with GTMUa
or GTMUb boards to support this feature.
The terrestrial BTS occupies port 0 on the physical BTS as the main port, and the satellite
BTS occupies port 1 on the physical BTS as the main port.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature depends on the GBFD-117301 Flex Abis feature.
This feature cannot be used together with the features GBFD-118601 Abis over IP,
GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization,
GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass, GBFD-117801 Ring Topology, and MRFD-210205 Chain
Topology.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
The dual-logical BTS solution provides two logical BTSs for a physical BTS. One logical BTS
uses satellite transmission, and the other uses TDM terrestrial transmission. If the TDM
terrestrial transmission is faulty, the system automatically switches over the transmission link
to the backup satellite transmission. The satellite station begins to process services to ensure
normal network communication.
The requirements for naming the two logical BTSs are as follows:
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
301
l The type of a BTS (a terrestrial BTS or a satellite BTS) must be identified.
l The mapping between two logical BTSs and a physical BTS must be identified.
For example, two logical BTSs in site A can be named as terrestrial BTS A and satellite BTS
A.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Configure the terrestrial BTS.
a. Configuring the Equipment Data
b. Configuring the Logical Data
c. Configuring the Transmission Data
d. Configuring a Clock for a BTS
e. Activating the BTS Configuration
2. Configure the satellite BTS.
NOTE
The configuration data about boards, RXU, cells, and TRXs of the satellite BTS must be
consistent with that of the terrestrial BTS.
a. Configuring the Equipment Data
b. Configuring the Logical Data
c. Configuring the Transmission Data
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set BTS
Port Detection Sequence to CUSTOMIZDE(Customized Sequence),
Number of Customized Detection Types to 2, Preferential Customized
Detection Type to TDME1_1(TDM E1 1 Port), and Subsidiary Customized
Detection Type to TDME1_O(TDM E1 0 Port).
e. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set
Transmission Mode to SAT_TRANS(Satellite Transmission).
f. Configuring a Clock for a BTS
g. Activating the BTS Configuration
l Verification Procedure
1. Use an MS to process a call.
NOTE
Ensure that the MS processes a call properly in terrestrial transmission mode and non-ring topology
mode.
2. Remove the E1 cable from port 0 of the BTS to disconnect the terrestrial link between
the BTS and the BSC.
Expected result: The original call is interrupted and the BTS resets. The MS can
process a call 10 minutes later.
l Deactivation Procedure
None
----End
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
302
Example
/*Activating Abis Transmission Backup (Dual-Logical BTS)*/
//Configuring the terrestrial BTS:
ADD BTS: BTSID=9, BTSNAME="BTS3900_Terrestrial", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM,
BTSDESC="BTS3900_Terrestrial",
SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, SRANMODE=SUPPORT;
ADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRANMODE=SUPPORT,
TYPE=BTS3900;
ADD BTSBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRN=11, SN=0, BT=FMU;
ADD BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0,
HSN=6, HPN=0;
ADD BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0,
HSN=6, HPN=1;
ADD BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RCN=2, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0,
HSN=6, HPN=2;
ADD BTSRXUBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, BT=GRFU, RXUSPEC=GRFU_V1, CN=0,
SRN=4, SN=0, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 0",
RXUCHAINNO=0, RXUPOS=1, ISCONFIGTHD=NO;
ADD BTSRXUBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, BT=GRFU, RXUSPEC=GRFU_V1, CN=0,
SRN=4, SN=1, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 1",
RXUCHAINNO=1, RXUPOS=1, ISCONFIGTHD=NO;
ADD BTSRXUBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, BT=GRFU, RXUSPEC=GRFU_V1, CN=0,
SRN=4, SN=2, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 2",
RXUCHAINNO=2, RXUPOS=1, ISCONFIGTHD=NO;
ADD GCELL:CELLID=5,CELLNAME="cell-11", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460",
MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=1;
ADD GCELL:CELLID=6,CELLNAME="cell-22", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460",
MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=2;
ADD GCELL:CELLID=7,CELLNAME="cell-33", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460",
MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=3;
ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=5, FREQ1=513,FREQ2=515;
ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=6, FREQ1=517,FREQ2=519;
ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=7, FREQ1=521,FREQ2=523;
ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=5, OPC=261;
ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=6, OPC=261;
ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=7, OPC=261;
ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=5,BTSID=9;
ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=6,BTSID=9;
ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=7,BTSID=9;
ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=5,TRXID=9, FREQ=513, ISMAINBCCH=YES;
ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=5,TRXID=10, FREQ=515, ISMAINBCCH=NO;
ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=6,TRXID=11, FREQ=517, ISMAINBCCH=YES;
ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=6,TRXID=12, FREQ=519, ISMAINBCCH=NO;
ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=7,TRXID=13, FREQ=521, ISMAINBCCH=YES;
ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=7,TRXID=14, FREQ=523, ISMAINBCCH=NO;
ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=9, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=0, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME,
RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 0";
ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=10, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=1, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME,
RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 0";
ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=11, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=0, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME,
RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 1";
ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=12, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=1, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME,
RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 1";
ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=13, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=0, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME,
RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 2";
ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=14, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=1, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME,
RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 2";
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=9, CHNO=0,CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1;
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=9, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2;
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=11, CHNO=0,CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1;
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=11, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
303
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=13, CHNO=0,CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1;
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=13, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=9, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=10,RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=11, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=12, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=13, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=14,RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;
ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, INPN=0, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6,
DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=25, PN=0;
ACT BTS:IDTYPE=BYID,BTSID=9;
//Configuring the satellite BTS:
ADD BTS: BTSID=10, BTSNAME="BTS3900_Satellite", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM,
BTSDESC="BTS3900_Satellite",
SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, MAINPORTNO=1, SRANMODE=SUPPORT;
ADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CN=0, SRANMODE=SUPPORT,
TYPE=BTS3900;
ADD BTSBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CN=0, SRN=11, SN=0, BT=FMU;
ADD BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0,
HSN=6, HPN=0;
ADD BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0,
HSN=6, HPN=1;
ADD BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, RCN=2, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0,
HSN=6, HPN=2;
ADD BTSRXUBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, BT=GRFU, RXUSPEC=GRFU_V1, CN=0,
SRN=4, SN=0, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 0",
RXUCHAINNO=0, RXUPOS=1, ISCONFIGTHD=NO;
ADD BTSRXUBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, BT=GRFU, RXUSPEC=GRFU_V1, CN=0,
SRN=4, SN=1, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 1",
RXUCHAINNO=1, RXUPOS=1, ISCONFIGTHD=NO;
ADD BTSRXUBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, BT=GRFU, RXUSPEC=GRFU_V1, CN=0,
SRN=4, SN=2, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 2",
RXUCHAINNO=2, RXUPOS=1, ISCONFIGTHD=NO;
ADD GCELL: CELLID=8, CELLNAME="cell-Satellite 1", TYPE=DCS1800,
MCC="460", MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=4;
ADD GCELL: CELLID=9, CELLNAME="cell-Satellite 2", TYPE=DCS1800,
MCC="460", MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=5;
ADD GCELL: CELLID=10, CELLNAME="cell-Satellite 3", TYPE=DCS1800,
MCC="460", MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=6;
ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=8, FREQ1=514,FREQ2=516;
ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=9, FREQ1=518,FREQ2=520;
ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=10, FREQ1=522,FREQ2=524;
ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=8, OPC=261;
ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=9, OPC=261;
ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=10, OPC=261;
ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=8,BTSID=10;
ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=9,BTSID=10;
ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=10,BTSID=10;
ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=8,TRXID=15, FREQ=514, ISMAINBCCH=YES;
ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=8,TRXID=16, FREQ=516, ISMAINBCCH=NO;
ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=9,TRXID=17, FREQ=518, ISMAINBCCH=YES;
ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=9,TRXID=18, FREQ=520, ISMAINBCCH=NO;
ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=10,TRXID=19, FREQ=522, ISMAINBCCH=YES;
ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=10,TRXID=20, FREQ=524, ISMAINBCCH=NO;
ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=15, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=0, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME,
RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 0";
ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=16, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=1, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME,
RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 0";
ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=17, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=0, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME,
RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 1";
ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=18, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=1, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME,
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
304
RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 1";
ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=19, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=0, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME,
RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 2";
ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=20, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=1, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME,
RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 2";
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=15, CHNO=0,CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1;
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=15, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2;
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=17, CHNO=0,CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1;
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=17, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2;
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=19, CHNO=0,CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1;
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=19, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=15, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=16, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=17, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=18, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=19, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=20, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;
ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, INPN=1, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6,
DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=25, PN=1;
SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, SENDSAMBE=NO, ISSUPERBTS=YES,
PROBESEQ=CUSTOMIZDE, PRIVATEPROBENUM=2,
PRIVATEPROBEFST=TDME1_1, PRIVATEPROBESND=TDME1_O;
SET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, TransMode=SAT_TRANS;
ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,BTSID=10;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
305
92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113725
BSC Node Redundancy.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature requires IP interface boards because the A, Gb, Abis, and Iur interfaces use
IP transmission mode.
The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do not support this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
The following features have been configured before this feature is activated:
GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, GBFD-118602 A over
IP, GBFD-115301 Local Multiple Signaling Points, and GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/
T1
The feature WOFD-231100 BSC Redundancy Management - GBSS requires support
from the M2000.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l IP transmission mode is used between the BSC and the CN and between the BSC and the
BTS.
l A BTS is connected to the two BSCs in a BSC node redundancy group through routers
because the Abis interface does not support direct connections when BSC node redundancy
is enabled.
l A single-homing BTS under two BSCs in a BSC node redundancy group is configured only
under one of these BSCs. A dual-homing BTS is configured for these BSCs with one as
primary-homing and the other as secondary-homing.
l A BSC node redundancy group consists of two BSCs. Initial configuration is complete for
BTSs and cells under the two BSCs and for originating point codes (OPCs) of the two
BSCs. The BTSs and cells work properly, and the connection between the two BSCs is
normal.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
306
Context
BSC node redundancy allows two BSCs to form a BSC node redundancy group in an all-IP
network. In a BSC node redundancy group, the secondary BSC takes over voice and data services
from the primary BSC when the primary BSC is faulty or when the transmission over the A
interface is faulty. This improves the BSC reliability.
The BSC Node Redundancy feature has the following advantages:
l High equipment reliability. The BSC in a BSC node redundancy group uses 1+1 load
sharing mode. In this manner, a faulty BSC node does not decrease the system capacity,
ensuring the equipment reliability.
l High transmission reliability. Both BSCs in a BSC node redundancy group establish
connections to the CN through their A interfaces using IP transmission. If the transmission
over the A interface for a single BSC is faulty, backup transmission over the A interface is
provided to ensure high transmission reliability.
The following figures show the A and Iur interface networking in the BSC node redundancy
scenario.
l Figure 92-1 shows the A over IP networking.
Figure 92-1 A over IP networking

l Inter-BSC transmission and networking: An IP router is used for the transmission over the
Iur interface. A direct route between the BSCs and multiple alternative routes are required
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
307
to improve the reliability for inter-BSC fault detection. Data on each alternative route is
forwarded by the access router for each MSC that is connected to the BSC node redundancy
group. See Figure 92-2.
Figure 92-2 Inter-BSC transmission and networking

GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
308
NOTE
l The cell broadcast center (CBC) service does not support BSC node redundancy.
l Service migration for BSC node redundancy is supported only when the BSC is faulty or all signaling links
over the A interface are faulty.
l Calls may be interrupted for 10 to 20 minutes during service migration for BSC recovery or disaster
redundancy recover.
l When BSC node redundancy is enabled, each BSC in a BSC node redundancy group can only be connected
to an MSC or a single MSC pool through cross connections.
l Both BSCs in a BSC node redundancy group support only built-in PCUs to implement disaster redundancy
for PS services.
l BSC node redundancy is not triggered if the transmission over the Abis interface is faulty.
BSC node redundancy can work in two modes:
l Active/standby mode
In this mode, all dual-homing BTSs take the same BSC (BSC1) as the primary-homing
BSC (BSC1) and the same BSC (BSC2) as the secondary-homing BSC. If BSC1 is
faulty or the transmission over the A interface is faulty, BSC2 takes over services of
the dual-homing BTSs under BSC1.
BSC1 is configured with primary-homing signaling points and BSC2 is configured with
secondary-homing signaling points. The signaling points configured on BSC1 and
BSC2 must be the same.
If there are single-homing BTSs under BSC1 or BSC2, configure single-homing
signaling points in the same way as that for configuring common signaling points.
l Load sharing mode
In this mode, some dual-homing BTSs take BSC1 as the primary-homing BSC and some
dual-homing BTSs take BSC2 as the secondary-homing BSC. If a BSC is faulty or the
transmission over the A interface is faulty, another BSC takes over services of the dual-
homing BTSs under the faulty BSC.
BSC1 and BSC2 are configured with both primary-homing signaling points and
secondary-homing signaling points. The primary-homing signaling points configured
on BSC1 must be the same as the secondary-homing signaling points configured on
BSC2. Similarly, primary-homing signaling points configured on BSC2 must be the
same as the secondary-homing signaling points configured on BSC1.
If there are single-homing BTSs under BSC1 or BSC2, configure single-homing
signaling points in the same way as that for configuring common signaling points.
NOTE
If the ESN of BSC1 is ESN1 and the ESN of BSC2 is ESN2:
l Active/standby mode: License1 is generated when the order of BSC1 is bound to ESN1 and ESN2.
License2 is generated when the order of BSC2 is bound to ESN1 and ESN2. A license file is generated
when license1 and license2 are combined together. The license file is loaded on both BSC1 and
BSC2.
l Load sharing mode: License1 is generated when the order of BSC1 is bound to ESN1. License2 is
generated when the order of BSC2 is bound to ESN2. License1 is loaded on BSC1 and license2 is
loaded on BSC2.
Data configuration for BSC node redundancy consists of the following steps: Configuring the
signaling point and signaling link over the A interface, configuring homing attributes for BTSs,
configuring the link between BSCs, and configuring BSC node redundancy. This section uses
the BSC node redundancy in active/standby mode as an example. BSC node redundancy in load
sharing mode can be configured in a similar way.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
309
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Configure BSC1 data.
a. Configure the signaling point and signaling link over the A interface.
NOTE
To add BSCs that work in BSC node redundancy, configure BSCs as dual-homing signaling
points. The following steps show how to configure a BSC as a dual-homing signaling point.
To configure multiple BSCs as dual-homing signaling points, repeat the following steps.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC on BSC1. In this step, set
OSP name, OSP index, Network ID, OSP code bits, Signal point data
format, and OSP code to appropriate values, and set The host type of
signalling point to PRIMHOST(PRIMHOST).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC on BSC1 to configure a
Destination Signaling Point (DSP) for the primary-homing signaling point.
In this step, set DSP name, DSP index, OSP index, Signal point data
format, DSP code, DSP type, and DSP bear type to appropriate values.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE on BSC1 to configure an
M3UA local entity for the primary-homing signaling point. In this step, set
OSP index to the OSP index of the primary-homing signaling point.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE on BSC1 to configure an
M3UA destination entity for the primary-homing signaling point. In this
step, set DSP index to the DSP index of the primary-homing signaling
point.
e. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS on BSC1 to configure
an M3UA link set for the primary-homing signaling point. In this step, set
Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. of the primary-
homing signaling point.
f. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT on BSC1 to configure an
M3UA route for the primary-homing signaling point. In this step, set
Destination entity No. and Signalling link set index to these of the
primary-homing signaling point.
g. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK on BSC1 to configure
a Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) link for the primary-
homing signaling point. In this step, set First local IP address, First
destination IP address, and Destination SCTP port No. to appropriate
values.
h. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK on BSC1 to configure
an M3UA link for the primary-homing signaling point. In this step, set
SCTP link No. to the SCTP link No. of the primary-homing signaling
point.
b. Configure homing attributes for BTSs
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
310
NOTE
l The configuration data for a dual-homing BTS on BSC1 must be consistent with that on
BSC2.
l The settings of the parameters HostType, Peer BTS ID, Peer BSC IP, and Peer BSC
Mask must be negotiated between BSC1 and BSC2.
l To configure multiple BTSs as dual-homing BTSs under BSC1 and BSC2, repeat the
following steps.
a. Add a BTS under BSC1. For details, see Configuring a BTS in BSC6900
GSM Initial Configuration Guide.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP on BSC1. In this step, set
HostType to PRIMHOST(Primary Host), and set Peer BTS ID, Peer
BSC IP, Peer BSC ID, and Peer BSC Mask to appropriate values.
c. Configure links between BSCs
NOTE
When configuring a link between BSCs, ensure that First local IP address/Second local IP
address for BSC1 is the same as First destination IP address/Second destination IP
address for BSC2, and First local IP address/Second local IP address for BSC2 is the same
as First destination IP address/Second destination IP address for BSC1. In addition, Local
SCTP port No./Destination SCTP port No. for BSC1 is the same as Destination SCTP port
No./Local SCTP port No. for BSC2. It is recommended that you configure multiple links
between BSCs.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK on BSC1. In this step,
set Signalling link mode to CLIENT(CLIENT MOD) and Application
type to BBAP(BBAP).
b. Optional: If an intermediate device is used between BSC1 and BSC2, run
the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT on BSC1 to configure the IP
route from BSC1 to the intermediate device.
d. Configure BSC node redundancy.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GBSCREDGRP on BSC1 to
configure BSC node redundancy. In this step, set Local BSC ID to the same
as Peer BSC ID on BSC2, and set Peer BSC ID to the same as Local BSC
ID on BSC2.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY on BSC1. In this step, set ReHost
Type to an appropriate value.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GBSCREDGRP on BSC1 to
activate BSC node redundancy.
2. Configure BSC2 data.
a. Configure the signaling point and signaling link over the A interface.
NOTE
To add BSCs that work in BSC node redundancy, configure BSCs as dual-homing signaling
points. The following steps show how to configure a BSC as a dual-homing signaling point.
To configure multiple BSCs as dual-homing signaling points, repeat the following steps.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC on BSC2. In this step, set
OSP name, OSP index, Network ID, OSP code bits, Signal point data
format, and OSP code to appropriate values, and set The host type of
signalling point to SLAVEHOST(SLAVEHOST).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC on BSC2 to configure a
Destination Signaling Point (DSP) for the secondary-homing signaling
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
311
point. In this step, set DSP name, DSP index, OSP index, Signal point
data format, DSP code, DSP type, and DSP bear type to appropriate
values.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE on BSC2 to configure an
M3UA local entity for the secondary-homing signaling point. In this step,
set OSP index to the OSP index of the secondary-homing signaling point.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE on BSC2 to configure an
M3UA destination entity for the secondary-homing signaling point. In this
step, set DSP index to the DSP index of the secondary-homing signaling
point.
e. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS on BSC2 to configure
an M3UA link set for the secondary-homing signaling point. In this step,
set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. of the secondary-
homing signaling point.
f. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT on BSC2 to configure an
M3UA route for the secondary-homing signaling point. In this step, set
Destination entity No. and Signalling link set index to these of the
secondary-homing signaling point.
g. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK on BSC2 to configure
an SCTP link for the secondary-homing signaling point. In this step, set
First local IP address, First destination IP address, and Destination
SCTP port No. to appropriate values.
h. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK on BSC2 to configure
an M3UA link for the secondary-homing signaling point. In this step, set
SCTP link No. to the SCTP link No. of the secondary-homing signaling
point.
b. Configure homing attributes for BTSs
NOTE
l The configuration data for a dual-homing BTS on BSC1 must be consistent with that on
BSC2.
l The settings of the parameters HostType, Peer BTS ID, Peer BSC IP, and Peer BSC
Mask must be negotiated between BSC1 and BSC2.
l To configure multiple BTSs as dual-homing BTSs under BSC1 and BSC2, repeat the
following steps.
a. Add a BTS under BSC2. For details, see Configuring a BTS in BSC6900
GSM Initial Configuration Guide.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP on BSC2. In this step, set
HostType to SLAVEHOST(Slave Host), and set Peer BTS ID, Peer BSC
IP, Peer BSC ID, and Peer BSC Mask to appropriate values.
c. Configure links between BSCs
NOTE
When configuring a link between BSCs, ensure that First local IP address/Second local IP
address for BSC1 is the same as First destination IP address/Second destination IP
address for BSC2, and First local IP address/Second local IP address for BSC2 is the same
as First destination IP address/Second destination IP address for BSC1. In addition, Local
SCTP port No./Destination SCTP port No. for BSC1 is the same as Destination SCTP port
No./Local SCTP port No. for BSC2. It is recommended that you configure multiple links
between BSCs.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
312
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK on BSC2. In this step,
set Signalling link mode to CLIENT(CLIENT MOD) and Application
type to BBAP(BBAP).
b. Optional: If an intermediate device is used between BSC1 and BSC2, run
the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT on BSC2 to configure the IP
route from BSC2 to the intermediate device.
d. Configure BSC node redundancy.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GBSCREDGRP on BSC2 to
configure BSC node redundancy. In this step, set Local BSC ID to the same
as Peer BSC ID on BSC1, and set Peer BSC ID to the same as Local BSC
ID on BSC1.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY on BSC2. In this step, set ReHost
Type to an appropriate value.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GBSCREDGRP on BSC2 to
activate BSC node redundancy.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC1 to query the homing
attribute of the dual-homing BTS.
Expected result: The value of Hosted is Yes.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC2 to query the homing
attribute of the dual-homing BTS.
Expected result: The value of Hosted is No.
3. Shut down the power supply for BSC1, wait for 15 minutes, and then run the
BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC2 to query the homing attribute
of the dual-homing BTS.
Expected result: The value of Hosted is Yes.
4. Turn on the power switch for BSC1. After BSC1 starts, run the BSC6900 MML
command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC1 and BSC2 respectively.
Expected result: The value of Hosted is Yes on BSC1 and is No on BSC2.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
/*Activating BSC Node Redundancy*/
/*Configuring BSC1 data*/
//Configuring the signaling point and signaling link over the A
interface//
ADD OPC: NAME="A", SPX=0, NI=NATB, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=2730,
HOSTTYPE=PRIMHOST;
ADD N7DPC: NAME="A to MSC", DPX=0, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=4369, DPCT=A,
BEARTYPE=M3UA;
ADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0";
ADD M3DE: DENO=0, LENO=0, DPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0";
ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DENO=0, WKMODE=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0";
ADD M3RT: DENO=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="0";
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
313
ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=1, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA,
LOCIP1="182.16.53.24", PEERIP1="182.16.53.25", PEERPN=6000,
LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, LANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;
ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=1, NAME="0";
//Configuring BTS homing attribute//
SET BTSIP:BTSID=72, IDTYPE=BYID, BSCIP="172.18.125.124",
BTSIP="166.253.121.10", BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, HOSTTYPE=PRIMHOST,
PEERBTSID=172, PEERBSCIP="172.18.125.69", PEERBSCMASK="255.255.255.255",
PEERBSCID=1, CFGFLAG=NULL, BTSGWIPSWITCH=OFF;
//Configuring a link between BSCs//
ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=0, MODE=CLIENT, APP=BBAP, LOCPN=5000,
LOCIP1="172.18.125.68", PEERIP1="172.18.125.69",
PEERPN=58000, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE,
SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;
//Configuring BSC node redundancy//
SET GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=0, LocalBSCID=0, PeerBSCID=1;
SET GREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY: REHOSTTYPE=REHOSTDELAY;
ACT GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=0;
/*Configuring BSC2 data*/
//Configuring the signaling point and signaling link over the A
interface//
ADD OPC: NAME="A", SPX=0, NI=NATB, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=2730,
HOSTTYPE=SLAVEHOST;
ADD N7DPC: NAME="A to MSC", DPX=0, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=4369, DPCT=A,
BEARTYPE=M3UA;
ADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0";
ADD M3DE: DENO=0, LENO=0, DPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0";
ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DENO=0, WKMODE=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0";
ADD M3RT: DENO=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="0";
ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=1, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA,
LOCIP1="182.16.53.25", PEERIP1="182.16.53.24", PEERPN=6000,
LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, LANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;
ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=1, NAME="0";
//Configuring BTS homing attribute//
SET BTSIP:BTSID=172, IDTYPE=BYID, BSCIP="172.18.125.69",
BTSIP="166.253.121.10", BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, HOSTTYPE=SLAVEHOST,
PEERBTSID=72, PEERBSCIP="172.18.125.124", PEERBSCMASK="255.255.255.255",
PEERBSCID=0, CFGFLAG=NULL, BTSGWIPSWITCH=OFF;
//Configuring a link between BSCs//
ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=0, MODE=CLIENT, APP=BBAP, LOCPN=58000,
LOCIP1="172.18.125.69", PEERIP1="172.18.125.68",
PEERPN=5000, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE,
SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;
//Configuring BSC node redundancy//
SET GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=0, LocalBSCID=1, PeerBSCID=0;
SET GREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY: REHOSTTYPE=REHOSTDELAY;
ACT GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
314
93 Configuring TC Pool
About This Chapter
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726
TC Pool. The A interface boards of the BSC that supports the TC Pool feature can use only TDM
transmission. The Ater interface boards can use TDM transmission or IP transmission.
93.1 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over TDM)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726
TC Pool in Ater over TDM transmission mode.
93.2 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over IP)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726
TC Pool in Ater over IP transmission mode.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 93 Configuring TC Pool
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
315
93.1 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over TDM)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726
TC Pool in Ater over TDM transmission mode.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The EIUa/OIUa board is configured, and there are idle ports on the configured EIUa/
OIUa board.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature is mutually exclusive to features GBFD-118602 A over IP and
GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
Network Topology
At least two BSCs are configured in the network. The BM/TC subracks of the two
BSCs are in separated configuration mode and the TC subrack of the two BSCs is
configured remotely.
The configuration of the clock source is the same for the two BSCs. For details on
the configuration of the clock source, see Configuring the Clocks.
Initial Data Preparation
The global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information.
The EIUa/OIUa board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board.
The BSC clock is configured. For details, see Configuring the Clocks.
Context
l To synchronize the frequency of the GSM network, the main BSC and sub-BSCs in a TC
pool should use the same clock source. In addition, a BSC can be connected to only one
TC pool. One TC pool supports a maximum of 16 BSCs.
l All TCSs in a TC pool are configured and controlled on the main BSC. The sub-BSC is
only configured with the BM subrack. The main BSC and sub-BSCs are connected to the
TCS over the Ater interface, and the TCS is connected to the MSC over the A interface.
l The settings of TC CRC Allow must be the same on the main BSC and sub-BSCs.
l If TFO Switch of the sub-BSCs is set to ENABLE(Enable), the TFO setting is effective
only when TFO Option Switch of each TCS is set to ON(On) on the main BSC. For details
on the setting of TFO, see 117 Configuring TFO.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Configure the Ater interface link for the main BSC.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 93 Configuring TC Pool
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
316
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the main BSC. In this
step, set Service mode to SEPARATE(Separate), set Is Support Tc Pool to
YES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to YES(Yes), and set Ater Interface Transfer
Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC Pool ID.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH for the main BSC
to add an Ater connection path between the BM subrack and TC subrack.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML for the main BSC to add
the OML on the Ater interface between the main BSC and the TCS.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONSL for the main BSC to
add a signaling link on the Ater interface between the BM subrack of the main
BSC and TC subrack.
2. Configure the A interface link for the main BSC.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the main BSC to add an
E1/T1 link on the A interface. In this step, set BSC Flag to MAINBSC(MAIN
BSC).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the main BSC to add
an MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSP
index, and Signalling link set name.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the main BSC to add
an MTP3 signaling link.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the main BSC to add an
MTP3 signaling route.
NOTE
The TCSs are configured on the main BSC. When you add MTP3 links to the main BSC,
MTP2 links are automatically added to the main BSC.
3. Configure the Ater interface link for the sub-BSC.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the sub-BSC. In this
step, set Service mode to SEPARATE(Separate), set Is Support Tc Pool to
YES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to NO(No), and set Ater Interface Transfer
Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC Pool ID and ID of a BSC in TC
Pool.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the sub-BSC to add
an Ater connection path on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to
CFGBM(BM).
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the main BSC to add
an Ater connection path on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to
CFGTC(TC), and set BSC ID in the TC pool to the ID of the sub-BSC specified
in 3.1.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the sub-BSC to add an
Ater signaling link on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to
CFGBM(BM).
e. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the main BSC to add an
Ater signaling link on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGTC
(TC), and set BSC ID in the TC pool to the ID of the sub-BSC specified in
3.1.
4. Configure the A interface link for the sub-BSC.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the main BSC to add an A
interface E1/T1 link to the sub-BSC. In this step, set BSC Flag to SUBBSC(SUB
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 93 Configuring TC Pool
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
317
BSC), and set ID of slave BSC in TC Pool to the ID of the sub-BSC specified
in 3.1.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the sub-BSC to add an
MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSP
index, and Signalling link set name.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the sub-BSC to add
an MTP3 signaling link.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the sub-BSC to add an
MTP3 signaling route.
NOTE
The MTP2 links cannot be automatically added with the addition of the MTP3 links,
because the sub-BSC is not configured with the TCS.
e. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK for the main BSC to add
an MTP2 link to the sub-BSC. In this step, set Application Type to MTP2
(MTP2), and set BSC ID in the TC pool to the ID of the sub-BSC specified in
3.1. In addition, specify Semipermanent Link Rate.
Subsequent procedures: You also need to configure BTS data for the TC pool
networking. For details on how to configure the BTS data, see Configuring a BTS.
l Verification Procedure
1. In a cell under the main BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPC
Group No to those of the main BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPC
Group), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag to
MAINBSC(MAIN BSC).
Expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the main BSC works properly.
3. In a cell under a sub-BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPC
Group No to those of the sub-BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPC
Group), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag to SUBBSC
(SUB BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool.
Expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the sub-BSC works properly.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the main BSC. In this step,
set Is Support Tc Pool to NO(No).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the sub-BSC. In this step,
set Is Support Tc Pool to NO(No).
----End
Example
l Configuration on the main BSC
//Setting the TC Pool and the transmission mode on the Ater interface
SET BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=SEPARATE, IsSupportTcPool=YES,
IsMainBSC=YES, TCPOOLID=0,ATERTRANSMODE=TDM;
//Configuring the Ater conpath or the Ater OML
ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=1, BMSRN=0, BMSN=14, BMPN=1, TCSRN=3,
TCSN=14, TCPN=1;
ADD ATEROML: ATEROMLINX=0, ATERPIDX=0,
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 93 Configuring TC Pool
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
318
TSMASK=TS1-0&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-0&TS10-0&T
S11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&
TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0
&TS31-0;
ADD ATERCONSL: ATERIDX=0,
ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0
&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-
0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30
-0&TS31-0;
//Configuring the A E1/T1 on the main BSC
ADD AE1T1: SRN=3, SN=16, PN=0, DPCGIDX=0, OPCIDX=0, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC,
BSCFLAG=MAINBSC, STCIC=100;
ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=1, LNKSLSMASK=B0001, EMERGENCY=OFF,
NAME="BM1";
ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2,
TCMODE=SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL, ATERIDX=1,
ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0
&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-
0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30
-0&TS31-0, ASRN=3, ASN=16, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0,
ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&
TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1
&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-
1&TS31-1, LKTATE=64K, NAME="BM1";
ADD MTP3RT: DPX=1, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="BM1";
//Configuring the Ater E1T1 on the TC side for the sub-BSC
ADD ATERE1T1: BTCFLAG=CFGTC, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=1, SRN=3, SN=20, PN=0;
//Configuring the Ater RSL on the TC side for the sub-BSC
ADD ATERSL: BTCFLAG=CFGTC, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=2,
ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0
&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-
0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30
-0&TS31-0, TNMODE=TRRS;
//Configuring the A E1/T1 for the sub-BSC
ADD AE1T1: SRN=3, SN=16, PN=2, OPCIDX=2, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC,
BSCFLAG=SUBBSC, SUBBSCTID=1, STCIC=0;
//congfiguring the semilink for the sub-BSC
ADD SEMILINK: IDX=0, APPTYPE=MTP2, LNKRATE=64K, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=2,
INMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&T
S11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&
TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1
&TS31-1, OUTSRN=3, OUTSN=3, OUTPN=16,
OUTMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&
TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1
&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-
1&TS31-1;
l Configuration on the sub-BSC
//Setting the TC Pool and the transmission on the Ater interface
SET BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=SEPARATE, IsSupportTcPool=YES,
IsMainBSC=NO, BSCTID=1, TCPOOLID=0, ATERTRANSMODE=TDM;
//Configuring the Ater E1/T1 on the BM side for the sub-BSC
ADD ATERE1T1: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=2, SRN=0, SN=16, PN=0;
//Configuring the Ater RSL on the BM side for the sub-BSC
ADD ATERSL: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=2,
ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0
&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-
0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30
-0&TS31-0, TNMODE=TRRS;
//Configuring the MTP3 links for the sub-BSC
ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DPX=2, NAME="BM2";
ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGSLC=2, BEARTYPE=MTP2,
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 93 Configuring TC Pool
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
319
TCMODE=SEPERATE_SUBORDINATE, ATERIDX=1,
ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0
&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-
0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30
-0&TS31-0, ASRN=3, ASN=18, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0,
ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&
TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1
&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-
1&TS31-1, LKTATE=64K, NAME="BM2";
ADD MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="BM2";
93.2 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over IP)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726
TC Pool in Ater over IP transmission mode.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The EIUa/OIUa/POUc board is configured, and there are idle ports on the configured
EIUa/OIUa/POUc board.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature is mutually exclusive to features GBFD-118602 A over IP and
GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
Network Topology
At least two BSCs are configured in the network. The BM/TC subracks of the two
BSCs are in separated configuration mode and the TC subrack of the two BSCs is
configured remotely.
The configuration of the clock source is the same for the two BSCs. For details on
the configuration of the clock source, see Configuring the Clocks.
Initial Data Preparation
The global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information.
The EIUa/OIUa/POUc board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board.
The BSC clock is configured. For details, see Configuring the Clocks.
Context
l To synchronize the frequency of the GSM network, the main BSC and sub-BSCs in a TC
pool should use the same clock source. In addition, a BSC can be connected to only one
TC pool. One TC pool supports a maximum of 16 BSCs.
l All TCSs in a TC pool are configured and controlled on the main BSC. The sub-BSC is
only configured with the BM subrack. The main BSC and sub-BSCs are connected to the
TCS over the Ater interface, and the TCS is connected to the MSC over the A interface.
l The settings of TC CRC Allow must be the same on the main BSC and sub-BSCs.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 93 Configuring TC Pool
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
320
l If TFO Switch of the sub-BSCs is set to ENABLE(Enable), the TFO setting is effective
only when TFO Option Switch of each TCS is set to ON(On) on the main BSC. For details
on the setting of TFO, see 117 Configuring TFO.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Configure the Ater interface link for the main BSC.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the main BSC. In this
step, set Service mode to SEPARATE(Separate), set Is Support Tc Pool to
YES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to YES(Yes), and set Ater Interface Transfer
Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC Pool ID.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH for the main BSC
to add an Ater connection path between the BM subrack and TC subrack.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML for the main BSC to add
the OML on the Ater interface between the main BSC and the TCS.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONSL for the main BSC to
add a signaling link on the Ater interface between the BM subrack of the main
BSC and TC subrack.
e. Determine the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link (PPP link or MLPPP link
group).
Add PPP link data.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the main BSC.
In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IP
interface board in the BM subrack.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the main BSC.
In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IP
interface board in the TC subrack.
NOTE
You can perform the preceding operation to add only one PPP link at a time. If
multiple PPP links are to be added, you need to perform the preceding operation
repeatedly.
Add MLPPP group data.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the main BSC.
In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IP
interface board in the BM subrack.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the main BSC.
In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IP
interface board in the TC subrack.
NOTE
You can perform the preceding operation to add only one MLPPP group at a time.
If multiple MLPPP groups are to be added, you need to perform the preceding
operation repeatedly.
f. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the main BSC to add
an Ater interface adjacent node on the BM side. In this step, set Adjacent Node
Type to BSC(Ater Interface on BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 93 Configuring TC Pool
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
321
g. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the main BSC to add
an Ater interface adjacent node on the TC side. In this step, set Adjacent Node
Type to TC(Ater Interface on TC).
h. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the main BSC. In this
step, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of the adjacent node on the BM side. In
addition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATER Interface).
i. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the main BSC. In this
step, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of the adjacent node on the TC side. In
addition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATER Interface).
2. Configure the A interface link for the main BSC.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the main BSC to add an
E1/T1 link on the A interface. In this step, set BSC Flag to MAINBSC(MAIN
BSC).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the main BSC to add
an MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSP
index, and Signalling link set name.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the main BSC to add
an MTP3 signaling link.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the main BSC to add an
MTP3 signaling route.
NOTE
The TCSs are configured on the main BSC. When you add MTP3 links to the main BSC,
MTP2 links are automatically added to the main BSC.
3. Configure the Ater interface link for the sub-BSC.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the sub-BSC. In this
step, set Service mode to SEPARATE(Separate), set Is Support Tc Pool to
YES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to NO(No), and set Ater Interface Transfer
Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC Pool ID and ID of a BSC in TC
Pool.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the sub-BSC to add
an E1/T1 link on the Ater interface on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC
config flag to CFGBM(BM).
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the main BSC to add
an E1/T1 link on the Ater interface on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config
flag to CFGTC(TC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the sub-BSC to add an
Ater signaling link on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to
CFGBM(BM).
e. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the main BSC to add an
Ater signaling link on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGTC
(TC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool.
f. Determine the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link (PPP link or MLPPP link
group).
Add PPP link data.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the sub-BSC to
add a PPP link on the BM side. In this step, set Slot No. to the number
of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 93 Configuring TC Pool
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
322
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the main BSC
to add a PPP link on the TC side. In this step, set Slot No. to the number
of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TCS.
Add MLPPP group data.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the sub-BSC to
add an MLPPP group on the BM side. In this step, set Slot No. to the
number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the main BSC to
add an MLPPP group on the TC side. In this step, set Slot No. to the
number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TCS.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPLNK for the sub-BSC to
add an MLPPP link on the BM side. In this step, set Slot No. to the
number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPLNK for the main BSC to
add an MLPPP link on the TC side. In this step, set Slot No. to the number
of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TC subrack.
g. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the sub-BSC to add an
Ater interface adjacent node on the BM side. In this step, set Adjacent Node
Type to BSC(Ater Interface on BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID.
h. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the main BSC to add
an Ater interface adjacent node on the TC side. In this step, set Adjacent Node
Type to TC(Ater Interface on TC).
i. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the sub-BSC to add an
IP path on the BM side. In this step, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of the
adjacent node on the BM side. In addition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATER
Interface).
j. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the main BSC to add an
IP path on the TC side. In this step, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of the adjacent
node on the TC side. In addition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATER
Interface).
4. Configure the A interface link for the sub-BSC.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the main BSC to add an A
interface E1/T1 link to the sub-BSC. In this step, set BSC Flag to SUBBSC(SUB
BSC). In addition, specify ID of slave BSC in TC Pool.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the sub-BSC to add an
MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSP
index, and Signalling link set name.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the sub-BSC to add
an MTP3 signaling link.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the sub-BSC to add an
MTP3 signaling route.
NOTE
The MTP2 links cannot be automatically added with the addition of the MTP3 links,
because the sub-BSC is not configured with the TCS.
e. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK for the main BSC to add
an MTP2 link to the sub-BSC. In this step, set Application Type to MTP2
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 93 Configuring TC Pool
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
323
(MTP2). In addition, specify Semipermanent Link Rate and BSC ID in the
TC pool.
Subsequent procedures: You also need to configure BTS data for the TC pool
networking. For details on how to configure the BTS data, see Configuring a BTS.
l Verification Procedure
1. In a cell under the main BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPC
Group No to those of the main BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPC
Group), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag to
MAINBSC(MAIN BSC).
Expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the main BSC works properly.
3. In a cell under a sub-BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPC
Group No to those of the sub-BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPC
Group), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag to SUBBSC
(SUB BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool.
Expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the sub-BSC works properly.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the main BSC. In this step,
set Is Support Tc Pool to NO(No).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the sub-BSC. In this step,
set Is Support Tc Pool to NO(No).
----End
Example
l Configuration on the main BSC
//Setting the TC Pool and the transmission mode on the Ater interface
SET BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=SEPARATE, IsSupportTcPool=YES,
IsMainBSC=YES, TCPOOLID=0,ATERTRANSMODE=IP;
//Configuring the Ater conpath on the main BSC
ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=1, BMSRN=0, BMSN=14, BMPN=1, TCSRN=3,
TCSN=14, TCPN=1;
//Configuring the Ater OML on the main BSC
ADD ATEROML: ATEROMLINX=0, ATERPIDX=0,
TSMASK=TS1-0&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-0&TS10-0&T
S11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&
TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0
&TS31-0;
//Configuring the Ater CONSL ont the main BSC
ADD ATERCONSL: ATERIDX=0,
ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0
&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-
0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30
-0&TS31-0;
//Configuring the Ater PPPlink on the BM side for the main BSC
ADD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=6,
TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1
&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-
1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30
-1&TS31-1, BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.1", MASK="255.255.255.0",
PEERIP="1.1.1.2", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable,
PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 93 Configuring TC Pool
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
324
//Configuring the Ater PPPlink on the TC side for the main BSC
ADD PPPLNK: SRN=3, SN=14, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=6,
TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1
&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-
1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30
-1&TS31-1, BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.2", MASK="255.255.255.0",
PEERIP="1.1.1.1", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable,
PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF;
//Configuring the Adjnode ong the BM side for the main BSC
ADD ADJNODE: ANI=0, NAME="adjnode0", NODET=BSC, BSCID=0;
//Configuring the Adjnode ong the TC side for the main BSC
ADD ADJNODE: ANI=1, NAME="adjnode1", NODET=TC;
//Configuring the Ater IPPATH on the BM side for the main BSC
ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=0, ITFT=ATER, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="1.1.1.2",
PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.1", TXBW=2000, RXBW=2000, CARRYFLAG=NULL,
PATHCHK=DISABLED;
//Configuring the Ater IPPATH on the TC side for the main BSC
ADD IPPATH: ANI=1, PATHID=1, ITFT=ATER, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="1.1.1.1",
PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.2", TXBW=2000, RXBW=2000, CARRYFLAG=NULL,
PATHCHK=DISABLED;
//Configuring the A E1/T1 on the main BSC
ADD AE1T1: SRN=3, SN=16, PN=0, DPCGIDX=0, OPCIDX=0, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC,
BSCFLAG=MAINBSC, STCIC=100;
//Configuring the MTP3 links on the main BSC
ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=1, LNKSLSMASK=B0001, EMERGENCY=OFF,
NAME="BM1";
//Configuring the MTP3 link on the main BSC
ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2,
TCMODE=SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL, ATERIDX=1,
ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0
&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-
0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30
-0&TS31-0, ASRN=3, ASN=16, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0,
ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&
TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1
&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-
1&TS31-1, LKTATE=64K, NAME="BM1";
//Configuring the MTP3 route on the main BSC
ADD MTP3RT: DPX=1, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="BM1";
//Configuring the Ater E1/T1 on the TC side for the sub-BSC
ADD ATERE1T1: BTCFLAG=CFGTC, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=1, SRN=3, SN=20, PN=0;
//Configuring the Ater RSL on the TC side for the sub-BSC
ADD ATERSL: BTCFLAG=CFGTC, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=2,
ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0
&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-
0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30
-0&TS31-0, TNMODE=TRRS;
//Configuring the Ater PPPLink on the TC side for sub-BSC
ADD PPPLNK: SRN=3, SN=14, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=6,
TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1
&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-
1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30
-1&TS31-1, BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.2", MASK="255.255.255.0",
PEERIP="1.1.1.1", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable,
PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF;
//Configuring the adjnode on the TC side for the sub-BSC
ADD ADJNODE: ANI=1, NAME="adjnode1", NODET=TC;
//Configuring the Ater IPPATH on the TC side for the sub-BSC
ADD IPPATH: ANI=1, PATHID=1, ITFT=ATER, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="1.1.1.1",
PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.2", TXBW=2000, RXBW=2000, CARRYFLAG=NULL,
PATHCHK=DISABLED;
//Configuring the A E1/T1 on the sub-BSC
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 93 Configuring TC Pool
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
325
ADD AE1T1: SRN=3, SN=16, PN=2, OPCIDX=2, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC,
BSCFLAG=SUBBSC, SUBBSCTID=1, STCIC=0;
//Configuring the semilink for the sub-BSC
ADD SEMILINK: IDX=0, APPTYPE=MTP2, LNKRATE=64K, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=2,
INMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&T
S11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&
TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1
&TS31-1, OUTSRN=3, OUTSN=3, OUTPN=16,
OUTMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&
TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1
&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-
1&TS31-1;
l Configuration on the sub-BSC
//Setting the TC Pool and the transmission on the Ater interface
SET BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=SEPARATE, IsSupportTcPool=YES,
IsMainBSC=NO, BSCTID=1, TCPOOLID=0, ATERTRANSMODE=TDM;
//Configuring the Ater E1/T1 on the BM side for the sub-BSC
ADD ATERE1T1: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=2, SRN=0, SN=16, PN=0;
//Configuring the Ater RSL on the BM side for the sub-BSC
ADD ATERSL: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=2,
ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0
&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-
0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30
-0&TS31-0, TNMODE=TRRS;
//Configuring the Ater PPPLink on the BM side for the sub-BSC
ADD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=16, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=6,
TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1
&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-
1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30
-1&TS31-1, BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.2", MASK="255.255.255.0",
PEERIP="1.1.1.1", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable,
PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF;
//Configuring the adjnode on the BM side for the sub-BSC
ADD ADJNODE: ANI=1, NAME="adjnode1", NODET=BSC;
//Configuring the Ater IPPATH on the BM side for the sub-BSC
ADD IPPATH: ANI=1, PATHID=1, ITFT=ATER, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="1.1.1.1",
PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.2", TXBW=2000, RXBW=2000, CARRYFLAG=NULL,
PATHCHK=DISABLED;
//Configuring the MTP3 links on the sub-BSC
ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DPX=2, NAME="BM2";
//Configuring the MTP3 link on the sub-BSC
ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGSLC=2, BEARTYPE=MTP2,
TCMODE=SEPERATE_SUBORDINATE, ATERIDX=1,
ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0
&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-
0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30
-0&TS31-0, ASRN=3, ASN=18, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0,
ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&
TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1
&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-
1&TS31-1, LKTATE=64K, NAME="BM2";
//Configuring the MTP3 route on the sub-BSC
ADD MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="BM2";
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 93 Configuring TC Pool
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
326
94 Configuring OML Backup
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113728
OML Backup. When the operation and maintenance link (OML) backup function of the BTS is
enabled, the BTS automatically switches to anther port to set up an OML if the established OML
is disconnected, thereby reducing service interruption duration.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The BTS3900B, BTS3900E, and BTS3X series base station do not support this feature.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-117801 Ring Topology,
GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass, GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over
E1/T1, or GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization.
When this feature is enabled simultaneously with the GBFD-113801 TRX Mutual Aid
feature:
The value of Flex Abis Mode of the BTS must be set to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis).
TRX mutual aid is triggered by the active link. The static PDTCH on the active link
is unavailable due to transmission faults. Therefore, you are advised to change the
static PDTCH to dynamic PDTCH.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
This feature cannot be used together with the OML timeslot automatic detection.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 94 Configuring OML Backup
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
327
CAUTION
l The BTS in TDM or HDLC transmission mode supports this feature. The BTS in IP
transmission mode does not support this feature.
l OMLs on ports 0 and 1 of the BTS main cabinet group support this feature. OMLs on other
ports of the main cabinet group and OMLs of the main and extension cabinet groups do not
support this feature.
l The active and standby OMLs between the BSC and the BTS must not be carried by the same
E1/T1 cable, including the same E1/T1 cable of an upper-level BTS. When the upper-level
BTS is connected to the BSC by using only one E1/T1 cable and the lower-level BTS requires
the OML backup function, a secondary link must be added to directly connect the upper-
level BTS or lower-level BTS to the BSC.
Context
l If the OML between the BSC and the BTS fails, the BTS cannot work. The OML Backup
feature allows a pair of OMLs to be configured on two independent E1 cables (one for
each). When the active OML is faulty, the BTS uses the standby OML. This prevents the
BTS and cells from being out of service due to transmission failures or port failures.
l When this feature is used, one OML is configured on ports 0 and 1 of the BTS, respectively.
After the BTS is reset, it attempts to establish OMLs on the two ports in turn. If the BTS
establishes an OML on a port, it always uses the OML on this port unless the BTS is reset
or the OML is disconnected. When the established OML is broken, the BTS attempts to
establish an OML on another port. If the OML is established successfully, the BSC triggers
an OML switchover procedure.
l After the OML switchover, the RSL, TCH, idle timeslot, and monitoring timeslot are not
switched over. That is, for ports 0 and 1, if the transmission link or port where the active
OML is located is faulty, all TRX channels, idle timeslots, and monitoring timeslots
configured on this port become unavailable. The TRX channels, idle timeslots, and
monitoring timeslots on a normal port, however, are still available. Therefore, cells under
the BTS continue to provide services.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOMLBACKUP. In this step, set
Configure Backup OML to YES(Yes) and set Wait Time before OML Switch and
Try Switching Duration Time to appropriate values.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSOMLBACKUP to query the value of
Configure Backup OML.
Expected result: Configure Backup OML is set to YES, and other parameters are
set based on configurations.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 94 Configuring OML Backup
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
328
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOMLBACKUP. In this step, set
Configure Backup OML to NO(No).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.
----End
Example
//Activating OML Backup
DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
SET BTSOMLBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, OMLBKUP=YES, WTBS=30, TBS=30;
ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
//Verifying OML Backup
LST BTSOMLBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
//Deactivating OML Backup
DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
SET BTSOMLBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, OMLBKUP=NO;
ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 94 Configuring OML Backup
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
329
95 Configuring Adaptive Transmission
Link Blocking
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113729
Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The BSC6900 has been configured with an POUc, OIUa, or EIUa board that supports
TDM transmission.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
The transmission quality, especially the quality of microwave transmission, is vulnerable to bad
weather, leading to degraded service quality and increased call drop rate. To prevent this
problem, the BSC monitors transmission quality in real time. The BSC automatically blocks an
E1 link if the transmission quality of the E1 link is lower than the specified threshold. After
being blocked, the E1 link carries no service. After the transmission quality of the E1 link
becomes desirable, the BSC unblocks the link. After being unblocked, the E1 link carries
services.
WARNING
This feature blocks an E1/T1 adaptively, leading to service interruption on the E1/T1.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 95 Configuring Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
330
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET E1T1 with High BER Auto Isolation
Switch set to ON(ON) and High BER Auto Isolation Threshold set to O1E3_R5E4
(OCCUR:1E3, RECOVERY:5E4) on the POUc/OIUa/EIUa board.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSE1T1BER with BER OOS Switch set
to ON(ON) and BER OOS Threshold set to O1E3_R5E4(OCCUR:1E3,
RECOVERY:5E4).
NOTE
Step 1 and Step 2 uses an example for your reference only. Set High BER Auto Isolation
Threshold and BER OOS Threshold based on the field configuration.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST E1T1 to query High BER Auto Isolation
Switch and High BER Auto Isolation Threshold.
Expected result: High BER Auto Isolation Switch is ON(ON) and High BER Auto
Isolation Threshold is the same as that set in the activation procedure.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSE1T1BER to query BER OOS
Switch and BER OOS Threshold.
Expected result: BER OOS Switch is ON(ON) and BER OOS Threshold is the same
as that set in the activation procedure.
3. Use the MS to make a call and wait for BER.
Expected result: The BER is higher than 1E-3.
4. Log in to the LMT or M2000 to view the alarms reported in real time.
Expected result: An ALM-21207 E1/T1 Excessive Bit Error Rate alarm is reported
with the cause value of BER within one minute exceeds the allowed limit. After 10
seconds the alarm is reported, ongoing services are interrupted.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET E1T1 with High BER Auto Isolation
Switch set to OFF(OFF).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSE1T1BER with BER OOS Switch set
to OFF(OFF).
----End
Example
/*Activation procedure*/
//Configuring the switch and threshold for blocking an E1 link when the
BER exceeds the specified threshold for BSC
SET E1T1: SRN=0, SN=14, BT=OIUa, PS=SINGLE, PN=3, BERAUTOISOSW=ON,
BERAUTOISOTHRD=O1E3_R5E4;
//Configuring the switch and threshold for blocking an E1 link when the
BER exceeds the specified threshold for BTS
SET BTSE1T1BER: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, BEROOSSwitch=ON,
BEROOSTHD=O1E3_R5E4;
/*Deactivation procedure*/
//Turning off the switch for blocking an E1 link when the BER exceeds the
specified threshold for BSC
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 95 Configuring Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
331
SET E1T1: SRN=0, SN=14, BT=OIUa, PS=SINGLE, PN=3, BERAUTOISOSW=OFF;
//Turning off the switch for blocking an E1 link when the BER exceeds the
specified threshold for BTS
SET BTSE1T1BER: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, BEROOSSwitch=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 95 Configuring Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
332
96 Configuring Automatic Frequency
Correction (AFC)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510101
Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC).
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature.
Only the RRU3008 and RRU3908 support the AFC function for downlink.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115821 EICC,
GBFD-115830 VAMOS, or GBFD-115832 VAMOS Call Drop Solution.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
AFC is a frequency correction algorithm used on the base station side for fast-moving MSs. It
ensures reliability of radio links carrying high-quality speech services for MSs moving at 500
km/h and also ensures service continuity.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT.
If... Then...
The AFC function needs to be enabled
in the uplink
Set UL Frequency Adjust Switch to
YES(Yes).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 96 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
333
If... Then...
The AFC function needs to be enabled
in the downlink
Set both UL Frequency Adjust
Switch and DL Frequency Adjust
Switch to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHEXT.
If... Then...
The value of UL Frequency Adjust
Switch is YES(Yes)
The AFC function is enabled in the
uplink.
The values of both UL Frequency
Adjust Switch and DL Frequency
Adjust Switch are YES(Yes)
The AFC function is enabled in the
downlink.

2. Make a call in a fast-moving vehicle. On the LMT, click Trace. In the navigation tree,
choose Trace > GSM Services > Abis Interface CS Trace. In the displayed dialog
box, click RSL in the Trace Type area. Then, check the value of Uplink Receive
Quality in the measurement report. If the AFC function has been activated, the value
of Uplink Receive Quality decreases.
NOTE
Uplink Receive Quality is specified by the "rxquel-ul" field in the measurement report. The
value ranges from 0 to 7. A small value indicates good quality, for example, 0 indicates that
the quality is the best. A large value indicates poor quality, for example, 7 indicates that the
quality is the worst.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set UL
Frequency Adjust Switch and DL Frequency Adjust Switch to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=YES, DLFREQADJ=YES;
//Verifying Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)
LST GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CELLID=0;
//Deactivating Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=NO, DLFREQADJ=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 96 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
334
97 Configuring Fast Move Handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510102
Fast Move Handover.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This
feature depends on the feature GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
Handovers along railway lines need to be completed quickly because users move fast from the
coverage of one cell to that of another cell. To reduce failures, a second handover must be
initiated quickly upon a handover failure (for example, interference occurs abruptly on the radio
interface). The fast move handover algorithm, which is optimized on the basis of the current
algorithm, can trigger better cell handover within a short period.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Quick
Handover Enable to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFAST. In this step, set Quick
Move Speed Threshold, Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, Quick Handover
Down Trigger Level, Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish Time,
Quick Handover Punish Value, Serving Cell Filter Length MR Number,
Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number, Ignore Measurement Report
Number, EN Quick PBGT HO ALG When MS Leaves BTS, Handover Direction
Forecast Enable, Handover Direction Forecast Statistic Times, Frequency Shift
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 97 Configuring Fast Move Handover
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
335
Handover Statistic Time, and Frequency Shift Handover Duration to appropriate
values.
NOTE
You can run the BSC6900 MML command LST G2GNCELL to query information about the
neighboring cells of this cell.
If this cell is configured with external neighboring cells, run the BSC6900 MML command
MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish Time, and
Quick Handover Punish Value to appropriate values.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set UL
Frequency Adjust Switch and UL Frequency Adjust Value to appropriate values.
l Verification Procedure
1. Move the MS away from the serving cell until the frequency offset in the measurement
report, CH RQD, or HO DETECT message is a negative value and the moving speed
of the MS is greater than Quick Move Speed Threshold. When the frequency offset
information fails to be reported or the frequency offset information is invalid, the
uplink level in the serving cell is lower than Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, the
downlink level in the serving cell is lower than Quick Handover Down Trigger
Level, and the path loss of configured chain neighboring cells is lower than the
specified threshold of the path loss of the serving cell.
2. On the LMT, trace BSSAP messages over the A interface.
Expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Performed message to the MSC with the
handover cause value "better-cell".
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Quick
Handover Enable set to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating Fast Move Handover
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, QUICKHOEN=YES;
SET GCELLHOFAST: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, HOUPTRIGE=50, HODOWNTRIGE=50,
MOVESPEEDTHRES=35, MSLEVSTRQPBGT=YES;
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FREQADJ=YES, FREQADJVALUE=255;
//Deactivating Fast Move Handover
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, QUICKHOEN=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 97 Configuring Fast Move Handover
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
336
98 Configuring Chain Cell Handover
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510103
Chain Cell Handover.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
This feature enables fast-moving MSs to move in chain cells by predicting the moving direction
and thereby increases the handover success rate and improves service quality.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL to add a neighboring cell. In
this step, set Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes). If a cell has been added as a
neighboring cell, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step,
set Neighboring Cell Type to HANDOVERNCELL(Handover Neighboring
cell) and Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes).
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST G2GNCELL to query the value of Chain
Neighbor Cell.
Expected result: The value of Chain Neighbor Cell is YES(Yes).
l Deactivation Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 98 Configuring Chain Cell Handover
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
337
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Chain
Neighbor Cell to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating Chain Cell Handover
ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1024, NBR2GNCELLID=2542,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, ISCHAINNCELL=YES;
//Verifying Chain Cell Handover
LST G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1024, NBR2GNCELLID=2542;
//Deactivating Chain Cell Handover
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1024, NBR2GNCELLID=2542,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ISCHAINNCELL=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 98 Configuring Chain Cell Handover
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
338
99 Configuring Multi-Site Cell
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510104
Multi-Site Cell.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The base station must be DBS3900.
Table 99-1 shows the hardware for supporting this feature.
Table 99-1 Dependencies on hardware
TRX/Subsite x
Subsite
GTMU Type RF Module CPRI Rate (Gbit/
s)
O6*12
O8*9
O9*8
O10*6
GTMUb RRU3004
RRU3008 V1
RRU3908 V1
Equal to or greater
than 1.25
O6*6 GTMU and
GTMUb
All types of RRUs Equal to or greater
than 1.25

NOTE
Oa*b indicates a TRXs/subsites x b subsites. For example, O8*30 indicates 8 TRXs/subsites x 30
subsites.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature cannot be used together with any of the followings: GBFD-115830
VAMOS, GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown, GBFD-111604
Intelligent Combiner Bypass, GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel
Type, GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation, GBFD-118701
RAN Sharing, GBFD-115902 Transmit Diversity, GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT
(Power Boost Technology), GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping,
GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network, GBFD-114001 Extended Cell,
MRFD-211801 Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing(GSM), GBFD-118104 Enhanced
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 99 Configuring Multi-Site Cell
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
339
EDGE Coverage, GBFD-119308 Intermodulation Testing, GBFD-118106 Dynamic
Power Sharing (The multi-site cell feature cannot be used together with dual-PA power
sharing), and GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping) (The
multi-site cell feature cannot be used together with cross-module RF hopping)
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
The multi-site cell feature enables multiple subsites to be configured as one logical cell. Such
cell is also called a cascaded cell. A subsite is defined as an area physically covered by multiple
RRUs that are served by one BBU. In coverage scenarios such as high-speed railways, tunnels,
or indoor space, the use of cascaded cells can reduce handovers, increase coverage efficiency,
and therefore improve user experience.
l In a multi-site cell, only one primary subsite can be configured.
l A TRX board bound with carriers can be added only to the primary subsite. TRX boards
that are not bound with any carriers can be added only to the secondary subsite.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSLOCGRP to add the primary subsite
with Location Group No. set to the desired one and Is Main Local Group set to
YES(YES).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSLOCGRP to add the secondary subsite
with Location Group No. set to a desired one and Is Main Local Group set to NO
(NO).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP to add an RXU to the
primary subsite after specifying Location Group No., Cabinet No., Subrack No.,
and Slot No..
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP to add an RXU to the
secondary subsite after specifying Location Group No., Cabinet No., Subrack
No., and Slot No..
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSBINDLOCGRP to bind a carrier in
the primary subsite to an idle channel on the TRX board in the secondary subsite after
specifying Main Location Group No., Sub-Location Group No., TRX ID, Cabinet
No., Subrack No., Slot No., and Sub-Location Group TRX Board Pass No..
NOTE
l This configuration takes effect only when the carriers in the primary subsite and those in
the secondary subsite are the same.
l All the subsites under a BTS or cell will be deleted when the BTS or cell is deleted.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Directly Magnifier
BTS Flag set to YES(Yes).
7. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 99 Configuring Multi-Site Cell
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
340
If... Then...
Only the power amplifier for the carriers
under the operating subsite needs to be
started,
Set Location Group Power Switch to
OnlyCurPwrLoc(Only Current
Working Location TRXes be Turned
On).
The power amplifier for carriers under
all subsites needs to be started,
Set Location Group Power Switch to
ALLPwrLoc(All Location TRXes be
Turned On).

l Verification Procedure
1. Start CS single user tracing on the LMT. For details, see Tracing CS Domain Messages
of a Single Subscriber in the BSC6900 LMT User Guide.
2. Use the MS to call a phone in the test subsite.
3. Check the result of CS single user tracing.
The expected result: The location group no carried in the Channel Activation
message is the test location group number.
l Deactivation Procedure
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
ADD BTSLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=0, ISMAINLOCGRP=YES;
ADD BTSLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=1, ISMAINLOCGRP=NO;
ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=0, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=0;
ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=1, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=1;
ADD BTSBINDLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, MAINLOCGRPNO=0, SLAVELOCGRPNO=1,
TRXID=1, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=1, TRXPN=0;
ADD BTSBINDLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, MAINLOCGRPNO=0, SLAVELOCGRPNO=1,
TRXID=2, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=1, TRXPN=1;
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DIRMAGANSITEFLAG=YES;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 99 Configuring Multi-Site Cell
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
341
100 Configuring Satellite Transmission
over Abis Interface
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113901
Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature cannot be used with the following feature: GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The cell to be verified is in the normal state and has idle channels.
To ensure the normal processing of PS services in satellite transmission mode, the GPRS
parameters related to a PS cell need to be set as follows: T3168 is set to 1000ms, T3192
to 1000ms, and BS_CV_MAX to 15.
Context
Using satellite transmission over Abis interface enables operators to deploy BTSs in areas that
are difficult to reach through conventional terrestrial transmission, therefore solving the
communication problem in these areas. Satellite transmission over Abis interface has a longer
delay in information exchanges than terrestrial transmission.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set Transmission
Mode to SAT_TRANS(Satellite Transmission).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 100 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
342
3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLAPDWS. In this step, set
RSL LAPD Window Size to an appropriate value based on the actual delay.
NOTE
RSL LAPD Window Size is set to 48 by default and can be flexibly configured by operators
based on the actual delay. A longer delay requires a larger value.
4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR. In this step,
set T200 SDCCH to 100, T200 SACCH SDCCH to 100, and T200 SDCCH
SAPI3 to 200. Operators can adjust the settings of these parameters based on the actual
delay over the Abis interface. A longer delay requires a larger value.
5. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step,
set MS MAX Retrans to an appropriate value.
NOTE
Adjusting MS MAX Retrans to a larger value increases the radio access rate and adjusting
MS MAX Retrans to a smaller value lightens the load of the RACH and SDCCH.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.
7. Configuring a Clock for a BTS.
NOTE
If the BTS has a difficulty in using the original clock, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type to INT_CLK(Internal Clock).
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GCELLSTAT to query the status of the cell.
Expected result: Cell Service State is set to Yes.
2. Use the MS to initiate a call.
3. Initiate CS domain message tracing on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS
Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. In this step, click RSL under Trace Type.
Expected result: Complete signaling procedure of the mobile-originated call is traced.
4. Connect the MS to the network through dial-up and then enable the MS to perform a
PING service. The service succeeds.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set Transmission
Mode to TER_TRANS(Terrestrial Transmission).
3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR. In this step,
set T200 SDCCH to 60, T200 SACCH SDCCH to 60, and T200 SDCCH SAPI3 to
60. Adjust settings of these parameters based on the actual delay over the Abis
interface. A longer delay requires a larger value.
4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step,
set MS MAX Retrans to 2_Times(2_Times). Adjust MS MAX Retrans to an
appropriate value.
5. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step,
set T3168 to 500ms, T3192 to 500ms, and BS_CV_MAX to 10.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.
----End
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 100 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
343
Example
/*Activating Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface*/
//Deactivating a BTS
DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
//Setting a transmission mode
SET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, TransMode=SAT_TRANS;
//Setting a clock mode
SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ClkType=INT_CLK, TRANSTYPE=E1, PN=0;
//Activating the BTS
ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
/*Deactivating Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface*/
//Deactivating the BTS
DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
//Setting a transmission mode
SET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, TransMode=TER_TRANS;
//Activating the BTS
ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 100 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
344
101 Configuring Satellite Transmission
over A Interface
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113902
Satellite Transmission over A Interface.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The EIUa/OIUa/POUc board is configured.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The initial configuration of the BSC is complete. The cell to be verified is in the normal
state and has idle channels.
Context
Satellite transmission can be applied on the A interface in situations where terrestrial
transmission cannot be established between the BSC and MSC (for example, in sites where an
emergency situation occurs temporarily or in scenarios where satellite works as a backup
transmission means).
If satellite transmission is applied over the A interface, you are advised to configure satellite
transmission over the Ater interface.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 to add an E1/T1 link on the A
interface.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 101 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
345
NOTE
An EIUa board provides 32 E1s/T1s. Each E1 has thirty-two 64 kbit/s timeslots. Each T1 has
twenty-five 64 kbit/s timeslots. Each timeslot corresponds to a CIC.
For example, if Start CIC of the first E1/T1 is 0, then Start CIC of the second E1/T1 must
belong to a CIC group that is different from the CIC group of Start CIC of the first configured
E1/T1. Here, if E1 is used, Start CIC of the second E1 must be greater than 31. If T1 is used,
Start CIC of the second T1 must be greater than 24.
When the MSC Pool feature is enabled, the Start CIC of the E1s/T1s that have the same pair
of originating and destination signaling points must be unique.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 signaling link
set on the A interface.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK with Satellite flag set to YES
(YES) to add an MTP3 signaling link on the A interface.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route on the A
interface.
l Verification Procedure
1. Use an MS to originate a call. The call is set up successfully.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MTP3LNK to query the status of the MTP3
signaling link.
Expected result: UsageStatus is set to Normal.
3. Trace the messages on the A interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the A
Interface. In this step, click BSSAP under Trace Type. Trace the CS domain messages
on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis
Interface. In this step, click RSL under Trace Type.
Expected result: Complete signaling procedure of the mobile-originated call can be
seen.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LNK to remove the MTP3 signaling
link.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK with Satellite flag set to NO
(NO) to add an MTP3 signaling link on the A interface.
----End
Example
/*Activating the feature Satellite Transmission over A Interface*/
//Configuring the A interface E1/T1
ADD AE1T1: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0, DPCGIDX=0, OPCIDX=0, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC,
BSCFLAG=MAINBSC, STCIC=100;
//Configuring an MTP3 link set over the A interface
ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=0, NAME="SATTRAN";
//Configuring an MTP3 link over the A interface
ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=TOGETHER, ASRN=0,
ASN=16, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0, ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1,
LKTATE=64K, STFLG=YES NAME="0";
//Configuring an MTP3 route over the A interface
ADD MTP3RT: DPX=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="SAT";
/*Deactivating the feature Satellite Transmission over A Interface*/
//Removing an MTP3 link with Satellite flag set to YES(YES)
RMV MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1;
//Adding an MTP3 link with Satellite flag set to NO(NO)
ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=TOGETHER, ASRN=0,
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 101 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
346
ASN=16, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0, ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1,
LKTATE=64K, STFLG=NO NAME="1";
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 101 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
347
102 Configuring Satellite Transmission
over Ater Interface
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113903
Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The EIUa/OIUa board is configured.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The initial configuration of the BSC is complete. The cell to be verified is in the normal
state and has idle channels.
Context
In BM/TC separated mode with the TC configured remotely, satellite transmission over Ater
interface can be used when installing transmission lines is geographically impossible.
If satellite transmission is applied over the A interface, you are advised to configure satellite
transmission over the Ater interface.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH to add an Ater
connection path between the MPS and the TCS.
NOTE
If the TC pool feature is supported, the command only applies to the main BSC. The sub-BSC
needs to be configured through the ADD ATERE1T1 command.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 102 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
348
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML to add an Ater OML.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PBE1T1 with Transmission Mode set to
SATEL(Satellite Transmission) to add an E1/T1 link on the Pb interface.
NOTE
If the TC pool feature is supported, the command only applies to the main BSC. The sub-BSC
needs to be configured through the ADD ATERSL command.
4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD ATERCONSL with Window
Size set to an appropriate value according to the actual delay.
NOTE
If the TC pool feature is supported, the command only applies to the main BSC. The sub-BSC
needs to be configured through the MOD ATERSL command.
The longer the delay in satellite transmission, the larger the value to be set.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ATERSL to query the status of the Ater
signaling link.
Expected result: UsageStatus is set to Normal.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD ATERSL with Transmission Mode set to
TRRS(Terrestrial Transmission).
----End
Example
/*Activating the feature Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface*/
//Adding an Ater connection path
ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=0, BMSRN=0, BMSN=16, BMPN=0, TCSRN=3, TCSN=16,
TCPN=0;
//Adding an Ater OML
ADD ATEROML: ATEROMLINX=0, ATERPIDX=0,
TSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-
1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&T
S22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;
//Adding an Ater signaling link with Transmission Mode set to SATEL
(Satellite Transmission)
ADD ATERCONSL: ATERIDX=0,
ATERMASK=TS1-0&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS1
1-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0
&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0,
TNMODE=SATEL;
/*Deactivating the feature Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface*/
//Modifying the transmission mode of the Ater signaling link
MOD ATERCONSL: ATERSLID=0, TNMODE=TRRS;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 102 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
349
103 Configuring Satellite Transmission
over Gb Interface
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113905
Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The DPUb board is configured.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. The procedure for configuring the satellite transmission on the Gb interface is the
same as the procedure for configuring the terrestrial transmission on the Gb interface.
For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) and Configuring the Gb
Interface (over IP).
l Verification Procedure
1. After an NSE is added, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SIGBVC to query
the state of an SIG BSSGP virtual connection (SIG BVC) by checking the setting of
SIG BVC State.
Expected result: If SIG BVC State is set to Normal, it indicates that the SIG BVC
works properly.
2. After a PTP BVC is added, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PTPBVC to query
the state of the PTP BVC by checking the setting of Service State.
Expected result: If Manage State is set to Unblock and Service State is set to
Normal, it indicates that the PTP BVC works properly.
l Deactivation Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 103 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
350
1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
For configurations, see the typical script example of the Gb interface configuration in the Initial
Configuration.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 103 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
351
104 Configuring Local Multiple
Signaling Points
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115301
Local Multiple Signaling Points.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l Dependency on License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other prerequisites
Multiple OSPs are configured.
Multiple DSPs are configured.
The route, link set, and link data are configured. The Operation State of the link is
Available.
Context
The local multiple signaling point feature enables one physical BSC to serve as multiple logical
BSCs so that each logical BSC can exchange signaling with the MSC. The traffic load is
distributed to each logical BSC. Therefore, the impact on the paging traffic of the BSC is reduced.
CAUTION
The original intra-BSC handover or intra-BSC directed retry may be converted into outgoing
BSC handover or outgoing BSC directed retry after local multiple signaling points are
configured. As a result, the signaling load on the A interface and the call establishment time are
increased.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 104 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
352
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC repeatedly to add the OSPs. The
parameters Network ID and OSP code bits of the multiple OSPs must be consistent.
OSP Codes must be different among the OSPs. In addition, OSP Codes must be
different from DSP Codes.
NOTE
l The OSP code of OSPs must be different from each other. They must also be different from the
DSP code of DSPs with the same Network ID.
l The OSP code bits of systems with the same Network ID must be the same.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC repeatedly to add the desired DSPs.
In this step, the OSP index and DSP type specified in Step 1 must be set.
NOTE
After the DSP is configured, the connection from a logical BSC to the MSC is configured. Take the
establishment of the connections from two logical BSCs to the same MSC as an example. First, you need
to add two OSPs with different OSP codes. Then, add two DSPs with identical DSP code, which is the
signaling code of the MSC. In this manner, the connections from two logical BSCs to the same MSC are
established.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC to configure the OSP of the logical
BSC. In this step, set Network ID, OSP code bits, and OSP code according to
network planning. The OSP codes of multiple logical BSCs must be different.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to configure the logical link
between the OSP and DSP.
NOTE
If multiple logical BSCs need to be connected to the same DPC, the OSP index needs to be set to
the OSP index of the logical BSC set in Step 1. The DSP bear type needs to set according to network
planning. In the case of ATM/TDM transmission, select MTP3(MTP3); in the case of IP
transmission, select M3UA(M3UA); in the case of co-transmission, select MTP3_M3UA(MTP3
and M3UA).
3. Configure the transmission link between OSP and DSP. If the bear type is MTP3, then
the MTP3 link set, MTP3 link, and MTP3 route need to be configured. If the bear type
is M3UA, then the M3UA link set, M3UA link, M3UA route, M3UA local entity, and
M3UA destination entity need to be configured. The following takes the MTP3 bear
type as an example.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to configure the link set between
the OSP and DSP. In this step, set DSP index to that configured in Step 2.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to configure the physical link
between the OSP and DSP. In this step, set the Signaling link set index as specified
in Step 4.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to configure the route from the
OSP to the DSP. The route from the OSP to the DSP can be set up either in direct
connection or transfer manner.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 104 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
353
NOTE
In direct connection manner, the DSP index in this command must be the same as the DSP index
corresponding to the link set configured in Step 4. If a signaling transfer point is used, the DSP
index in this command must be different from the DSP index corresponding to the link set configured
in Step 4 and the DSP corresponding to the link set must provide the signaling link transfer
functionality.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to query the status of the DSP
configured in Step 2.
Expected result: The value of SCCP DSP state is Accessible.
l Deactivation Procedure
NOTE
You are advised to remove traffic data and then DPCs and OPCs.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove a DPC.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV OPC to remove an OPC.
----End
Example
/*Activation procedure*/
//Adding an OPC
ADD OPC: NAME="opc1", SPX=0, NI=NAT, SPCBITS=BIT16, SPDF=WNF, SPC=111;
//Adding a DPC
ADD N7DPC: NAME="dpc1", DPX=1, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=222, DPCT=A,
BEARTYPE=MTP3;
/*Deactivation procedure*/
//Removing a DPC
RMV N7DPC: DPX=1;
//Removing an OPC
RMV OPC: SPX=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 104 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
354
105 Configuring Semi-Permanent
Connection
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114701
Semi-Permanent Connection.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The BTS3900B does not support this feature.
Context
After a semi-permanent connection is configured, the information received by the E1 timeslot
at the receiving end is exchanged to an E1 timeslot at the transmitting end by the internal timeslot
switching function of the BSC. In this way, the collected information is transparently transmitted
in the BSC.
Huawei BSS supports two types of semi-permanent connection:
l Semi-permanent link
The input and output of a semi-permanent link are located at the BSC interface board. In
this case, the BSC performs timeslot switching between the input timeslot and the output
timeslot.
l Monitoring timeslot
One end of the channel associated with a monitoring timeslot is a BTS port, and the other
end of the channel is a BSC interface board. In this case, the BTS and the BSC together
perform timeslot switching.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 105 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
355
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
Activating a semi-permanent link
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK to add a semi-permanent
link in the BSC. In this step, set Application Type to OTHER(OTHER) and
Semipermanent Link Rate to an appropriate value as required.
NOTE
In BSC Start Timeslot No. and Out BSC Start Timeslot No. need to be set based on network
planning. Ensure that the associated timeslots are not occupied.
Activating a monitoring timeslot
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSMONITORTS to add a monitoring
timeslot. In this step, set Time Slot Rate to an appropriate value based on the site
requirements.
NOTE
If the transmission mode of a BTS is IP over FE/GE, the BTS does not monitoring timeslots.
l Verification Procedure
Verifying a semipermanent link
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SEMILINK to query the state of a semi-
permanent link.
Expected result: The value of State is OK.
Verifying a monitoring timeslot
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSMONITORTS to query the state of
a monitoring timeslot.
Expected result: The information about the monitoring timeslot is displayed.
l Deactivation Procedure
Deactivating a semi-permanent link
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SEMILINK to remove a semi-
permanent link.
Deactivating a monitoring timeslot
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSMONITORTS to remove a
monitoring timeslot from a BTS.
----End
Example
//Activating a semi-permanent link
ADD SEMILINK: IDX=0, APPTYPE=OTHER, LNKRATE=16K, INSRN=1, INSN=14,
INPN=0, INTSN=10, OUTSRN=1, OUTSN=14, OUTPN=2, OUTTSN=20;
//Activating a monitoring timeslot
ADD BTSMONITORTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TSRATE=16K, BSCSRN=0, BSCSN=26,
BSCPN=6, BSCTS=10, BSCSUBTS=6, STPN=7, STCN=0, STSRN=0, STSN=6, STTS=10,
STSUBTS=2;
//Verifying a semipermanent link
DSP SEMILINK: IDX=0;
//Verifying a monitoring timeslot
LST BTSMONITORTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TSIDX=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 105 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
356
//Deactivating a semi-permanent link
RMV SEMILINK: IDX=0;
//Deactivating a monitoring timeslot
RMV BTSMONITORTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TSIDX=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 105 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
357
106 Configuring End-to-End MS
Signaling Tracing
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116401
End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature requires support from the MSC and M2000.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
This feature requires support from the MSC.
The M2000 feature WOFD-190600 GBSS Enhanced Subscriber Tracing and
WOFD-191400 G&U CS Subscriber Tracing have been enalbed.
Context
The end-to-end MS signaling tracing function creates or removes a user tracing task in the HLR.
The HLR sends a tracing activation message to the MSC or VLR where the MS is located. When
the traced MS requests services, the MSC instructs the BSC to start user tracing. After the MS
moves to another MSC and initiates location update, the HLR sends a new tracing activation
message to the new VLR. The original user tracing task ends.
By using the end-to-end MS signaling tracing function, the system can collect information about
a specified MS when required. This function occupies a small number of system resources. By
recording the signaling about an MS, this function helps to identify the NE where the fault occurs,
facilitating fault handling.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 106 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
358
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support
End-to-end User Tracing Function to YES(Yes).
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST OTHSOFTPARA to check the value of
Support End-to-end User Tracing Function.
Expected result: Support End-to-end User Tracing Function is set to YES(Yes).
2. On the M2000, choose Monitor > Signaling Trace > Signaling Trace
Management from the main menu. In the navigation tree, double-click 2G End-to-
End User Trace.
Expected result: A 2G End-to-End User Trace dialog box is displayed.
3. In the 2G End-to-End User Trace window, select User ID type from the drop-down
list and enter the user ID. Then click OK.
Expected result: The M2000 generates a report on the end-to-end MS signaling
tracing.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support
End-to-end User Tracing Function to NO(No).
----End
Example
/*Activating End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing*/
//Enabling the end-to-end MS signaling tracing function
SET OTHSOFTPARA: End2EndTraceState=YES, AInterMsgTrace=YES,
SENDBSSINVOKETRACE=YES;
/*Deactivating End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing*/
//Disabling the end-to-end MS signaling tracing function
SET OTHSOFTPARA: End2EndTraceState=NO, AInterMsgTrace=NO,
SENDBSSINVOKETRACE=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 106 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
359
107 Configuring Active Power Control
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117602
Active Power Control.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
Active Power Control enables the immediate performance of power control after an MS
successfully gains access to the network or a handover is successfully performed in the BSC. In
such a case, the BSC can control the uplink and downlink power promptly. Therefore, both the
BTS and the MS transmit signals at a proper power. With the active power control, the system
interference is decreased, the QoS is ensured, and the power consumption of the MS or BTS is
decreased.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set
Power Forecast Allowed to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set UL
PC Allowed to YES(Yes), and set DL PC Allowed to YES(Yes).
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step,
specify TRX ID and Channel No., and then set Administrative State to Lock
(Lock) to block all TCHs on the BCCH TRX of cell 0 except SDCCH.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 107 Configuring Active Power Control
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
360
2. Perform the single user CS trace by referring toTracing CS Domain Messages of a
Single Subscriber in cell 0.
3. Make a call.
4. Check the result in Single User CS Trace window.
Expected result: The call is established successfully and the voice quality is good. The
TCH occupied by the call is on a non-BCCH TRX, and the Measurement Result
message regarding the call is present before the Channel Activation message is
delivered. In this case, the values of the fields bs power and ms power in the Channel
Activation message are not the maximum (the maximum power level of the 900M cell
is 5 and that of the 1800M cell is 0).
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set
Power Forecast Allowed to NO(No).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the setting
of Power Forecast Allowed.
Expected result: Power Forecast Allowed is set to NO.
----End
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 107 Configuring Active Power Control
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
361
108 Configuring Ciphering
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-113501
A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm and GBFD-113503 A5/3 Ciphering Algorithm.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The MSC and the MS supports ciphering.
Context
There are eight ciphering algorithms specified in the GSM protocols: A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3,
A5/4, A5/5, A5/6, and A5/7. In A5/0, ciphering is not supported. In A5/1, A5/2, and A5/3, safety
of CS and PS data of a user transmitted over the air interface is guaranteed.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A Interface
Tag, Um Interface Tag, and Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set
Encryption Algorithm to A5/0 and A5/3.
NOTE
l This procedure takes A5/3 as an example. The configuration procedures of other ciphering
algorithms are similar as this procedure.
l A5/0 in the Encryption Algorithm drop-down list must be selected.
l Verification Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 108 Configuring Ciphering
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
362
NOTE
The verification procedures take A5/3 as an example.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A Interface
Tag, Um Interface Tag, and Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Cell
Index to the index of the test cell and Encryption Algorithm to A5/0 and A5/3.
3. Double-click A Interface Trace on the LMT to create a trace task. On the Basic tab
page, specify the DPC of the test cell in the DPC(HEX) text box. Click BSSAP in
the Trace Type area. Specify the ID of the test cell in the Cell ID (cell1,
cell2, ...cell16): text box in the BSSAP tab page. Then, click Submit.
4. After opening the A interface tracing window, use the MS to initiate a call in the test
cell.
Expected result: The call is set up, and the IE chosen-encryption-algorithm in the
Cipher Mode Complete message is gsm-a5-3.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Cell
Index to the index of the test cell and Encryption Algorithm to A5/0.
----End
Example
/*Activation procedure*/
//Setting Interface Tags
SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus,
AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus;
//Setting ciphering algorithms
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
ENCRY=A5/0-1&A5/1-0&A5/2-0&A5/3-1&A5/4-0&A5/5-0&A5/6-0&A5/7-0;
/*Deactivation procedure*/
//Setting Encryption Algorithm to A5/0
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
ENCRY=A5/0-1&A5/1-0&A5/2-0&A5/3-0&A5/4-0&A5/5-0&A5/6-0&A5/7-0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 108 Configuring Ciphering
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
363
109 Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow
Optimization
This section describes how to activate, verify, deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113521
A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
None
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115830 VAMOS.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The A5/1 encryption algorithm has been enabled. For details, see 108 Configuring
Ciphering.
The MSC and MSs support encryption.
Context
Based on features related to transmission over the Um interface, the A5/1 Encryption Flow
Optimization feature provides an optimized encryption procedure, enhancing network
transmission security. This feature provides several security functions, which can be enabled as
required.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
Activating SDCCH fast handover
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with SDCCH HO
Allowed set to YES(Yes).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 109 Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
364
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with SD Quick HO set to ON
(On).
Activating TCH scheduled handover
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Intracell HO
Allowed set to YES(Yes).
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with TCH Time Handover
Switch set to ON(On) and TCH Time Handover Period set to a required value.
Activating Flex Training Sequence Code (TSC)
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Flex TSC Switch set to
ON(On).
Activating dummy bit randomization
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Dummy Bit
Randomization Switch set to ON(On).
Activating the function of stopping sending system information 5, 5bis, or 5ter after
encryption
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Stop Send SI 5/5bis/5ter
after Encrypt set to ON(On).
l Verification Procedure
Verifying SDCCH fast handover
1. Use an MS to initiate a call and trace BSSAP messages over the A interface by
referring to Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface.
Expected result: The Handover Performed message is displayed.
Verifying TCH scheduled handover
1. Use an MS to initiate a call and trace BSSAP messages over the A interface by
referring to Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface.
Expected result: The call is initiated successfully and the Handover Performed
message can be observed after the call lasts for a period specified by TCH Time
Handover Period.
Verifying Flex TSC
1. Use an MS to initiate a call, Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Um Interface,
and record the TSC value in a Assignment Command message.
2. Terminate the call.
3. Use an MS to initiate a call again, Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Um
Interface, and record the TSC value in a Assignment Command message.
4. Compare the two TSC values.
Expected result: The two TSC values are different.
Verifying dummy bit randomization
1. Use an MS to initiate multiple calls, Tracing LAPDm Messages Through BTS
Signaling Trace, and select the TRX carrying the SDCCH on the LAPDm tab.
Then, enter the number of the timeslot or sub-timeslot to be traced.
Expected result: When a call is assigned to the traced SDCCH, the lapdm-rr-frame
information element contained in the MailBox Trace message shows that not all
dummy bits are 2B. This indicates that dummy bits are randomized.
Verifying the function of stopping sending system information 5, 5bis, or 5ter after
encryption
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 109 Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
365
1. Use an MS to initiate a call, and use a drive test device to trace messages over the
Um interface.
Expected result: System information 5, 5bis, or 5ter is not found in the messages
transmitted over the Um interface.
l Deactivation Procedure
Deactivating SDCCH fast handover
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with SD Quick HO set to
OFF(Off).
Deactivating TCH scheduled handover
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with TCH Time Handover
Switch set to OFF(Off).
Deactivating Flex TSC
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Flex TSC Switch set to
OFF(Off).
Deactivating dummy bit randomization
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Dummy Bit
Randomization Switch set to OFF(Off).
Deactivating the function of stopping sending system information 5, 5bis, or 5ter after
encryption
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Stop Send SI 5/5bis/5ter
after Encrypt set to OFF(Off).
----End
Example
/*Activating A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization*/
//Activating SDCCH fast handover
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SIGCHANHOEN=YES;
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SDFASTHOSWITCH=ON;
//Activating TCH scheduled handover
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTRACELLHOEN=YES;
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCHTIMEHOSWITCH=ON,
TCHTIMEHOPERIOD=60;
//Activating Flex TSC
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FLEXTSCSWITCH=ON;
//Activating dummy bit randomization
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DUMMYBITRANDSWITCH=ON;
//Activating the function of stopping sending system information 5, 5bis,
or 5ter after encryption
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STOPSI5SWITCH=ON;
/*Deactivating A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization*/
//Deactivating SDCCH fast handover
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SDFASTHOSWITCH=OFF;
//Deactivating TCH scheduled handover
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCHTIMEHOSWITCH=OFF;
//Deactivating Flex TSC
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FLEXTSCSWITCH=OFF;
//Deactivating dummy bit randomization
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DUMMYBITRANDSWITCH=OFF;
//Deactivating the function of stopping sending system information 5,
5bis, or 5ter after encryption
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STOPSI5SWITCH=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 109 Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
366
110 Configuring Enhanced Full Rate
(EFR)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-113301
Enhanced Full Rate (EFR).
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Others
The MS is supported the EFR.
Context
The EFR is used to improve voice quality.
NOTE
In A over IP mode, EFR and E-Coder cannot be enabled forcibly as the current speech version.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, select
the FULL_RATE_VER2(Full-rate VER 2) check box under the parameter Speech
Version for the specified cell.
2. Optional: To enable EFR forcibly as the current speech version, run the BSC6900
MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Allow Forced EFR in Cell to
YES(Yes).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 110 Configuring Enhanced Full Rate (EFR)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
367
3. To further improve voice quality by enabling the E-Coder function, run the
BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, specify the subrack number
and slot number based on actual configuration of the DPU board and set Coding
Mode to ECODEC(Enhanced code mode).
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCACCESS to query the setting
of Speech Version in the cell.
Expected result: The activated speech versions are in the USED state.
l Deactivation Procedure
The feature does not need to be deactivated. At least one speech version must be configured
for the BSC6900. Therefore, the deactivation procedure is unnecessary. However, you can
run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS to modify the speech
version.
----End
Example
//Activating EFR
SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER2-1;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 110 Configuring Enhanced Full Rate (EFR)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
368
111 Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-113401 Half
Rate Speech (HR).
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
This feature enables the operator to expand the network capacity and improve the frequency
usage without increasing the hardware investment. In addition, a higher traffic volume can be
carried on an E1.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML Command SET GCELLCCACCESS with Speech
Version of a cell to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1), HALF_RATE_VER1
(Half-rate VER 1),HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3), and
HALF_RATE_VER2(Half-rate VER 2). HALF_RATE_VER2(Half-rate VER
2) of Speech Version is reserved for compliance with protocols. Currently, no service
uses HR speech version 2.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCACCESS to view the setting of
Speech Version of a specified cell.
Expected result: The activated speech versions are labeled USED.
l Deactivation Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 111 Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
369
At least one speech version must be configured for the BSC6900. Therefore, the
deactivation procedure is unnecessary. However, you can run the BSC6900 MML
command SET GCELLCCACCESS to modify the speech version.
----End
Example
//Activating half rate speech (HR)
SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-0&HALF_RATE_VER
1-1&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-1&FULL_RATE_VER5-0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 111 Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
370
112 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment
Between FR and HR
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113402
Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
The feature GBFD-113401 Half Rate Speech has been configured before this feature is
activated.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Others Prerequisites
The cell is not a concentric cell and works properly.
The CN, cell, and MS all support this feature.
Context
With this feature, full-rate channels (TCHFs) and half-rate channels (TCHHs) are dynamically
converted to meet the requirements of calls in a cell. This prevents the situation in which one
type of channel is congested whereas the other type of channel is idle.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV for each TRX you want to
configure. In this step, set TCH Rate Adjust Allow of a TRX to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD to set the threshold for
dynamic adjustment between TCHHs and TCHFs.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 112 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
371
NOTE
For non-AMR calls in a common cell, set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to an appropriate
value based on the actual requirement. For non-AMR calls in a concentric cell whose Load of
UL-OL Cells Rate Select Allowed is enabled, set Tch Traffic Busy Overlay Threshold and
Tch Traffic Busy Underlay Threshold to appropriate values. For AMR calls in common cells
and concentric cells, set AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold to an appropriate value
based on the actual requirement.
In channel assignment algorithms, the BSC6900 determines whether to assign TCHHs or
TCHFs based on the traffic volume of the network. If the channel seizure ratio exceeds TCH
Traffic Busy Threshold, the network is busy. If the network is busy, TCHHs are assigned
preferentially. If the network is not busy, TCHFs are assigned preferentially.
l Verification Procedure
The following procedure takes the non-AMR calls in a common cell as an example.
1. Monitor channel status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set TCH
Traffic Busy Threshold to 0 to ensure that new calls are preferentially assigned
TCHHs.
3. Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell.
Expected result: The call is successfully initiated and the communication is normal.
A TCHF is converted into two TCHHs and are occupied by MSs.
4. Terminate the call.
Expected result: The TCHHs are not converted into a TCHF.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, set
Administrative State to Lock(Lock) to block all TCHFs in the cell.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set TCH
Traffic Busy Threshold to 100 to ensure that new calls are preferentially assigned
TCHFs.
NOTE
In Step 6, if the calling party and the called party camp on the same cell, reserve a TCHF to
ensure successful setup of the call.
7. Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell.
Expected result: The call is successfully initiated and the communication is normal.
The MS occupies a TCHF.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV for each TRX you want to
configure. In this step, set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to NO(No).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to query the setting of TCH
Rate Adjust Allow.
Expected result: The value of TCH Rate Adjust Allow is NO.
----End
Example
//Activating Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=YES;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=1, TCHAJFLAG=YES;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, TCHAJFLAG=YES;
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCHBUSYTHRES=50;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 112 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
372
//Deactivating Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=NO;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=1, TCHAJFLAG=NO;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, TCHAJFLAG=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 112 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
373
113 Configuring the Cell Broadcast
About This Chapter
Through the cell broadcast service, the mobile operator can broadcast specified short messages
in the cells controlled by one or more BTSs in the mobile network. All the MSs in the cells can
receive the short messages.
113.1 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113601
Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23).
113.2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113602
Simplified Cell Broadcast.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 113 Configuring the Cell Broadcast
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
374
113.1 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast
(TS23)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113601
Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23).
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
An XPUa/XPUb board is configured.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113602 Simplified Cell
Broadcast.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
The Cell Broadcast Center (CBC) works properly.
The hardware and software of the CBC and the corresponding networking equipment
are installed.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR to modify the attributes
for a GSM operator. In this step, set Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSTANDARD
(SupportStandard CB).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD XPUVLAN to add the VLAN attributes of
the XPU board. In this step, specify IP Address as required and set the VLAN
attributes at the BSC6900 that is connected to the CBC.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET XPUPORT to set the attributes of ports on
the XPU board. In this step, set Panel Port Switch to OPEN(Open).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCBSADDR to add CBC information. In
this step, specify CBC INDEX, and set OP INDEX SET to the index of the operator
to which the cell to be verified belongs, Subrack No., Slot No., CPU NO, and BSC
IP to those of the XPU board added by running the ADD XPUVLAN command. In
addition, specify BSC Port, Mask, and CBC Port, and set BSC GateWay IP to the
gateway IP address of the lab, CBC IP to the IP address of the CBC, and If CB Shake
Hand to YES(Yes).
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set TRX and channel
attributes. In this step, specify Channel No., and set TRX ID to the index of the BCCH
TRX in the cell to be verified and Channel Type to BCCH_CBCH(BCCH
+CBCH) or SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH+CBCH).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 113 Configuring the Cell Broadcast
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
375
NOTE
If Channel Type is set to SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH+CBCH), set TRX ID to the index of any
TRX and Channel No. to a value within the range 0 to 3.
6. Add the settings of the BSC, cell, area, channel, and user on the CBC side, and divide
cells into different cell groups. In addition, send cell broadcast messages to the cells.
l Verification Procedure
1. Connect an Ethernet cable to the port whose Panel Port Switch is set to OPEN
(Open). Then, Ensure that the IP address of this port can be pinged.
Expected result: The IP address can be pinged. The port works properly.
2. Use an MS enabled with the CBC function to access the network in different cells,
and initiate message tracing on the BSC-CBC(Cb interface) and Abis interfaces.
Expected result:
In the initial phase of connection, the messages CBCH Query and CBCH Query
Response are traced on the BSC-CBC interface.
When system information messages are sent, messages Write/Replace Message and
Report are traced on the BSC-CBC interface.
The SMS Broadcast Command message is traced on the Abis interface.
The MS properly receives the cell broadcast messages sent from the CBC.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set
Support Cell Broadcast to NOTSPPRTBC(NotSupport CB).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV XPUVLAN. In this step, remove the VLAN
attributes of the XPU board add in step2.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCBSADDR. In this step, remove CBC
information add in step4.
----End
Example
/*Activating Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)*/
//Enabling cell broadcast
MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, SpprtCB=SPPRTSTANDARD;
//Setting the VLAN attributes of the XPU board
ADD XPUVLAN: SRN=0, SN=0, SSN=1, MAC=0, IP="10.161.72.185",
NETMASK="255.255.255.0";
//Setting attributes of the port on the XPU board
SET XPUPORT: SRN=0, SN=0, PortSwitch=OPEN;
//Adding CBC information
ADD GCBSADDR: CBCINDEX=0,
OPINDEXSET=OPINDEX0-1&OPINDEX1-0&OPINDEX2-0&OPINDEX3-0, SRN=0, SN=0,
CPUN=1, BSCIP="10.161.72.185", BSCPORT=5000, BSCGATEWAYIP="19.168.6.1",
CBCIP="19.168.6.20", MASK="255.255.255.0", CBCPORT=6000;
//Setting TRX parameters
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=BCCH_CBCH;
/*Deactivating Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)*/
//Disabling cell broadcast
MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, SpprtCB=NOTSPPRTBC;
//Remove the VLAN attributes of the XPU board
RMV XPUVLAN: SRN=0, SN=0, SSN=1;
//Remove CBC information
RMV GCBSADDR: CBCINDEX=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 113 Configuring the Cell Broadcast
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
376
113.2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113602
Simplified Cell Broadcast.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The XPUa/XPUb board is configured.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-113601 Short Message Service
Cell Broadcast (TS23).
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
The simplified cell broadcast feature provides the simple cell broadcast services without the
CBC system.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR with Support Cell
Broadcast set to SPPRTSIMPLE(SupportSimple CB) to modify the attributes of
a GSM operator.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN. In this step, specify Channel
No., and set TRX ID to the index of the BCCH TRX in the cell to be verified and
Channel Type to BCCH_CBCH(BCCH+CBCH) or SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH
+CBCH).
NOTE
If Channel Type is set to SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH+CBCH), set TRX ID to the index of any
TRX and Channel No. to a value within the range 0 to 3.
3. Send cell broadcast messages.
Sending a specified message without any restrictions
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSBC. In this step, set Cell
Index to the index of the cell to be verified and set Support Cell Broadcast
Name to YES(Yes). In addition, specify Chan ID, Geography Scope,
Broadcast Interval, Coding Scheme, and Broadcast Content.
Sending a specified message at a specified time and with a specified number of
transmissions
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GSMSCB. In this step, set Cell
Index List to the index of the cell to be verified, Geography Scope to
LAC_CI(CELL IMME), Code to 1, and Update to 0. In addition, specify
Repeat and Broadcast Interval, set Start Time and End Time to the
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 113 Configuring the Cell Broadcast
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
377
specified time, and set Chan ID, Coding Scheme, and Content of
Message as required.
NOTE
l Start Time set through the ADD GSMSCB command must be later than the real time of
the OMU.
l When Repeat is set to 60, the interval from Start Time to End Time must be greater than
one hour to ensure that the simple broadcast message can be successfully transmitted for
60 times.
l Verification Procedure
1. Create an Abis interface signaling tracing task on the LMT. Set the same channel on
the MS side as the channel specified by Chan ID in Step 3 (the setting procedure
depends on the MS brand).
Expected result: The SMS Broadcast Command message can be traced on the Abis
interface. The MS can receive the Content of Message specified in Step 3.
NOTE
Content of Message set through the SET GCELLSBC command can be received at any time.
Content of Message set through the ADD GSMSCB command can be received only within
the specified time period.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR with Support Cell
Broadcast set to NOTSPPRTBC(NotSupport CB).
----End
Example
/*Activation procedure*/
//Supporting Simple Cell Broadcast
MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, SpprtCB=SPPRTSIMPLE;
//Setting TRX and channel attributes
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=BCCH_CBCH;//
//Sending cell broadcast messages.
SET GCELLSBC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPORTCELLBROADCAST=YES, GS=LAC_CI,
CHANID=0, SCHEME=ENGLISH, BROADCASTCONTENT="Happy", BROADCASTINTERVAL=60;
/*Deactivation procedure*/
//Not supporting Cell Broadcast
MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, SpprtCB=NOTSPPRTBC;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 113 Configuring the Cell Broadcast
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
378
114 Configuring Automatic Level
Control (ALC)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115601
Automatic Level Control (ALC).
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115701 TFO or GBFD-115702
TrFO.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the
license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2 Overview
of Feature Activation Guide.
l Others Prerequisites
TDM transmission is used over the A interface.
Context
The ALC feature adjusts the gains of uplink and downlink digital speech signals and changes
the amplitude of digital speech signals at an interval of 20 ms. This retains the speech signal
level in the entire network in a stable state and ensures that the speech quality is not affected by
the volume fluctuation of both parties.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
If the fixed level mode is required, perform the following operations:
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch to
ON(On), ALC Mode to FIXEDLEVEL(Fixed level mode), and ALC Fix Target
Level to its recommended value for the DPU board.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 114 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
379
NOTE
If DSP No. is not specified, the attributes of all the DSPs are set, it can be set as required.
To increase the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Target Level to a greater value. Its maximum
value is -4. To decrease the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Target Level to a smaller value. Its
minimum value is -23.
If the fixed gain mode is required, perform the following operations:
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch to
ON(On), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode), and ALC Fix Gain to its
recommended value for the DPU board.
NOTE
To increase the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Gain to 12. To decrease the acoustic volume, set
ALC Fix Gain to 3.
If the adaptive mode is required, perform the following operations:
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch to
ON(On) and ALC Mode to ADAPTIVE(Adaptive mode) on the DPU board. In
addition, set ALC Max Target Level and ALC Min Target Level to their
recommended values.
l Verification Procedure
The following takes the fixed gain mode as an example to describe the verification
operations.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch of
all the DSPs on the tested DPU board to ON(On), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed
gain mode), and ALC Fix Gain to 0.
2. Run the BSC6900MML command LST TCPARA to check whether all the
parameters set in Step 1 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previous
commands are executed successfully.
3. In the same cell, use MS1 to call MS2 with a normal voice. Then, hang up the phone.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch of
all the DSPs on the tested DPU board to ON(On), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed
gain mode), and ALC Fix Gain to 12.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to check whether all the
parameters set in Step 4 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previous
commands are executed successfully.
6. Use MS1 to call MS2 again. Speak with a normal volume on MS1.
Expected result: The volume of the heard voice increases, compared with the volume
heard in Step 3.
NOTE
The previous steps are performed when ALC Mode is set to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain
mode). Similar verification steps are required when ALC Mode is set to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed
gain mode) or ADAPTIVE(Adaptive mode).
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch to
OFF(Off) for the DPU board.
----End
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 114 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
380
Example
//Activating ALC when the fixed level mode is used
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AlcEnFlag=ON, AlcAdaptMode=FIXEDLEVEL,
AlcFixLev=-18;
//Activating ALC when the fixed gain mode is used
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AlcEnFlag=ON, AlcAdaptMode=FIXEDGAIN,
AlcFixGain=0;
//Activating ALC when the adaptive mode is used)
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AlcEnFlag=ON, AlcAdaptMode=ADAPTIVE,
AlcMaxLev=-4, AlcMinLev=-23;
//Deactivating ALC
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AlcEnFlag=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 114 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
381
115 Configuring Acoustic Echo
Cancellation (AEC)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115602
Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC).
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115701 TFO or GBFD-115702
TrFO.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the
license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2 Overview
of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
A over TDM transmission is used.
Context
The AEC helps reduce the acoustic echo caused by the terminal, improving the speech quality.
Acoustic echo is generated when the MS speaker is not completely isolated from the MS receiver.
After the voice of one party (Party A) reaches the MS, some voice is transmitted back to Party
A through the receiver. Then, Party A can hear his/her own voice. The phenomena is known as
acoustic echo. AEC is a feature with which acoustic echoes can be pre-assessed and eliminated
by means of the analysis on forward and backward voice signals.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with AEC Switch set to ON
(On) and other parameters set to their default values for the DPU board.
l Verification Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 115 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
382
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with AEC Switch set to OFF
(Off) and other parameters set to their default values for the DPU board.
2. Use one test MS (MS 1) to make a call to another test MS (MS 2). Check that acoustic
echo occurs, and then hand off the call.
NOTE
The echo is easily generated when a common MS enabled with the handsfree function is placed
in a sealing box.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with AEC Switch of the DPU
board on the test BSC set to ON(On) and other parameters set to their default values.
4. Run the MML command LST TCPARA to check whether all the parameters set in
step Step 3 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previous commands are
executed successfully.
5. Use MS 1 to make a call to MS 2 again, and check whether acoustic echoes are reduced.
If the echoes are reduced, finish the verification.
If the echoes are not reduced, hand off the call and then run the BSC6900 MML
command SET TCPARA with AEC Echo Return Loss set to a smaller value within
the valid range. If AEC Echo Return Loss is already set to the smallest value, set
AEC Echo Path Delay to a greater value. Repeat step Step 5 to check whether the
echoes are reduced.
NOTE
l The acoustic echo is generated between MSs. The echo generated between an MS and a fixed-
line phone is termed the electric echo. The electric echo problem is solved by the CN side.
l When satellite transmission on the Abis or Ater interface is required, AEC Path Delay must be
set, so as to eliminate the extra delay caused by satellite transmission.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with AEC Switch set to OFF
(Off) for the DPU board.
----End
Example
//Activating AEC
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AecEnFlag=ON;
//Deactivating AEC
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AecEnFlag=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 115 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
383
116 Configuring Automatic Noise
Restraint (ANR)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115603
Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR).
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
When a call uses the Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR) feature, ALC is mutually exclusive
to features GBFD-115701 TFO and GBFD-115702 TrFO.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the
license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2 Overview
of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
A over TDM transmission is used.
Context
ANR reduces the background noise on the uplink speech signals and improves the signal-to-
noise ratio (SNR) and speech intelligibility. In this way, the other party of the call can clearly
hear the voice.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with ANR Switch set to UPLINK
(On for uplink) or DOWNLINK(On for dnlink), Noise Suppression Algorithm
Switch to MODE1(Optimized version), and Noise Attenuation Mode, Noise
Suppression Mode, and Transparent Transmit Thresh of Noise Lev set to
appropriate values for the DPU board.
l Verification Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 116 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
384
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with ANR Switch for all the DSPs
on the DPU board to be tested set to OFF(Off).
2. Ensure that two test MSs (MS 1 and MS 2) are in the same cell. Use MS 1 to make a
call to MS 2 in a noisy environment. Check that great background noises can be heard
through the MS 2, and then hand off the call.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with ANR Switch for all the DSPs
on the DPU board to be tested set to UPLINK(On for uplink) or DOWNLINK(On
for dnlink).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to check whether all the
parameters set in step Step 3 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previous
commands are executed successfully.
5. Use MS 1 to make a call to MS 2 again. Speak at the normal volume on MS 1, and
check that the background noises heard through MS 2 are reduced.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with ANR Switch for all the DSPs
on the DPU board to be tested set to OFF(Off).
----End
Example
//Activating ANR
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AnrEnFlag=UPLINK, AnrMode=MODE1,
AnrNseReductMode=RELATIVELEVEL, AnrNseReductLev=RELATIVE_2,
AnrByPassNseLev=-43;
//Deactivating ANR
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AnrEnFlag=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 116 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
385
117 Configuring TFO
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115701
TFO.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115601 Automatic Level
Control (ALC), GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC), GBFD-115603
Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR), GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation
(ANC), GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC),
GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment, GBFD-117702
BTS Local Switch, GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch, GBFD-115702 TrFO, or
GBFD-118602 A over IP.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
l Others Prerequisites
TDM transmission is used over the A interface.
Context
TFO solves the problem of speech signal damage in repeated encoding and decoding by
canceling one encoding and decoding process to improve the signal quality.
To enable TFO for calls using the AMR speech version, the BSC version and BTS version must
meet the mapping relationship in the following table.
BSC Version BTS Version Support TFO for Calls Using
AMR
GBSS8.1 GBSS8.1 Support
GBSS8.1 GBSS9.0 and later Not support
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 117 Configuring TFO
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
386
GBSS9.0 and later GBSS8.1 Not support
GBSS9.0 and later GBSS9.0 and later Support

To enable TFO for calls using the non-AMR speech version, there is no requirements for the
mapping between the BSC version and BTS version.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TFO
Switch to ENABLE(Enable).
2. Configure the speech version by performing the following operations:
For non-AMR services:
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step,
set Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1),
FULL_RATE_VER2(Full-rate VER 2), or HALF_RATE_VER1(Half-
rate VER 1).
For AMR services:
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A
Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus, set Um Interface Tag to
GSM_PHASE_2Plus , set Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus .
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step,
set Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1) and
FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3), or FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-
rate VER 1) and HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3).
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, set
AMR ACS[F] to 4_75KBIT/S, 5_90KBIT/S, 7_40KBIT/S, and
12_2KBIT/S, or set AMR ACS[H] to 4_75KBIT/S, 5_90KBIT/S,
7_40KBIT/S.
l Verification Procedure
NOTE
The following describes how to verify the TFO function for non-AMR services.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD with TCH Traffic Busy
Threshold set to 100 to ensure that new calls are preferentially assigned full-rate
TCHs.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, only set
Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1).
NOTE
Only FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1) is selected, two test MSs use the same FR
coding scheme. This ensures the implementation of TFO.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TFO
Switch of the test cell to DISABLE(Disable).
4. Use MS1 and MS2 to access the network from the test cell, and use MS1 to call MS2.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 117 Configuring TFO
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
387
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES. In this step, set User Identity
Type to BYMSISDN(By MSISDN) and MSISDN to the ISDNs of MS1 and MS2.
Check whether the value of Tfo State is TFO not start in the Query Result area.
6. Terminate the call.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TFO
Switch of the test cell to ENABLE(Enable).
8. Use MS1 to call MS2 again.
9. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES. In this step, set User Identity
Type to BYMSISDN(By MSISDN) and MSISDN to the ISDNs of MS1 and MS2.
Check whether the value of Tfo State is TFO start in the Query Result area. If the
value of Tfo State is TFO start and the speech quality improves, TFO has been
enabled.
NOTE
Ensure that an inter-BSC or inter-cell handover is not performed during the call when verifying
TFO. This is because the DSP CALLRES command cannot be executed after such a handover.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TFO
Switch of the test cell to DISABLE(Disable).
----End
Example
//Activating TFO
/*Activating TFO for non-AMR services*/
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NBAMRTFOSWITCH=ENABLE;
SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-0&HALF_RATE_VER
1-0&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-0&FULL_RATE_VER5-0;
/*Activating TFO for AMR services*/
SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus;
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NBAMRTFOSWITCH=ENABLE;
SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-1&HALF_RATE_VER
1-0&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-0&FULL_RATE_VER5-0;
SET GCELLCCAMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ACTCDSETF=4_75KBIT/S-1&5_15KBIT/
S-0&5_90KBIT/S-1&6_70KBIT/S-0&7_40KBIT/S-1&7_95KBIT/S-0&10_2KBIT/
S-0&12_2KBIT/S-1;
//Deactivating TFO
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NBAMRTFOSWITCH=DISABLE;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 117 Configuring TFO
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
388
118 Configuring Automatic Noise
Compensation (ANC)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115703
Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC).
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
The DPUa, DPUb, or DPUc board starts normally.
l Dependencies on Other Features
When a call uses the Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC) feature, ALC is mutually
exclusive to features GBFD-115701 TFO and GBFD-115702 TrFO.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the
license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2 Overview
of Feature Activation Guide.
l Other Prerequisites
A over TDM transmission is used.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ANC Switch to
ON(On), and set ANC Target SNR and ANC Max Gain to the recommended values
for the DPU board.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set Subrack No. and
Slot No. to those of the DPU board, and set ANC Switch to OFF(Off).
2. Place MS1 in a noisy place, and then use MS2 to call MS1.
Expected result: MS2 cannot hear the voice of MS1 clearly.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set Subrack No. and
Slot No. to those of the DPU board. Then, set ANC Switch to ON(On), and set ANC
Target SNR and ANC Max Gain to the recommended values.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 118 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
389
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to check the values of ANC
Switch, ANC Target SNR, and ANC Max Gain.
Expected result: The value of ANC Switch is ON, which indicates that the ANC
feature is enabled.
5. Use MS2 to call MS1 again.
Expected result: The voice of MS1 is clearer.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ANC Switch to
OFF(Off).
----End
Example
//Activating ANC
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AncEnFlag=ON, AncSnrGateRS=12, AncMaxGain=6;
//Deactivating ANC
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AncEnFlag=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 118 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
390
119 Configuring Enhancement Packet
Loss Concealment (EPLC)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115704
Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC).
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
The following feature has been configured before this feature is activated:
GBFD-115501 AMR FR, GBFD-115502 AMR HR, or GBFD-113301 Enhanced Full
Rate.
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115701 TFO,
GBFD-115702 TrFO, GBFD-118602 A over IP, GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch or
GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
With EPLC, frames of lost packets can be recovered and compensated. To a certain extent, this
helps solve the problem of speech frame loss in a poor transmission or radio environment, thereby
improving the network performance.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set EPLC Switch to
ON(On) and retain the default values of other parameters.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCACCESS to query the value of
Speech Version.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide
119 C